AN INTRODUCTION 



TO THE 



STUDY OF THE CHALDEE LANGUAGE 



COMPRISING 



A GRAMMAR (BASED UPON WINER'S), 



AN ANALYSIS OF THE TEXT OE THE CHALDEE PORTION 



OF 



Cfye §00k of gamtl. 



BY 



THE REV. GEORGE LONGFIELD, A. M., 

FELLOW OF TRINITY COLLEGE, LUBLIN. 





LONDON: 

WHITTAKER & CO., AVE-MARIA LANE. 

DUBLIN: HODGES, SMITH, & CO. 

1859. 






DUBLIN : 

^rtntetf at i^c ganibcrsitg press, 

BY M. H. GILL. 



PREFACE. 



The Chaldee Grammar which forms the first part of this 
work is mainly based upon Winer's " Grammatik des Bib- 
lischen und Targumischen Chaldaismus," to which my ob- 
ligations are very extensive. I have used and compared 
both the first edition of Winer's Grammar, which appeared 
in 1824, and the second, which, with considerable changes 
and additions, was published in 1842. In some few in- 
stances I have adhered rather to the views put forward in 
the first edition. The present Grammar, though shorter 
than Winer's, will probably be considered sufficiently ex- 
tensive for the class of students for whom it is intended, — 
those who are already acquainted with the principles of 
Hebrew Grammar. Though Winer's work is the source 
from which my materials have been mainly derived, I have 
also availed myself of the assistance of other treatises on the 
Grammar of the Chaldee and the cognate dialects. I may 
mention among the works most frequently consulted — 
Fiirst's " Lehrgebaude der Arimaischen Idiome," and the 



IV PKEFACE. 

Chaldee part of Petermann's " Porta Linguarum Orienta- 
lium." The references that will be found to the Hebrew 
Grammar of Gesenius do not express the entire of my ob- 
ligations to that work ; but it seemed unnecessary to mul- 
tiply references to a book which is in the hands of every 
student of the Shemitic languages. 

As the works by which I was most materially aided in 
the preparation of the Analysis of the Text of Daniel, I may 
specify, in addition to the Lexicons of Buxtorf, Gesenius, 
and the portion of that of Fiirst which is published, the 
Scholia of Rosenmiiller, and Havernick's " Commentar 
uber das Buch Daniel." As a reading-book, I thought that 
the Chaldee part of Daniel would be more acceptable to 
many students than extracts from the Targums; and as 
the differences of idiom between the Biblical Chaldee and 
the language of the Targums have been generally indicated 
in the Grammar, a student who has gone through the 
Chaldee portion of Daniel, with the aid of the Grammar 
and Analysis, will experience no difficulty in proceeding 
with the study of the Targums. 

The fact that the Chaldee is the original language of a 
portion of the Scriptures would alone justify an attempt 
like the present to furnish a simple introduction to the 
study of the language. Its importance in a philological 
point of view, and as affording aid to the student in ac- 
quiring the other Shemitic dialects, and especially the 
Syriac, to which it is so intimately related, will also be 



PREFACE. V 

generally admitted. The value of the Targums, and par- 
ticularly of those of Onkelos and Jonathan, as aids to the 
interpretation of the Old Testament, affords another strong 
motive for the study of the Chaldee. Finally, the extent 
to which the later Hebrew has been modified by the adop- 
tion of Chaldee forms and words, makes an acquaintance 
with the language necessary for those who would extend 
their studies to the Talmud and Eabbinical literature. 
The language of part, at least, of the Talmud may be con- 
sidered as Chaldee, and that of the Rabbinical writers ge- 
nerally abounds with Chaldee forms and words. 

When I commenced this work, 1 was not aware that 
any Manual of the Chaldee Language had appeared in this 
country; but when my work was ready for the press, 
there appeared in New York, and simultaneously in Lon- 
don, a second edition of the " Manual of the Chaldee Lan- 
guage," by Dr. Elias Riggs. The Grammar in the former 
edition was chiefly derived from the first edition of Winer's 
Grammar. In the new edition, Dr. Riggs, as he states, 
availed himself of whatever seemed to be improvements in 
Winer's second edition, and incorporated numerous notes 
of his own. The book contains a Chrestomathy and Vo- 
cabulary, and an Appendix on the Rabbinic and Samaritan 
dialects. I was not, however, discouraged from proceeding 
with my work, as the plan of it differed in many respects 
from that of the Manual of Dr. Riggs. 

Injustice to myself, it maybe right to mention that 



VI PREFACE. 

my time was necessarily much occupied with other duties 
during the greater part of the period in which I was en- 
gaged in the preparation of this work, so that I cannot 
hope that it is altogether free from such inaccuracies as 
are the almost necessary consequence of interrupted 
study. 



The edition of the Hebrew Grammar of Gesenius to which references 
are made is the translation by Davies from the seventeenth German edition 
(London : S. Bagster and Sons). 

The examples in the Syntax are taken almost exclusively from the 
Biblical Chaldee, and from Onkelos, which in the case of examples from 
the Pentateuch is always to be understood as the Targum referred to, un- 
less the contrary is stated. 



ERRATA. 

Page 9, line 19, for ps> read pp\ 
„ 10, note, for »__, !) read n>— , ffi. 
„ 12, line 6, for half- vowel «ff(? short vowel. 
„ 16, „ 14, for btap w«(? Ve>5. 
„ 18, „ 20, for Vis;? read bisfc. 
„ 19, „ 20, for ^p, or fysj? raw? ^>tpp, or ^bj?. 
„ 21, ,, 2, /or simple vocal Sheva read the more usual — . 
„ 31, }J 12, /br Ithpahel raw? Ithpahal. 

,, 109, ,, 4, /or usual — read usual — -. 

„ 109, „ 35, for jn» read |»tm. 

„ 115, „ 33, «/fer 1 part, wri Pehal. 

„ 116, „ 37, for 'rTtfitf-Y] rea^ »rn3iw. 

,, 153, „ 10, /or rtfe? r^<? ♦rrto. 



CONTENTS. 



INTRODUCTION. 

Page. 

On the Chaldee Language and Literature, 1 



Part I.— OF THE ELEMENTS. 
Chapter I. — Of the Letters, Vowels, and Accents. 

Section. 

1. Of the Letters, 6 

2. Of the Vowels, 7 

3. Of the Tone, 8 

Chapter II. — Changes of Consonants and Vowels. 

4. General View, 8 

5. Changes of Consonants, 9 

6. Changes of Vowels, 11 

Part H.—PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. 
Chapter I Of the Pronoun. 

7. The Personal Pronouns, 13 

8. The separate Personal Pronouns, 13 

9. Other Pronouns, 14 

Chapter H. — Of the Verb. 

10. General View, 14 

11. On the Inflexion of the Regular Verb, 17 

12. Remarks on the Paradigm of the Regular Verb generally, 19 

13. Remarks on the several Conjugations, .20 

14. Personal Inflexion of the Participles, 21 

b 



X CONTENTS. 

Section. Page. 

15. Unusual Conjugations, and Quadriliteral Verbs, 22 

16. On the Suffixes of Verbs, 24 

17. The Verb with Suffixes, . . . : 25 

18. Of Irregular Verbs in general, 27 

19. Guttural Verbs, 27 

20. Contracted Verbs p, Paradigm C, 29 

21. Contracted Verbs yy, Paradigm D, 30 

22. Feeble Verbs ♦&, Paradigm E, 31 

23. Contracted Verbs *s, . • . . . 32 

24. Feeble Verbs »a, 33 

25. Feeble Verbs iy and »y, Paradigm F, 34 

26. Verbs kS, Paradigm G, 35 

27. Remarks on the Paradigm of Verbs nS, 36 

28. Verbs nS, with Suffixes, 37 

29. Verbs doubly Anomalous, 38 

30. Defective Verbs, 38 



Chapter III Of the Noun. 

31. Primitives and Derivatives, 39 

32. On the Marks of Gender of Nouns, 40 

33. Verbal Nouns, 41 

34. Denominative Nouns, 43 

35. Of the Plural of Nouns, 44 

36. States of Nouns, 45 

37. Of the Construct State, 45 

38. Of the Emphatic or Definite State, 46 

39. On the Suffixes of Nouns, 48 

40. Nouns with Suffixes, 49 

41. Inflexion of Masculine Nouns, 50 

42. Inflexion of Feminine Nouns, 56 

43. Irregular and Defective Nouns, 58 

44. Numerals, 59 



Chapter IV Of the Particles. 

45. In General, 63 

46. Adverbs, 64 

47. Prepositions, "... 65 

48. Conjunctions and Interjections, 66 



CONTENTS. XI 



Part III— SYNTAX. 
Chapter I Syntax of the Noun. 

Section. Page. 

49. Relation of the Substantive to the Adjective, 67 

50. Of the Plural, and the Repetition of Nouns, 68 

51. Signs of the different Cases, 68 

52. Use of the Accusative, . . 69 

53. Modes of expressing the Comparative and Superlative, 70 

54. Syntax of the Numerals, 71 

55. Construction of Adjectives, 72 

56. Case Absolute, 73 



Chapter II. 

57. Syntax of the Pronoun, 74 

58. Use of the Relative Pronoun, 75 

59. Of the Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns, 76 

60. Mode of expressing the Pronouns for which proper forms are wanting 

in the Chaldee, . 77 



Chapter III. — Syntax of the Verb. 

61. The Use of the Preterite and Future, 78 

62. Use of the Imperative and Infinitive, . . 80 

63. Use of the Participle, 81 

64. Expression of the Optative, 82 

65. Number and Person of the Yerb, 82 

66. Regimen of Verbs, 83 

67. Use of Prepositions with Verbs, 85 

68. Verbs used for Adverbs, 85 

69. Ellipsis, Constructio Prcegnans, 86 



Chapter IV. — Syntax of the Particles. 

70. Of Words expressing Negation, 87 

71. Of Adverbs repeated, of Interrogative Particles, &c, 87 



Xll CONTENTS. 



PARADIGMS. 

Page. 

Paradigm A— The Regular Verb, §§11-13, 88, 89 

Paradigm B— The Regular Verb in Pehal, with Suffixes, §§ 16, 17, . . . 90 

Paradigm C— Verbs {&, § 20, . 91 

Paradigm D — Contracted Verbs yy, § 21, 92 

Paradigm E— Feeble Verbs %, § 22, 93 

Paradigm F— Feeble Verbs "y, §25, . , 94,95 

Paradigm G— Verbs kS, §§ 26, 27, 96, 97 



Analysis op the Text of the Chaldee Portion of the Book of 
Daniel, .99 

Index, 173 



CHALDEE GRAMMAR. 



INTRODUCTION. 

ON THE CHALDEE LANGUAGE AND LITERATUEE. 

The Chaldee Language belongs to the Aramaic branch 
of the great Shemitic family of languages. The Aramaic 
is so designated from Aram, the ancient name of the dis- 
trict in which the language was native. Aram included 
those countries which in later times were known as Syria, 
Mesopotamia, and Babylonia. The name belongs to the 
most remote antiquity, Aram being mentioned as one of 
the sons of Shem in the table of nations in Genesis (x. 22). 
The country "Apt/ma, spoken of by Homer and Hesiod 
(II. ii. 783 ; Theog. 301), is by many conjectured to be 
the same as Aram. 

Besides the proofs derived from historical traditions, 
which trace the migrations of the Shemitic tribes from the 
north towards the south and west, the Aramaic dialect 
itself supplies evidence, in its harsh sounds and poverty of 
vowels, of greater antiquity than the other Shemitic dia- 
lects. We see in it an earlier phase and a more primitive 
condition of the language, which, under favourable circum- 
stances as regards climate and civilization, was developed 
into the Hebrew and the Arabic. 



2 INTRODUCTION. 

The following may be mentioned as the principal charac- 
teristics of the Aramaic: — 1. Its poverty of vowels, many 
words which are dissyllables in the Hebrew being mono- 
syllables in the Aramaic. 2. The mode of expressing the 
definite article by a suffix (the emphatic or definite state). 
3. The mode of expressing the genitive by a prefix ; also 
7 as the mark of the accusative. 4. The formation of a 
proper tense from the participle, 5. The formation of all 

Is 

the passives by the prefix JlK, I] . 

It is a question on which philologists are not agreed, 
whether the Chaldee, or, as it is otherwise designated, the 
East Aramaic, should be regarded as a distinct dialect 
from the Syriac, or West Aramaic. The following are 
the peculiarities of the Chaldee, which are generally held 
to amount to dialectical differences : — 1. The preference 
in the Chaldee as compared with the Syriac for clear vowel 
sounds, a, o, and i, being employed in the former, where 
the duller sounds 0, u, and e, occur in the latter. 2. The 
avoiding of diphthongs in the Chaldee, the simple long 
vowels o and i being used where the Syriac has the diph- 
thongs au and ai ; the absence, also, of otiant letters. 3. 
The doubling of consonants. 4. The absence of the pre- 
formative ft in the infinitives of the other conjugations, 
except Pehal. 5. The form of the 3 pers. fut. singular 
and plural, of which the preformative is \ whereas, in 
the Syriac it is j (Nun). By some scholars,* however, it 
is contended that these and other less striking deviations 
of the Chaldee from the Syriac cannot be recognised as 
dialectical distinctions; that the languages are the same, 
being unlike only in the pronunciation of the vowels and 

* E. g. Fiirst and HupfelcL 



INTRODUCTION. 



in the mode of writing, and that any differences which may 
be observed between the language of the Targums and 
that of the early Syriac literature are explicable from the 
different ideas and modes of thought of the Jewish and 
Syrian writers ; that in fact the Chaldee is a Jewish, and 
the Syriac a Christian reflex of the same Aramaic lan- 
guage. 

The name Chaldee, the common designation of the 
language of the Aramaic writings of the Jews, is not pro- 
perly used. Its application, doubtless, arose from a mis- 
conception of Dan. i. 4 ; but the Chaldee language, 
D^^5 V^7> there mentioned, is a different thing, the 
court language of Babylon at the time, which can be shown 
to have been a Medo-Persian dialect. The language of 
which we now speak is called rPEHK, Aramaic, Dan. ii. 4; 
and this term, JTOT^, here and where it elsewhere occurs 
in the Hebrew Scriptures, is rendered ovpioTi in the Greek 
versions. The Talmudists apply the same term, V]*)D, to 
the Aramaic as spoken in Palestine. Thus it appears 
that the terms JTOH^ and ^D^ID were regarded as inter- 
changeable, and were employed without any reference to a 
distinction between the East Aramaic, or Chaldee, and the 
West Aramaic, or Syriac. The stress, however, which is 
laid upon this circumstance by those who deny the dia- 
lectical independence of the Chaldee and Syriac, is unwar- 
rantable. 

The progress of the displacement of the Hebrew lan- 
guage by the Aramaic in Palestine cannot now be accu- 
rately traced. The Babylonian captivity, no doubt, was a 
principal, though not the exclusive cause of this revolution. 
When the Jews returned after the captivity there was in 
central Palestine a mixed Aramaic and Hebrew dialect, the 



4 INTRODUCTION. 

Samaritan, a result of the plantation of the country by 
colonists of Syrian origin after the deportation of the Ten 
Tribes (II. Kings, xvii. 24). This must have accelerated 
the decline of the sacred language. When, under the 
Seleucidse, Palestine formed a part of a Syrian kingdom, 
the Hebrew received its final blow, and yielded completely 
to the Aramaic, which thenceforth became the language 
both of conversation and writing. It is, of course, to this 
Aramaic language, which was at the time the popular lan- 
guage of the Jews or Hebrews, that the terms efipaioTi 
and eppafe hidXeKTo? are applied in the New Testament. 

The literature that we possess in the so-called Chaldee 
language consists of some portions of the canonical books 
of the Old Testament, namely, Ezra, ch. iv. 8, to vi. 19, 
and vii. 12 to 27; Daniel, ch. ii. 4, to the end of ch. vii. ; 
and Jeremiah, ch. x. 11; and of a series of translations or 
paraphrases of the books of the Old Testament, composed 
at different periods, and exhibitiug different states of the 
language. They are known as the Targums, so called from 
the Chaldee verb D«nj?, to translate or interpret, and they 
were designed as expositions of the Scriptures, which be- 
came necessary when the Hebrew language ceased to be 
intelligible to the people.* The Talmud can scarcely be 

* There are extant ten Targums on different parts of the Old Testa- 
ment, three of which are on the Pentateuch, namely, the three first in the 
following enumeration : — 1. The Targum of Onkelos. 2. The Targum of 
the Pseudo-Jonathan. 3. The Jerusalem Targum. 4. The Targum of 
Jonathan Ben "Uzziel on the Prophets, in which, according to the Jewish 
classification, are included Joshua, Judges, I. and II. Samuel, and I. and 
II. Kings. 5. The Targum of Eabbi Joseph the Blind on the Hagiographa. 
6. An anonymous Targum on the Books of Buth, Esther, Ecclesiastes, the 
Song of Solomon, and the Lamentations of Jeremiah. 7, 8, 9. Three Tar- 
gums on the Book of Esther, two of which, however, are not really dis- 



INTRODUCTION. 5 

spoken of as belonging to Chaldee literature. The language 
of the Gemaras may indeed be regarded as a very degene- 
rate species of Chaldee ; but that of the Mishna is rather 
a Hebrew dialect with some Chaldee forms. 

Winer thus classifies the extant literature in refer- 
ence to the purity of the language : — In the first class he 
places the Targum of Onkelos, the language of which is 
most free from Hebraisms ; in the second class he places 
the Biblical Chaldee ; in the third, the other Targums, ex- 
cept that of Onkelos. In these last we meet with many 
words introduced from other languages, with contractions, 
and new forms resembling those found in the Syriac and 
in Rabbinical Hebrew. 

tinct. 10. A Targum on the two Books of Chronicles. These Targums 
together comprise the whole of the Old Testament, with the exception of 
the Books of Daniel, Ezra, and Nehemiah. The general opinion as to the 
age of Onkelos, the author of the most valuable of the paraphrases, is that 
he lived about the time" of our Saviour. "Winer, however, places him in 
the second century. The Targum next in value to that of Onkelos is that 
of Jonathan the son of TTzziel, who is placed by some in the age preceding 
our Saviour, but by, others as late as the fourth century. There is little 
doubt but that the former opinion is nearer the truth. The Targum of the 
Pseudo-Jonathan, so called because it was for a long time ascribed to Jona- 
than Ben TTzziel, is perhaps only another recension of that which also forms 
the basis of the Jerusalem Targum. 



PAKT I. 

THE ELEMENTS, 



CHAPTER L 

OF THE LETTERS, VOWELS, AND ACCENTS. 



§ 1 OF THE LETTERS. 

( l.) The Chaldee letters are identical with the Hebrew both in 
form and as regards their sounds. In fact, the common 
square character which is used in all Hebrew manuscripts 
and printed books is properly Aramaic, and not Hebrew, 
as is proved by the earliest written monuments in both 
languages. At what time it superseded the older Hebrew 
character cannot be accurately denned. The Jewish tra- 
dition is, that the change was made by Ezra after the Cap- 
tivity, and this tradition has been to a certain extent ad- 
mitted by many eminent scholars. There are, however, 
strong reasons for concluding that the change was not 
sudden, but progressive, and that the use of the square 
character by the Jews was not completely established be- 
fore the end of the first century of our era.* 

* The question relating to the application of the square character to 
Hebrew writing belongs rather to Hebrew than to Chaldee grammar. A 
summary of the various opinions held by modern scholars on the subject 
will be found in Chap. in. of Davidson's " Treatise on Biblical Criti- 



Chap. I.] OF THE LETTERS, VOWELS, AND ACCENTS. 



§ 2.—OF THE VOWELS. 

The vowel-points also, as well as the various diacritical (2.) 
signs, are the same in Chaldee as in Hebrew. The vocal- 
ization by the points is, however, less consistent and regu- 
lar in the Chaldee than in the Hebrew ; and for this, differ- 
ent reasons may be assigned. In the first place, the system 
of vowel-points having been contrived in reference to the 
Hebrew language, was not probably in all respects appli- 
cable to the Chaldee, so that no care on the part of the 
punctators could have prevented apparent irregularities. 
Secondly, the punctators were unquestionably misled in 
many instances by the analogy of the Hebrew : thus, when 
they pointed the words NDJin, G^J^, they were misled by 
the analogy of the corresponding Hebrew words il-Din, 
ttH3$, and adopted this irregular mode of pointing instead 
of tfMIH, £^$, which would rightly represent the Chaldee 
pronunciation of the words. Again, the Masoretic vocal- 
ization was applied to the Chaldee before it had attained 
its ultimate perfection ; and as, subsequently, less attention 
was paid to the text of the Chaldee parts of Scripture, and 
to the Targums, than to the Hebrew text, it is natural that 
we should discover many imperfections and irregularities 
in the vowel system as applied to the Chaldee. In Chaldee, 
contrary to the rule in Hebrew, we find long vowels in un- 
accented close syllables, and short vowels in open syllables. 
It is a result of this that the rules which hold in Hebrew 
as to the distinction between Qametz and Qametz-Chatuph 
are not applicable in Chaldee, and the true value of the 
sign T is only to be known from the nature of the word. 
The employment of Qametz-Chatuph, however, is rare in 
the Chaldee. 



THE ELEMENTS. [Part I. 



§ 3.— OF THE TONE. 



(3.) In Chaldee, as in Hebrew, the general law of accentua- 
tion is, that the tone rests on the last syllable. The excep- 
tions, where it is on the penultima, are few, and are, for the 
most part, as follows : — 1. In nouns whose form is the same 
as that of the Hebrew segholates, e. g., ^/^? ^J/CO, w ^ n 
respect to which it is to be observed, that this segholate 
form is found only in Biblical Chaldee. 2. In verbal forms 
ending in Jl, KJ, V, 1, and in some of those ending in &-, 

e.g., h|?§J, *6t?p, ^Jp£, ! Mj?'; 3. In nouns and verbal 
forms with certain pronominal suffixes, that is, with the 
suffixes ^ -, ^, »H - K3 -, w - m -, n\ n 

• - 7 • 7 TT7 TT? T T * • T " • " 

(4.) Kern. — Infinitives ending in M — have the accent on the final syllable. 
The drawing back of the tone from the final syllable to the penultima takes 
place frequently, as in Hebrew, when a monosyllabic word, or one with 
the tone on the penult, follows, and in pause. The accentuation, as well 
as the vocalization, it should be observed, is less systematic in the Chaldee 
than in the Hebrew. 



CHAPTER II. 

CHANGES OF CONSONANTS AND VOWELS. 



§ 4.— GENERAL VIEW. 



(5.) In Chaldee, as in other languages, the formation and in- 
flexion of words are effected partly by changes of the conso- 
nants, partly by changes of the vowels of the root-word. 
Thus from the root ^£, to rule, come ^P, a king; ]^?, 



Chap. II.] CHANGES OF CONSONANTS AND VOWELS. 9 

kings; *1j?3, a kingdom; ^7??, to rule. We cannot in all 
cases explain why a particular modification of the ground 
form should express a particular modification of its mean- 
ing; but we can ascertain certain analogies as to the for- 
mation of derivatives, and certain types of inflexion, so that 
we can tell beforehand by what form of word a particular 
modification of the meaning of the ground form would be 
expressed. Besides the changes of consonants and vowels 
of this kind, which are, in fact, the essential characteristics 
of the language, there are certain changes, and deviations 
from the normal type, depending on principles of euphony, 
and connected with the laws of accentuation, syllabication, 
&c., and with the properties of certain letters. Of changes 
of this latter kind we are now treating. 



§ 5.—CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 

The changes of consonants connected with euphony are, 
1. Assimilation. 2. Transposition. 3. Commutation. 4. 
Rejection. 5. Addition. 

Assimilation takes place — (a) when 2 closing a syllable (6.) 
immediately precedes a consonant. Thus we have p^" 1 for 
p^5?. (b) When the H of the preformative syllable of the 
passive in verbs precedes CO or 1, as 1E?riN for "IStDllK; 
13^ for 13^^1^. The same also takes place sometimes in 
the case of other letters ; thus, T11?ptjt for Tll£pl1& 

Rem. — Sometimes in Chaldee the contrary to assimilation occurs, as (7.) 
when, in place of a consonant being doubled, 3, or less frequently 1, is in- 
troduced. Thus we have N23H for SSS ; n233 for -QS : ^012 for HDD. 

t : • t • t : • t • •• : - •• • 

Somewhat similarly in the later Targums 1 is employed. Thus we find 
*>Vft for ^bl2. This last only happens when the vowel of the syllable pre- 
ceding the doubled consonant is — 



10 THE ELEMENTS. [Part I. 

(8.) Transposition is of rare occurrence. The D of the for- 
mative syllable in Ithpehal and Ithpahal is regularly trans- 
posed when the first radical of the verb is one of the sibi- 
lants (£>, ¥, D, ?) ; e.g. we have for "inptfK, nrttfpR. 

(9.) Commutation takes place chiefly among the quiescent 
letters, and occurs — (a) when feeble letters that quiesce in 
the same vowel are interchanged, as 12^!2 for *n&£? ; and 
(b) when a quiescent letter, having before it a vowel sign 
that is not homogeneous, is changed into a quiescent letter 
homogeneous with the vowel sign, as D^j?^ for Dipt*. 
(io.) Rejection takes place in several cases. It occurs — (a) 
when one of the feeble letters or liquids at the beginning 
of a word has no full vowel, as p£> for p£? ; 3H for 3iT ; 
U/2 for £0$. (fr) When consonants without a full vowel 
are lost by contraction, as in "l^ft for "I^KlHft ; HD^Jl for 
^PVyil? ; and sometimes w^hen a consonant with a full 
vowel follows a half-syllable, as KmD for KrngD. ( c ) The 
final n disappears in feminine nouns ending in ]"fl and IV T . 
Thus we have ^)t2 for rfi^B ; ^$12 for m#B.* Simi- 
larly in the later Targums, *0 for J"Pn. (eZ) *• is dropped in 
various forms of the verb ftTl, and 1 in the corresponding 
forms of KVT. Thus we have WV for ^.fT ; KH^ for HIPP. 
(0) In various forms of &£ verbs. Thus we have 17212 for 

(11.) Addition takes place — (a) when ft (Aleph prosthetic) is 
prefixed to a word, of which the initial letter has no full 
vowel, as ^K for ^ ; ]D2$ for ]02 (the Gr. £eVo?) ; 
"Ij^lfc for 1p\ (fr) When forms ending in a vowel take 3 
paragogic, e. g. p/CD]? for 17EDJ?. 

* That is, if the original forms of such nouns were those in •»-— , -1, 
which, however, is not certain. 



Chap. II.] CHANGES OF CONSONANTS AND VOWELS. 11 



-CHANGES OF VOWELS. 



The changes of vowels, connected with euphony, in the 
formation and inflexion of words, are — 1. Commutation. 
2. Transposition. 3. Rejection. 4. Addition. 

Commutation takes place — (a) when a closed syllable (12.) 
loses the tone, and in consequence its long vowel is changed 
into a short one, e. g. T^??, from 7.5, "IJ5J/, the constr. of 
")J3#. (b) When on account of the pause, as in Hebrew, a 
short vowel becomes long, (c) When a syllable that should 
be sharpened by Daghesh forte ends with a guttural or 1, as 
^*Q£p for ^30 : this does not take place invariably, and 
with the gutturals ft and H in particular, as in Hebrew (see 
Gesen., Hebr. Gramm., § 22, 1), the short vowel is re- 
tained, (d) When on account of the affinity of the a sound 
with gutturals, a final syllable closed with a guttural takes 
- in place of the characteristic vowel of the form, as Hw^ 1 
for m$) ; or when a quiescent letter causes a heterogeneous 
vowel to be changed into one that is homogeneous, as ^Dltf 
for pypli*. 

Transposition takes place — (a) in some monosyllabic (13.) 
verbal forms having a vowel between the two last conso- 
nants, which, on the addition of a suffix, passes to the first 
letter of the word, as from /£?)?, he kitted, comes n7£pj? 7 he 
killed him. (b) In cases where the letter preceding a qui- 
escent letter takes the vowel of the letter, which then qui- 
esces in the vowel, as Dip for Dip, or is dropped. 

Rejection of vowels takes place when the vowels of the (14.) 
final syllables of words fall away, on the words receiving an 
increase at the end, as N97JJ, from D7J7, ] vtO£ from 7l?j?. 

Addition or adoption of vowels takes place — (a) when (15.) 
at the beginning of a word two consonants, having no full 



12 THE ELEMENTS. [Part I. 

vowel, would follow each other immediately, in which case 
the former usually takes - ; but when the second conso- 
nant is a guttural with a composite Sheva, the first takes 
the short vowel of the Chateph, as in Hebrew. Thus, for 
^\2ul we have Y?.v? , as in Hebrew, (b) When a composite 
Sheva is changed into its corresponding half-vowel, to pre- 
vent the* concurrence of two half-syllables. See Gesen., 
Hebr. Gramm., § 28, 3. (c) Sometimes in pause a half- 
vowel is changed into a full vowel. 



PAET II. 

PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. 



CHAPTER I. 



OF THE PRONOUN. 



§ 7.— THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

In Chaldee, as in Hebrew, the personal pronouns are di- 
vided into two classes, the separate pronouns, which, gene- 
rally speaking, express only the nominative; and the suffix 
pronouns, by which the oblique cases are expressed, and 
which are syllables joined to the end of verbs, nouns, and 
particles. The suffixes, again, are of two kinds, the suffixes 
of nouns, and the suffixes of verbs. We now consider 
only the forms of the separate pronouns. 

§ 8,— THE SEPARATE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

The separate pronouns, expressing the nominative case, (16.) 
are the following : — 

Plural. 
1, corn. S2n3W, «jn3, we. 

I m. JVttN] JVM, ) 

-, j*!» r^H, j ye ' 



Singular 

1, com. H3M, na«, 

2, com. fiM, riDW, 
„ I m. w?in, 



N^n, 



L 

thou. 

he. 

she. 



«, 



f m. ym, i-iarT, 

| f. r?n, rw* 



s $%. 



14 PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. [Part II. 

(17.) Rem. — The form 772N is more frequent than M2M. The form of the pron. 
of the 2 sing, in Biblical Chaldee is nfl3N, for which the Masorets always 
substitute the Keri £12M. fiftH, and iSH, are peculiar to Biblical 
Chaldee. 

§ 9.— OTHER PRONOUNS. 

(18.) The demonstrative pronouns are — 

Singular. 



this, that. 



these, those. 

(19.) The relative pronoun is ^*T (or, when prefixed to words, 

1) for both genders and numbers. 
(20.) The interrogative pronoun is ]/?, who, of persons, Kft, TO, 

<■)£?, w;Aa£, of things. There is also another interrogative, 

PJPS masc., KT& fern., compounded of the interrogative 

particle ^$, and the demonstrative ]*% frH. 



m. n> ri> 


1 


^ s ?^% 


v. 


f. w> W> " 




com. N3"7, H2% pi, 131, 


J 


Plural. 




com. ^Vw, nb« ; Tfbw, 





CHAPTER II. 

OF THE VERB. 



§ 10.— GENERAL VIEW. 

(21.) Verbs in the Chaldee may be divided into three classes : 
- — 1. Primitives. 2. Verbal Derivatives, commonly called 
conjugations. Thus from p*TV, to be just, comes p!¥&, to de- 



Chap. II.] OF THE VERB. 15 

dare just, to justify. 3. Denominatives, or verbs derived 
from nouns, as A^n, to pitch a tent, from ft/HK., a tent. 

The stem-form of the verb usually consists of three let- (22.) 
ters, the first of which has vocal Sheva, or, if it be a gut- 
tural, one of the Chatephs, and the second - ; thus /£?)?, 
to kill ; '■)£?.$, to say. 

The third person singular of the Preterite is generally (23.) 
regarded as the stem-form of the verb ; as 7tpp, he has killed; 
*1?$, he has said. It is this form which is given in lexicons 
as the first person singular of the Present is given in Greek 
or Latin. * From this stem are formed, as in the Hebrew, 
according to an unvarying analogy in all verbs, the verbal 
derivatives, or conjugations, as they are usually designated, 
which express certain modifications of the significations of 
the ground-forms. The ground-form, or first conjugation, 
and the derived forms (conjugations), which usually are 
two in number, are designated as Pehal, Panel, and Aphel, 
these names being derived from the old paradigm 7J7D. 

Each of these conjugations has its passive, or reflexive, (24.) 
characterized by the prefixed syllable Hi*. These passives, 
as the actives, derive their names from the Paradigm /#$, 
and are Ithpehal, Ithpahal, and Ittaphal. We have thus 
altogether six conjugations: — 

Active. 

1. Pehal, baf?, to kill 

2. Pahel, bt£i|7, to hill many. 

3. Aphel, blSpN, to cause to hill. 



Ithpehal, bfcpnN. 
Ithpahal, bttjVlH. 
Ittaphal, bttpnN. 



Few verbs, it is to be observed, exhibit all these forms. (25.) 
Besides these conjugations, there are some others of rarer 

* An exception to this must be made in the case of verbs W and 137. 



16 PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. [Part II. 

occurrence, Shaphel, Pohel, Polel, &c, which will be spoken 
of in § 14. 

(26.) In the first conjugation, Pehal, corresponding to the 
Hebrew Kal, verbs have their primary sense, which may be 
either transitive or intransitive. The vowel of the second 
letter of intransitive verbs is commonly Tsere, Chirek, or 
Cholem, which are sometimes written fully, at others de- 
fectively. The relation of Ithpehal to Pehal is more usually 
that of a passive than of a reflexive. 

(27.) The second conjugation, Pah el, corresponds to the He- 
brew Pihel, and, like it, is characterized by the doubling of 
the middle stem letter. Its significations are similar to 
those of the Hebrew Pihel, thus: (a) It denotes intensity 
and repetition, e. g. 7^j?, to kill; 7£Dp, to kill many, to massacre, 
(b) It has a causative sense, e. g. Dj?n ? to be wise ; tDlpH, to 
make wise. It takes the modification of declaring or re- 
garding a person or thing to be that which the primitive 
expresses, as 3*T5, to lie; 3^5, to declare one a liar, to convict 
of lying, (c) It has a privative sense, as 7j?D, to remove 
stones. The significations of Ithpahal are the passives or 
reflexives of Pahel. 

(28.) The third conjugation, Aphel, is characterized by & 
prefixed to the stem-form, and (— ) or (— ) in the last syl- 
lable.* It has a causative signification, particularly in verbs 
of which the Pahel is not in use, e.g. &*57, to be clad; ^3?K, 
to clothe {another). It also, like Pahel, takes the modifica- 

* The Pahel has been appropriately designated the Intensive, and the 
Aphel the Extensive form. There is a correspondence between the modifi- 
cations of form and sense, the Intensive being derived from the ground- 
form by an internal change, the doubling of the middle stem-letter ; and 
the Extensive by an external addition to the ground-form, the prefixed 
letter. — -Fiirst, Lehrgeb., § 104. 



Chap. II.] OF THE VERB. 17 

tion of declaring, &c, e.g. p"TV, to be just ; p?.¥N, to declare 
just, to acquit. 

Ittaphal, the proper reflexive or passive of Aphel, (29.) 
is of rare occurrence. Its signification may be said to be 
the same as that of Ithpehal. It is to be observed that 
this conjugation is not found in Biblical Chaldee, its place 
being supplied by a conjugation corresponding to the He- 
brew Hophal. 

The Chaldee language, like the Hebrew, is poor in (30.) 
moods and tenses. The tenses are two — a Preterite and a 
Future ; see, however, § 14. It has, besides, an Infinitive 
and Imperative ; and the Active conjugations have two 
Participles, and the Passives one. 

§ 11.— ON THE INFLEXION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

The third person of the Preterite in each conjugation (31.) 
may be regarded as a ground-form, from which the other 
forms arise, immediately or mediately, by certain changes 
of the vowels of the ground-form, or by the addition to it 
of certain letters or syllables, or by both these ways con- 
joined. Thus in Pehal, from the ground-form, 7C?£, the 
Infinitive, 7??pP, is derived by prefixing D. The Impera- 
tive, 7C0£, is the ground-form, with the vowel - replaced 
by - ; and from the Imperative, again, the Future is derived, 
by prefixing \ 

The inflexion of the tenses, as regards person, number, ( 32.) 
and gender, is effected, as in Hebrew, by the addition to 
the 3 masc. sing, of certain letters or syllables which are 
fragments of the personal pronouns. These formative par- 
ticles are sometimes prefixed, sometimes affixed. The in- 
flexion of the Preterite is effected altogether by afformatives; 
that of the Future both by afformatives and preformatives. 



18 PARTS OF SPEECH AND INFLEXION. [Part II. 

(33.) From the ground-form, the Preterite (third pers. masc. 

sing.), the Imperative (second pers. sing.), is immediately 
derived in all the conjugations. In Pehal the vowel of the 
Preterite, T , is replaced by the dull sound - . In all the 
other conjugations, Passives as well as Actives, the Impera- 
tive is identical with the Preterite. 

(34.) The Futures (third pers. sing, masc.) are formed from 

the Imperatives in the Active conjugations by prefixing 
\ Thus, in accordance with principles already stated, 
we have from the Imperative Pehal 72pj?, the Future 
htQQ (15, a), from the Panel, *7BJ>, h®$) ; and from the 
Aphel, ^epfW, *7G?J£, for h®$$) (10, b). In the Passives the 
Futures are the same as the Imperatives, the syllable TM& 
being replaced by TV). 

(35.) The Infinitive Pehal is formed from the Preterite by 

prefixing the half-syllable £, e.g. from 7lp£, 7£?j?p. In the 
other conjugations, both Actives and Passives, the Infini- 
tives are formed by substituting for the final syllable of the 
Preterites the termination ^--, e.g. Pahel Infinitive, N7I3J?, 
from *7£9£. 

(36.) The Participles Pehal are deduced from the Preterites 

by a mere change of vowels, as will be seen in the Paradigm. 
In the other conjugations, Actives and Passives, the Parti- 
ciples are formed from the Preterites by prefixing D. Ex- 
cept in Pahel, the first letter of the Preterite is dropped, 
according to the principle stated in (10, b\ e.g. 7&j?£ for 
?BJj?§5. The first, or Active Participle, has - in its final 
syllable; the Passive in Pehal has V ; in Pahel and 
Aphel, - . 

( 37.) The manner in which the inflexion of the tenses in re- 

spect to person, gender, and number, is effected by frag- 
ments of the personal pronouns, either as afFormatives or 



Chap. II.] OF THE VERB. 19 

preformatives, is plain, and will require no explanation for 
students who have examined the inflexion of the tenses in 
Hebrew (Gesen., Hebr. Gramm., § 44, 1 ; § 47, 1, 2). It 
will be noticed, that in the 1 sing. Pret. the germ of the 
pronoun has disappeared, and the demonstrative H alone 
remains. 

In the 2 sing, and 3 plur. of the Preterite a difference may be observed ( 38.) 
between the Chaldee and the Hebrew. In the Chaldee the masc. and fern, 
are the same in the 2 sing., bnt have distinct forms in the 3 plural. Pre- 
cisely the reverse holds in the Hebrew. The 3 plur. fern, of the Future 
has the preformative s , and not n as the 2 plur. fern. ; while in Hebrew 
the two forms are not generally distinguished. The form for the third 
person commencing with *» does, however, though rarely, occur in the 
Hebrew, see Gesen., Hebr. Gramm., § 47, 3, Rem. 3. 

See Pakadigm A oe the Eegtjlab Vekb. 

§ 12.— REMARKS ON THE PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERB 
GENERALLY. 

The fact that the vowels Tsere and Chirek, whether written fully or (39.) 
defectively, are frequently interchanged in Chaldee, leads to variations in 
the verbal forms in which these vowels occur. Thus we have in the 1 sing. 
Pret. nbtop, rpbfcp, or mbtpp ; in the 2 plur. fern. Pret., JElbttp, r^bfcp, 

or f Nabfcp ; in Aphel, bfcpH, VtopN, or VfcpM ; in the 1 Part. Pehal, 
bft£, bfcj7, b>to|7, or VfcjJ ; in the 2 Part., b^p, or b^fcp. The latter 
form of the 2 Part, is rare. 

In the Preterite the 1 sing, and the 2 sing. masc. are sometimes formed ( 40.) 
as in Hebrew, the former having the termination \PT, the latter Pi, also 
written Nfi. The 3 plur. masc. and fem. have sometimes the para- 
gogic 1, e. g. "pbtap, *|bt2p, the S of the latter form being dropped. In the 
3 sing. fem. and 1 sing, the vowel of the penultimate syllable is sometimes 
retained, e. g., ribttQ, rPZin\ 

In the Future, in the 3 masc. sing, and plur., the preformative D is (41.) 
found in place of > in the Targum of the Book of Proverbs, e. g. *)-")nDD, 

jspp^m This is the regular form in the Syriac, e.g. ^To^lJ, \Q N 6 ol 

In the Infinitive various derivations from the regular type, as shown in ( 42.) 
the Paradigm, are found, {a) The preformative tt, the characteristic of 



20 PARTS OF SPEECH AND INFLEXION. [Part II. 

the Infinitive of Petal, is found in the Infinitives of all the other conjuga- 
tions, both Actives and Passives, e. g. fcObnE, NpbnDE. (b) Such forms 
are found as s 5ibn, *»piDpM, with •> — paragogic. (c) Infinitives are 
found wanting the characteristic termination M T — , e. g. p^S'W* an ^ w ^ n 
the termination rfl, e.g. - ,TVnB3. This termination i"V\ always takes the 
place of the final syllable M_, with suffixes. See (68.) (d) In Biblical 

Chaldee, for the termination S , n is occasionally to be met with, 

e.g. rmin, Dan. ii. 12. 
( 43.) In the Passive conjugations, instead of the preformative riM> we find 
in Biblical Chaldee frequently HT1, like the Hebrew, and in one or two 
places nw, according to the Syriac vocalization. In the Preter. and Infin. 
in the later Targums the preformative is sometimes H3. 

§ 13.— REMARKS ON THE SEVERAL CONJUGATIONS. 

( 44.) Pehal. — The regular form of the Preterite is btop ; but there are also 
forms with Tsere, Chirek, and Cholem, instead of P attach. These forms are 
usually found in verbs of intransitive signification. The vowels are writ- 
ten either fully or defectively. Examples of such verbs are tt?SG, to be bad; 
3MID, to be good; ITOtt?, to lie down; ^i"in, to be dry. These vowels are 
retained in inflexion, taking the place of— , e.g. NibwtP, we asked; tolin, 
they were dried up. And even in the 3 fern, sing., where in the regular 
type there is commonly only the syllable divider (—), the vowel of the 
stem is retained, e. g. rniin. 

( 45.) Yerbs, middle E and middle i, generally have in the Imperative — , 
— , or — , e.g. E7?b, btN, D v ?f?. In the Future they either retain the 
vowel of the Preterite, or have _ , or i, e.g. *]p/T, and P)ipJT, E?2lb\ It 
frequently happens that when a verb has two forms of the Future, they 
are distinguished in sense, e. g. tfibttfy he shall rule; taibttfy he is wont to 
rule, from tabttP. 

( 46.) The following anomalous forms of the Infinitive are found in Pehal : — 
{a) An Infinitive with i, or J), or _, for the vowel of the final syllable, 
e.g. pilDO, yfttt??p ; (b) one with the termination H— , like the emphatic 
state of nouns, e. g. N15DE ; (c) one like the Hebrew, i. e. of the form bitfip. 
This form sometimes has the paragogic *» _ , e. g. "OS)bn. 

(47.) Ithpehal. — The vowel of the last syllable of the Preterite, Imperative, 
and Future, in the Paradigm, is — , in place of which we meet occasionally 
with __ (V)> or — (\_). 



Chap. II.] OF THE VERB. 21 

Pahel. — The 1 sing. Future has sometimes under the preformative N, (48) 
_ , instead of simple vocal Sheva, e. g. "lEQN. It is even found with the 
full vowel \ , e.g. ^v^N, Deut. xxxii. 1 (Jon.). 

Ithpahal. — The vowel of the final syllable in the Preterite is sometimes (49.) 
_. , or _ . The 3 sing. fern. Pret, and 1 sing., sometimes have the forms 
nb^iHW, nbftpflN, instead of those in the Paradigm. A participle of 
the form b^rtptt, like the Hebrew Puhal, occurs in a few places. 

ApheL — In Biblical Chaldee, Jl sometimes takes the place of the pre- ( 50.) 
formative N, e.g. in the Preterite, ^ttnn, Ezr. v. 12; sft-pn, Dan. v. 29, 
for ^T^HS, ^"pM. Even in the Future and Participles this n is retained 
between the preformative and the verbal form, where M, the characteristic 
of the conjugation, does not appear, being lost by contraction, e.g. v3tt?JT, 
Dan. vii. 24 ; ^nnpTO, Ezr. vi 10. 

Instead of Aphel, the Hebrew conjugation Hiphil is occasionally to (51.) 
be met with in Biblical Chaldee, e.g. J)2pnn, Dan. vii. 25. 

Ittaphal. — This conjugation is rarely used. In its place Hophal is (52.) 
always employed in Biblical Chaldee, e. g. nrDH, he was cast down, Dan. 
v. 20, from nm 

§ 14.— PERSONAL INFLEXION OF THE PARTICIPLES. 

The Participles of all the conjugations are used, as in (53.) 
Hebrew, with the separate pronouns of 1 and 2 pers., to 
express present action or passion, e.g. &2$ /&?£, I Mil. The 
want of a present tense in the Chaldee is further supplied 
by means of the Participles ; for they are blended with the 
pronouns, so as to make one word, and thus give rise to a 
species of present tense. The following is the personal 
flexion of the Participles Pehal : — 



1 Part. 

Singular. 

m. H2btsp 
f. NDsStDp 

m. nbftp 

- : t 

f. >nbtap 

' ~ : t 



Plural. 
m. p^bttp 

't • : 't 

f. vbvp 

't t : 't 

m. ^n>btp|7 
f. )nbvr) 



22 



PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. 



[Pakx II. 



2 Part. 



ar. 
m. NDb^fcp 
f. NaNT'&p 

t t • ; 

l m. nb^tpp 
2 > f. '♦nb^tDp 



Plural. 
m. pb s t?p 
f. pVfcp 

• r t • ' : 

f. irib^p 



This present tense possesses the advantage of having 
distinct forms for the masc. and fern, genders even in the 
1 pers. In the Hebrew there is no similar personal flexion 
of the Participles. 
(54.) In Biblical Cbaldee the 2 Part. Pehal has a regu- 
lar inflexion by means of the affbrmatives of the Prete- 
rite, and thus gives rise to a Passive Preterite supplying 
the place of the Preterite Ithpehal, e. g. tf Jn^j?p, Dan. v. 27, 
np*H5, v. 28. The passive signification of these forms 
shows that they are not forms of the Preterite Pehal in ^ -, as 
might at first sight be supposed. Moreover, the usual forms 
of the Preterites of the same verbs are found with an active 
sense. The following is the tense Pehil, thus formed : — 



Singular. 


Plural. 


1 m. Vftp 

3 > f. nb^p 


1 m. iV'fcp 

3 ' f. «b^p 

1 t • *: 


2, c. nb^i? 
l, c. rb^ 


I m. ^nVtpp 
2 > | f. irrVtpp 




3, c. HaV»ap 



§ 15.— UNUSUAL CONJUGATIONS, AND QUADRILITERAL VERBS. 

As in Hebrew the unusual conjugations are related to 
Pihel and Hiphil (see Gesen., Hebr. Gramm. § 54), so those 
in Chaldee are analogous to Pahel and Aphel, some being 



Chap. II.] OF THE VERB. 23 

characterized by the repetition of one or more of the stem- 
letters, or by the insertion of a long vowel, and others by 
the addition of prefix letters or syllables. 

The following are the conjugations analogous to Panel, (55.) 
and which are similarly inflected : — 

1. Pohel, with its passive Ithpohal. — This form is usual in 

ir 

verbs, ))]}, taking the place of Panel and Ithpahal. Ex- 
amples are, l^D©, Ezr. vi. 3, from hlD; D£intf>£, Dan. 
iv. 19 (16), from DB#. 

2. Polel, and its passive, Ithpolal. — This form is usual in 
verbs TJ7, taking the place of Panel and Ithpahal, e.g. DEJ1"), 
and D?n^», from Dn. 

3. Palpel, with its passive, Ithpalpal, formed from verbs 
W and 1J/, by doubling both the first and last radicals, e. g. 

hhx from ^2i ; nFH, fro m P n - 

Analogous to Aphel is Shaphel, with its passive, Ishtha- (56.) 
phal, e.g. V??^, Ezr. v. 11, and bb^^% Ezr. iv. 13. 
Other irregular conjugations, such as Saphel and Taphel, 
are to be met with. Verbs of these forms, however, ought 
sometimes to be rather regarded as quaclriliteral stems than 
accounted for by a variety of conjugation. 

Quadriliteral Verbs are more common in Chaldee than in ( 57.) 
Hebrew. They usually have the form of Panel. Examples 
are, D*HJ, to break; P31?, to delight ; E^HO, to interpret, if 
this last be not a conjugation Taphel; see (56). Quadrilite- 
rals are sometimes verbs adopted from other languages, e.g. 
3"lLpj?, Syriac -tf^o, fr° m "the Greek Karif/opeiu. 

The verb ^"Pttf, or IWO?, to set free, which occurs repeatedly in Dan. (58.) 
and is also found in the Targums, is regarded by "Winer as a kind of Paliel, 
the long vowel of the first syllable Compensating for the omission of Dagh. 
Forte in the second stem-letter. 



24 



PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. 



[Part II. 



§ 16.— ON THE SUFFIXES OF VERBS. 

(59.) The following are the suffix pronouns appended to the 
verb, and expressing the accusative of the personal pro- 
nouns : — 



ar. 



3, 



c. >2, -o^, ^-, 
f. ^ T TP ^ 



w<?. 






Plural 

't 7 t t t t ••' 

m. 7to, ) 



f. 75, 



yow. 



them. 



The relation of these syllables to the personal pronouns 
is, for the most part, sufficiently obvious. The suffixes of 

2 sing, and plur. point to an older form of the pronoun, 
with 3 in place of fl, ^ for ^JK, p3}», &c. The suffix of 

3 fern. sing, is to be referred to a feminine KH of IH. 

• 60 x The variety in form of these suffixes is connected with 
the various forms of the verb to which they are applied. 
The suffixes may be divided into two classes — those begin- 
ning with a vowel, and those beginning with a consonant. 
Generally speaking, the suffixes beginning with a vowel are 
applied to verbal forms ending with a consonant ; and the 
suffixes beginning with a consonant to verbal forms ending 
with a vowel, e.g. pSJT?^!?, thou hast killed them; l^l/CD^, 
they have hilled them. In the case of the Imperatives and 
Participles, however, this rule does not hold, as they gene- 
rally take the suffixes of 1 sing, and 1 plur. without a union 
vowel, e. g. ^ ?&?£, hill me; ^J 1 ?^, hill us. The 3 fern. sing. 
Preter. also takes commonly the suffixes of 3 plur., |13, and 
]*% without the union vowel, e. g. ]^]"^/_7?, it swallowed them. 



Chap. II,] OF THE VERB. 25 



§ 17.— THE VERB WITH SUFFIXES. 

The verbal forms, when connected with the suffixes, 
undergo certain changes, affecting principally the vowels of 
the forms. 

(a) Thus, in the Preterite, the 3 sing, masc, /&£,, and <6i.) 
the 3 sing, fern., Jr7tpj?, take respectively the forms' /Cpj?, 
lT?^i?5 before suffixes which have a union- vowel. Before 

the suffixes J1D, ]P, they remain unchanged. 

(b) The 2 sing. fern, sometimes takes the form *tfT?ft£. 

(c) The 1 sing, takes the form IT?^)?, and in one or two 
places the form **Ty!®\>. 

(d) The 3 plur. masc. becomes 1/lpj?, and before the 
suffixes |1D, p, ]^Cpj? O^Og, with 2 paragogic, see (40)). 
The 3 plur. fern, $h&$ becomes Stpg. 

(e) The 2 plur. masc. becomes ^7??)? before suffixes 
beginning with 3. 

(/) The 1 plur, K2^p becomes 3*?£DJ>, e.g. TO 1 ?!?^ 
w Mfed Mm; but with suff. of 2 fern. sing. ^-, 37£g. 

It may be useful to exhibit together the forms of the ( 62.) 
Preterite, as they appear modified in connexion with suf- 
fixes : — 



Singular. 



Plural. 



3, 


m. bt?j2 (bap) 


3, m. *bpp_ (vbpPJ 


3, 


f. rhvp (nbtap) 


3, f. btap 


2, 


m. rib^p 


2, m. tnbvp (jvib&p) 


2, 


f. nbtpp ppbpp) 




1, 


c. nbr^i7 C'fib&p) 


1, c. sbtop (^P) 



The forms of the Imperative undergo no change, except (63.) 



"26 PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. [Part II. 

that the final K of the 2 plur. fern, falls away ; so that we 
have for tf^p, A(pfJ. 

( 64.) In the Future, before suffixes, in those forms which end 
with a stem-letter, — becomes vocal Sheva. 

( 65.) The Infinitive undergoes no change before grave suffixes, 
e. g. Ite^O, X^itDpp ; with the light suffixes it takes the 
forms 7ipp??, e. g. ^/Pj?P. As in Hebrew, it may also 
take the nominal suffixes, e. g. JirT?Dj?D, ^Cpj^P. 

( 66.) Participles can take both the verbal and nominal suf- 
fixes. The vowel changes will be the same as those in 
nouns of the same form. 

(67.) In Paliel and Aphel, in all forms which end with the 
third stem-letter, the __ of the second stem-letter is changed 
into vocal Sheva. . The terminations of the 2 sing, fern., 
of the 2 plur. masc, and of the 1 plur. of the Preterite, are 
modified in the same manner as in Pehal. 

(68.) The Passive conjugations do not take suffixes, except 
the Infinitives. With suffixes the termination of the Infini- 
tives & T is changed to ITi, e. g. lin^O/D"}]!^!, in their being 
raised. This takes place in Pahel and Aphel as well as in 
the Passives. It was mentioned in (42 J that this form 
of the Infinitive sometimes is found without suffixes. The 
Infinitive with suffixes, especially those of 3 masc, some- 
times has no characteristic termination, e. g. llfT-DItt, 
Deut. vii. 10. 

({59 \ The suffixed forms are strengthened in Chaldee, as in Hebrew, by the 
insertion of D {Nun epenthetic, or rather Nun demonstrative; see Gesen., 
Hebr. Gramm., § 57, 4) between the verbal form and the suffix, e. g. 
na^btsp^, tj^btpp^ Sometimes a whole syllable 3_ is inserted, e. g. 
^bnT, Dan. iv. 2. The epenthetic 3 is rarely found with the Preterite. 
In the Targum of Proverbs an epenthetic * appears, e. g. Ip^Tlffi'ri. In this 
case, however, the •» may be a part of a different form of the suffix. 
See Paradigm B of tue Eegtjlar Verb with Suffixes. 



Chap. II.] OF THE VERB. 27 



§ 18 OF IEREGULAR VERBS IN GENERAL. 

It is implied in what has been said that in the deriva- ( 70.) 
tion from the ground-form of the different conjugations, 
and in the inflexion of verbs generally, there is the same 
analogy throughout ; but modifications will be caused by 
the repetition in the stem of one of the radical letters, e. g. 
PJH, and the peculiar properties of certain letters will also 
give rise to deviations from the normal type in verbs in 
which these letters occur. Yerbs thus affected (irregular 
verbs) may be classified as : — (1) Those of which one of the 
stem-letters is a guttural (guttural verbs). (2) Those which 
in inflexion lose one of the stem-letters by assimilation or 
contraction, as pj?*J, p?2 (contracted verbs). (3) Those of 
which one of the stem-letters is one of the feeble letters 
Vn$ (feeble verbs). 

§ 19.— GUTTURAL VERBS. 

The influence of the guttural letters J/nH&, and of 1, 
on the vowels and on syllabication being the same in Chal- 
dee as in Hebrew, the application of the common rules as 
to these letters in the latter language will indicate the de- 
viations from the regular paradigm in the inflexion of gut- 
tural verbs in the Chaldee, so that little more will be ne- 
cessary than to specify a few of the principal forms. 

Verbs Pe Guttural. 

Pehal, Pret. 12%, 3 f. m^, 2 m. P*T?J/, 1 c. n^, (71.) 
3 m. plur. H3g and 1T3#, &c; Inf. !?#§, THE): Imp. 
2 m. T3g, or 12%, 2 f. *T3Jg, or HIJK, 2 m. plur. IT^, 



28 PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. [Pakt II. 

or H2j; : , 2 m. \h%, 2 m. plur. ip^ 2 m. ^DK, 2 f. 
^g, 2 m. n»g, 2 f. n.ZJ^, 2 m. plur. T10$; Fut 3 m. 
13£, or T3J&" 3 m. plur. pISJC, 3 f. plur. H3J& 3 m. 
pTJft, 1 plur. "phj£; 1 Part. T?^; 2 Part. T2^—Ithpehal, 
TDJ/n^, and "?3?;b».— PaH Pret. 13£; Fut.' 3. m. "G^. 
—Ithpahal, 13Sl$$.—Aphel, Pret. *T3£& 13?$, I'Ttjit; 

inf. nnrn»; Fut'. -i?rr, ^rp; Part, nm'p, D$$b. 

Fe7'3s -<4yiw Guttural. 

(72.) PdlaZ.— Pret. ]J7lp, 3 f. n^B, or rQJ/GJ, nril$, 1 sing. 

nnjl3, rPQTH, 3 m. plur. UJ/jb, or ^(p, 1 plur. KjlJlJJj 
Inf. 1D3P ; Imp. 2 m. JH3, ']rj3 ; Fut. 3 m. ]n^\" or 
PTO, rflny].—Ithpehal, Pret. ]H3^^ rn3Tj», 3 m.' plur. 
?3ir?fl$, and ^J^.— PaAd, Pret. ^3,'riKD, BhH, TJ/n. 
—Aphel, Pret. ^I»?», irUK, 3 f. sing, njj/tp^ 

F<?r£s Lamedh Guttural. 

(73.) p<*aZ, Pret. nW ; 3 f. nnW, nnoH ; l sing, rpjtfptf, 

WJIJ2&, rPJ/JD# ; Imp. 2 m. H3^ ; 2 £ T!?tf> ; Fut. 3 m. 
T]3UJ\ nW?, JflDBfy 1 Part. H3^, J/£^; 2 Part. !??££_ 
Mpehal, Pret. n?fl#$ ; 3 f. fllMJjtJty MTJjn^.— iW, 
Pret H3tf, 3 f. nHW ; Fut. 3 ml ' r\2tih,—Aphd, Pret. 

n?#K, rp?ipK, i c. nn?^K. 

( 74.) 1. "We may observe the varying use of the forms designated by gram- 

marians the hard and soft combinations (see Gesen., Hebr. Gramm., 
§ 22, 4; § 62, 2), e.g.'lSBP, and TO??, TOW, 12EN. 

2. In verbs WD, in Ithpehal, the K having no full vowel, often falls 
away, and the H of the prefixed syllable HN then takes Bag. forte, e. g. 

inns for "rnsm 

3. The form of 3 fern. sing, of the Preter. of verbs Lamedh Guttural is 
remarkable, TTJhxp, and not nnbtP. When "l is the third radical, for the 



Chap. II.] OF THE VERB. 29 

combination — — , we have — —, e.g. rin^M. A similar fonn of the 1 sing., 
nnst^'n, occurs, Dan. ii. 25. 

4. Where the first radical in the regular verb would have simple She^a 

vocal, in Pe guttural verbs it will have one of the composite Shevas, and 

(f 
most commonly ( — ). Verbs N5 take (— ) in th.e.Imjper. Pehal, eg. 1DM ; 

and verbs J7D in the Infin. Pehal, e.g. "TTnB. 

5. In verbs Lamedh guttural we see that Pattach sometimes takes the 
place of the regular vowel of the third radical, and that sometimes the 
regular vowel remains, and the guttural takes Pattach furtive, e.g. nSttr*, 

nbo?;, n227«, rpsim 

§ 20 CONTRACTED VERBS \* 

PAKADIGit C. 

The irregularities of verbs of this class are caused by 
the weakness of the letter 3, and are, as might be expected, 
nearly the same as those of the same class in Hebrew. 
They are as follows : — 

1. In the Imp. Pehal, the Nun, which would take (75.) 
Sheva, is lost, e.g. p|), for p£5. 

2. Nun at the end of a syllable, after a preformative, is (76.) 
assimilated to the following stem-letter, e. g. p5P, for p?5P ; 

pfp for pay. 

3. We find commonly in some forms a different charac- (77.) 
teristic vowel from that in the regular verb, e. g. in the 
Fut, pK, or pi2P, for p|1 ; in Aphel, p^$ for pSK. 

In Hebrew the Nun is regularly retained in verbs which ( 78.) 
have a guttural for their second stem-letter ; but the same 
thing does not invariably hold in the Chaldee : thus we 
have from fiPlJ, Aphel, IVrjK, and not fWJJK. On the 
other hand, in verbs in which the second stem-letter is not 
a guttural, the Nun is not invariably assimilated, especially 
in Biblical Chaldee : thus we have from ]J}J, \F\?, and |J!)3tf, 
and not ]W\ and |J?p. This is the more easily accounted 



30 PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. [Part II. 

for, as it is not unusual in Chaldee to find Daghesh forte re- 
solved into Nun, see (7), e.g. JHJN for JH8. We find 
forms, but only in the Venice Polyglot, in which the Nun 
is compensated for by a long vowel, instead of its being as- 
similated to the following consonant, e. g. 2p^D, and pp* 1 "?, 
Infinitives Pehal, from DDJ, and pCO. 

In Dan. ii. 16, we find the singular form }P)2^ for ]fi2\ from fHp, — 
taking the place of — , the usual vowel of the Fut. of this verb. 



§ 21.— CONTRACTED VERBS VV* 
Paeadigm D. 

The following are the chief irregularities of these 
verbs : — 
(79.) 1. The stem by contraction becomes monosyllabic, and 
has the vowel which the second stem-letter would take in 
the full form, e. g. pi for pp^l : . In the Participles, and in 
Pahel, the contraction does not take place, (a) In some 
of the forms so contracted no trace remains of the dropped 
stem-letter, e. g. in the Pret. 3 masc. sing., 2 masc. sing., 
2 fem. sing., 2 masc. plur., 2 fern, plur., 1 com. plur.; in 
the Imper. 2 masc. sing., 2 fem. plur. In these cases there 
is either no afformative, or one beginning with a consonant. 
(b) In other forms the lost letter* is compensated for by 
Daghesh in the second radical. This takes place in those 
forms of the Preter. and Imper. Pehal, of which the affor- 
matives begin with a vowel, (c) In other forms again the 
dropped letter is compensated for by Daghesh in the first 
stem-letter. This, as will be seen by inspection of the 
Paradigm, takes place in the Infin. and Fut. Pehal, and in 
Aphel throughout. (d) Sometimes the reduplication is 
thrown back upon the F\ of the preformative in Ithpehal, 



Chap. II.] OF THE VERB. 31 

e. g. p*7Wj '#&$, but we find also the Ithpehal regularly 
formed, e. g. Tt^K. 

Bern. 1 . — It will be observed that these irregularities are not in all 
respects analogous to those of the same class of verbs in Hebrew. In the 
Hebrew the contraction is for the most part indicated by a Daghesh in the 
second stem-letter, whereas in Chaldee, in many cases, it is the first radical 
which is doubled. The Chaldee mode of inflexion, however, is sometimes 
found in Hebrew, see Gesen., Hebr. Gramm., § 66, 5. 

Bern. 2. — In the Chaldee there is nothing similar to the inserted vowel 
(see Gesen., Hebr. Gramm., § 66, 4) by which in certain forms of Hebr. 
VV verbs the Daghesh of the final radical is rendered audible. 

2. The conjugations Pahel and Ithpahel when they occur ( 80.) 
are regular. Instead of these, however, Palpel and Ithpal- 
pal, or Pohal and Ithpohal, are commonly employed, e. g. 

pip/!, Pli?™, W?31 (Fut), DDintfto. 

3. The Participles Pehal are usually formed regularly, (81.) 
as in the Paradigm. The forms p^ of 1 Part, and p^pl of 

2 Part., however, are found. Such forms as pfcH, *^V2 
should, perhaps, be referred to verbs 1J/. 

In the form b^DH, Dan. ii. 25, Pret. Aphel, from V?2, the Nun re- 
presents the Daghesh of the first stem-letter, see (7). 

§ 22.— FEEBLE VERBS *5 
Paeadigm E. 

Verbs ^ in Chaldee, as in Hebrew, are divided into 
three classes: — (1) Those which are properly ID, or of 
which the first radical was originally \ (2) Those properly 
*SX (3) Those in which the ^ does not quiesce in i or e, 
but is assimilated as 2 in j 3 verbs. 

Verbs originally id. 
Verbs originally IS are more numerous than those of (82.) 



32 PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. [Part II. 

the other classes. Their irregularities are as follows : — 
(a) In the Imper. Pehal the first radical is dropped, and 
the resulting monosyllabic form usually has the vowel __, 
e. g. JH, in, from STl], 1ST ( 1 0, a). In the Fut. Pehal the "» of 
the stem quiesces in _, and often falls away, e. g. IT*!, IT. 
(c) In Aphel the original 1 appears, and changes the cha- 
racteristic vowel into the homogeneous Cholem, in which 
it quiesces, e. g. T^IK, JH1H for T^K, jniH. Fut. ^ 
for *)P£. 
( 83.) PaM and Ithpahal are for the most part regular. Such 
forms as ^Tl^lW for 1^ "tW^N, in which the original 
1 appears, are sometimes to be met with. Ithpehal, like- 
wise, is usually regular. In Aphel the characteristic PF 
(for K) is frequently retained after the preformatives in 
the Fut. and Participles : see (50). Examples are jniiT 
for iHi\ print} for jnia 

P r £r&s originally %. 

(84.) In verbs properly ^D in the Fut. Pehal the *■ quiesces in 
_, which is the more usual form, or in __, e. g. 1j^, 2W\ 
but also 3tp*. In JjpM the "■ usually quiesces in ___, e. g. 
/ITH, 3^&. The \ however, is sometimes retained as a 
consonant, e. g. TT.^. 

Eem. — From such examples of double forms as StD^, 2tj?^, given 
above, it maybe seen that the distinct modes of inflexion of the two classes 
of *>Q verbs are not always observed. In Aphel in particular this inter- 
change is common, and in many instances we find side by side both forms 
from the same verb. 

§ 23.— CONTRACTED »S VERBS. 

rr 

(85.) In the third class of ^ verbs, the ^ does not quiesce in 
a long vowel, but is assimilated as 3. This assimilation 



Chap. II.] OF THE VERB. 33 

takes place in the Infin. and Fut. Pehal, and throughout in 
Aphel. Thus jrn, Infin. Pehal, IHE ; JW, Preter. Aphel 
(Hiphil), H^.tl ; *]j? s , Preter. Aphel, ^j?K. Sometimes after 
the contraction the Daghesh is resolved by 2, e.g. 2¥\ 
Infin. Aphel, &3V3&. It sometimes happens that we find 
in the same verb both modes of inflexion, e.g. 2tV^ 2JTQ, 
and 3rP, nrjp, from Ifi?; JTT% andJ/T, or JH}> from J/T. 



§ 24.— FEEBLE VERBS Kfi. 

Verbs ND properly belong to the class of guttural verbs ; 
but in certain verbs and forms the tf loses its consonant 
power, and quiesces in a long vowel. 

(a) In some verbs, e.g. *0$, to say; 728, to eat; H]J^, (8 6 -) 
ft) cm£; ^?H, to perish; 7T&, fogw; the N in the Infin. and Fut. 
Pehal quiesces in — , e.g. IftfcT, ^?^., 75&P, and sometimes 

is changed into \ which likewise quiesces, e.g. 71^^., "D^ 
7P. Throughout Aphel the N in these verbs is changed 
into 1, e. g. Preter. 7?1K, *T?^, and ^Dlil (an exception is 
hl% from bl$) } Fut. I? 1 )!^. The Hophal TTIH occurs 
Dan. vii. 11. 

(b) Three verbs, Tn&, to perish; *\?X, to learn; KDK, to 
AeaZ, exhibit in the Fut. and Participles Pahel a con- 
tracted form in which the K usually falls away, e. g. *| vtffl, 
or rf?n, for *y^$Jp ; ^.0 for ^Mp. The 2 Part. 4pM of 
]£$, |5^rj0j occurs Dan. ii. 45. 

(c) In some verbs, in Ithpehal and Ithpahal, the K falls 
away, and is compensated for by Daghesh in the T) of the 
preformative, e. g. TBttjS for I^W ; ^fi$ for "12KW. 

Bern The identity of the forms of verbs S2 in several cases with those 

of verbs *»D, or "IS, should be observed. 

F 



34- TARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. [Part II. 

tf if 

§ 25.— FEEBLE VERBS iy AND y- 

Paeadigm F. 

The relation between verbs TJ7 and 1# is more intimate 
in the Chaldee than in the Hebrew, and there is a greater 
interchange of forms. The inflexion of this class of verbs 
is also easier and simpler in the Chaldee than in the Hebrew. 
The following are the chief peculiarities : — 
(87.) In Pehal, with the exception of the 1 Part., and in 
Aphel, the stem is always monosyllabic, e. g. DfJ, 1TD, D^j?N. 
The preformatives of the Fut. and Infin. of both conjuga- 
tions usually take — (— in the 1 sing, of the Futures, and 
in the Infin. Aphel on account of the & ) ; however, in the 
later Targums we find — , or — p-), e.g. such forms as 

rnoK, mn\ Him 

T 7 "J 

(88.) In the conjugation Ithpehal in this class of verbs, the 
ft of the preformative is doubled, and the monosyllabic 
stem takes — , e. g. EJJftK, but sometimes also — , e. g. 
D^J^K, which latter is the regular Syriac form, e. g. 

(89.) In many verbs, in place of the conjugations Pahel and 
Ithpahal, we have Pohel, or Palpel, and their Passives. In 
other cases the flexion is regular, ^ however always ap- 
pearing as the middle stem-letter, e. g. D.1£, D*j?fiJ$. Ex- 
amples of Pohel and Palpel are DEI"), Fut. DD1T ; ; D^Qt?, 
Inf. njD^pcp, from D11 and DIlO. 

(90.) In some instances the Aphel is found formed as in 
verbs ^3, e. g. D^j?iN, IpHIK ; in others as in verbs J7J7, e. g. 
^COtf. The 1 Part, has in a few instances the form TTSQ ; 
and in Biblical Chaldee we find in one place D^j?TO, Dan. 
ii. 21. 



Chap. II.] OF THE VERB. 35 

Rem. — Yerbs in which the middle stem-letter is 1 moveable are, as far as 
regards this letter, perfectly regular. If the verb be also S7, or 71?, the 1 
is always moveable. "When two verbs are found having the same stem- 
letters, one being a quiescent verb, and the other with 1 moveable, they 
are usually entirely distinct in signification, e. g. TViW, to sinl:; TVVSD, to 
germinate. Sometimes there is an interchange of forms, as from ttflb, 
Pret. Pehal tab, but with suffix "»3tDlb. 

t ■ "t : 

§ 26.— YERBS vh. 
Pabadigh: G. 

Verbs ft7 in Chaldee embrace not only verbs properly ft /, 
but also verbs corresponding to the Hebrew verbs H7, which 
latter class again comprehends verbs w and v, or verbs of 
which the third stem-letter was originally 1 or \ The ano. 
malies of these verbs arise from the ft quiescing in a long 
vowel, — or — , or being represented by \ which likewise gene- 
rally, though not always, quiesces in a long vowel, _ or __, 
or falling away altogether. In the following more parti- 
cular statement of the peculiarities of this class of verbs, 
we shall for clearness consider separately the cases where 
the last radical is, and is not, the last letter of the form. 

1. In the forms which end with the third radical, either (91.) 
the ft remains, as in the ground-form, or it is represented 
by \ In the Preterites of the derived conjugations *• takes 
the place of ft. In all the Imperatives (2 masc. sing.), the 
third radical is generally \ In the Infin. Pehal, and in the 
Futures and Participles, we find forms both in ft and \ the 
forms in ft being more common in Pehal, those in *• in the 
other conjugations. Where ft remains, it quiesces in _ or 
__, in _ in the Preter., and sometimes in the Infm. Pehal, 
in _ in all the other forms. The final ^ quiesces in _ or 
_ , except in the Passive Participles of Pahel and Aphd; 



36 PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. [Part II. 

in the Preterites and Imperatives we find forms both in **_ 
and\_; in the Futures and Participles (except the 2 Part. 
Pehal) the finaP quiesces in _. In the Passive Participles 
of Pahel and Aphel the ^ is moveable, e. g. 7^P, vJD. 
(92.) 2. With respect to the forms corresponding to those 
of the regular verb, in which the third radical is not the 
final letter. 

Before the afformative H— ■ of the 3 fern. sing. Preter, 
Pehal, in the 3 masc. plur. Preter., and the 2 masc. plur. 
Imper., in the forms of the Fut. in ]V- and ]\ the K is lost, 
e. g. JV7J, 173, ] vW> P 'T-' ^- n some forms, e. g. the 3 fern, 
plur. Preter. Pehal, in several of the Infinitives, and in 2 fern, 
plur. Imper. Pehal, it remains, but is not heard, e. g. H^T?, 
HN7J, rWNAJI. The tf is changed — (a) into *• quiescent be- 
fore the afibrmatives of the 1 and 2 sing, and plur. of the 
Preterites, as well as in the 3 masc. plur., e. g. fi vJ, P^vJ, 
&P.7-3, 1 v^; (&) into ^ moveable before the afibrmatives of the 
3 fern. sing, and plur. of the Preterites of the other conju- 
gations, except Pehal (in some of these forms it is doubled), 
before the afformative }— in all the Futures, e.g. JV'WK, 
NJ7?n#, u??\ an d also in the forms of the Infin. ftf?}p, and 
of the 2 masc. sing. Preter. Pehal, f) vJ. 

§ 27.— REMARKS ON THE PARADIGM OF VERBS »V 

(93.) 1. Preter. In P<?M in the 3 plur. masc. and fern. Ave find the double 
forms lb} and V 1 ??, nsb^ and rwb} ; and similarly in the 3 masc. plur. 
of the other conjugations forms both in V — and ^ —, e. g. vbSfiS, 
•IS^/^riS, Vp3, ^ytt. In the 3 masc. plur. Preter. Pehal we have some- 
times the termination *l, like the Hebrew, instead of 1, e.g. ^71. In the 
later Targums we find as the termination of the 3 plur. fern. Preter. ]W— , 
instead of HS— , e. g. ?S~)(7. In Dan. iv. 22, we find the form of the 2 masc. 
sing. Preter. Pehal, H^'DT). 



Chap. II.] OF THE VERB. 37 

2. Imper. The 2 fern. sing, sometimes ends in—, e.g. wbM, and the (94) 
2 fern. plnr. in )— , e. g. ]")p. 

3. Future. Eor the termination }i of the 3 and 2 masc. plnr. we ( 95.) 
sometimes find "p, e. g. ^SlttK The ] of the termination ]i is sometimes 
apocopated. 

4. Infinitive. The form of the Infinitive Pehal, with a paragogic N, ( 96.) 
e.g. N^2ft, is seldom fonnd, except when the Infin. is joined with a Pre- 
position (the gerund). The Infinitives of the other conjugations terminate 

in J"P — in Biblical Chaldee, e. g. rPIPn ; and in the later Targums in some 
instances in ^i, e. g. ^isn. 

5. Participles. The 2 part. Pehal of the form >b% has sometimes com- (97.) 
pound Sheva under the first radical, even when not a guttural, e. g. '•ba, 
Dan. ii. 19. 

Apocopated forms. 

The apocopated Future, which is so marked a character of verbs nb in ( 98.) 
Hebrew is also sometimes , found in wb verbs in the Chaldee, though its 
occurrence is not frequent. Examples are ntfrFi, from Miltt?, "»!T, for irP, 
from mn. The apocopated form is also to be met with in the Imperative, 
e.g. F\W& apoc, and with W prosthetic for \ntt7. 

§ 28.— VERBS vh, WITH SUFFIXES. 

While, generally speaking, the forms of the other irre- (99.) 
gular verbs with suffixes, do not differ from those of the 
regular verb, the forms of verbs Js7, in consequence of the 
peculiarities of the final syllable, exhibit deviations from 
the regular type. Thus (a) the quiescent K and ^ at the 
end of the forms of the Preter. and Fut. are usually (though 
not invariably) dropped, and the forms of the Preter. take 
the suffixes with the union vowel ( . ), or ( t ) ; those of 
the Fut. with J epenth., e. g. Preter. ^TH, p^Jl ; Fut. ^3ttT, 
FUTrT, Viajp^; Fut. Pahel, fi35#& The quiescent \ on the 
other hand, is retained in the Imper., e.g. ^H^Q"]. (b) The 
1 of 3 masc. plur. Pret. Pehal, and of 2 masc. plur. of the 



38 PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. [Part II. 

Imperatives, is changed into % and the termination V— of the 
3 masc. plur. of the other Preterites is changed into V, e. g. 
^lET), ^jni? (on the other hand, JWDT, Josh. x. 27). 

The forms of the Preterites in tV- and TV 1 - remain 
unchanged, e.g. nrwrj. 

§ 29.— VERBS DOUBLY IRREGULAR. 

There are many verbs, two of whose stem-letters are 
affected by the causes of irregularity that have been speci- 
fied, e.g. verbs which are both ]D and &?, both ^ and &7. 
Such verbs sometimes exhibit the anomalies of both the 
classes of irregular verbs to which they belong; sometimes 
those only of one. Generally speaking, double irregulari- 
ties are exhibited in the forms of those verbs only whose 
first and third radicals belong to the class of letters which 
give rise to irregular forms. 

( 100.) Verbs *|D and S7 (PP) usually exhibit the irregularities of both classes, 

e. g. rfe, Imp. Pehal, tfb ; W13, Preter. Aphel, ^N. 
(f ff . 

( 101.) Verbs WD and N7, likewise, are doubly anomalous, e. g. SilM, Inf. Pe- 
hal, VIE), or SHE; Fut. Pehal, ^TV\; Preter. Aphel, \TP«, like b^N; also 
^r\; Inf. Aphel, n^TTl; NDN, Preter. Ithpehal, "WIS; Fut. Pahel, >&; 
Part. Pahel, ^DD. 

(102.) Verbs *S andsb; e.g. N3T, Fut. Pehal, &V>\; N»?, Fut. Pehal, ifij; 
NT, Fut. Pahel, iJV ; Preter. Aphel, 'HIM ; Fut. Aphel, , HY» ; NTP, Preter. 
Aphel, ^niS ; 1 Part. Aphel, >rTO and >rTO. 

§ 30.— DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

( 1-03.) To the class of defective verbs properly belong all those 
which want any mode or tense. As, in fact, few verbs are 
found in all their forms in the Chaldee literature which is 
extant, it may not in all cases be easy to determine whether 
a verb is really defective, or whether, if we possessed a 



Chap. III.] OF THE NOUN. 39 

greater extent of literature, the forms not now found would 
be ascertained to have been in use. We observe, however, 
in the literature which remains some pairs of verbs, gene- 
rally seen to be cognate, in which one of the pair supplies 
the forms wanted in the other, like epx°l Jia h y^Oov, &c., in 
Greek ; fero, tuli, latum, in Latin. Examples are — 

27V and )nj, to give. The former is used in the Preter. 
and Imp. Pehal, and in Ithpehal ; the Fut. and Inf. Pehal 
of the latter are generally used. 

p7p and ppjl, to ascend. The latter is used in the Inf. 
and Imp. Pehal, and in Aphel ; the former in the Preter. 
Pehal, in Pahel, in Ithpehal, and Ithpahal. 

N-H£> and Rp&, to drink. The former is used in Pehal, 
the latter in Aphel. 

T?H and ^H, to go. The latter is found in the Inf. and 
Fut. Pehal ; the former generally in Pahel. 



CHAPTER III. 

OF THE NOUN. 



§ 31.— PRIMITIVES AND DERIVATIVES. 



Nouns may be regarded as either primitive or derivative. (104.) 
Derivatives again are divided into verbals, or those derived 
from the verb, and denominatives, or those derived from 



other nouns. 



* 



* In reference to the distinction of verbals and denominatives it should be 
held in mind that many so-called verbal derivatives are in no respect more de- 
rived than the corresponding verbs, but that both come side by side from the 



40 PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. [Part II. 

The primitive nouns are simple in form, and many of 
them are monosyllabic. They are the words which denote 
the ' necessary primitive aspects of life,'* thus including the 
terms which express some of the most obvious relations, 
such as father, mother, &c.; the names of parts of the body, 
and the designations of other palpable ideas. 
(105.) Of the two classes of derivatives the verbals are by far 
the more numerous. In treating of verbal derivatives it is 
convenient to regard as the stem-word the 3 masc. sing. 
Preter. of the verb. Some nouns are identical with the 
stem-word, e.g. "15P, book, from the verb "l?P; others 
differ from it only in their vowels, e. g. *"!?$, edict, from 
")D^; in others again one of the stem-letters is found 
doubled, e. g. 333, thief, from 22?, or the form is modified 
by certain letters prefixed, inserted, or suffixed, e. g. "*?7^? 
desert, from 157; ^975, disciple, from 7y?; ]^p$, doctrine, 
from ^/tf. The formative letters in Chaldee, correspond- 
ing to the Heemantiv letters in Hebrew, are ]V^DNPJ, of 
which &£\nn&> are prefixed, *H are inserted, and pntfn 
are suffixed. 



§ 32.— ON THE MARKS OF GENDER OF NOUNS. 

(106.) The Chaldee, as well as the other Shemitic languages, 
has but two genders, — the masculine and feminine. The 
names of objects which in other languages are neuter, and 

same primitive root, which may he regarded as the source of hoth forms, 
e. g. Tjbft, a king, cannot properly he said to he derived from Tjbft, to reign, 
the noun heing unquestionably as old, if not older, than the verh. See 
Gesen., Hehr. Gramm., §§ 30, 80. It is, however, practically convenient 
in all cases to speak of the 3 masc. sing. Preter., i. e. the simplest form of 
the verh, as the stem-word. 
* Furst, Lehrgeh., § 178: 



Chap. III.] OF THE NOUN. 41 

nouns expressing abstract ideas, are, in the Chaldee, mas- 
culine or feminine, but more commonly the latter. 

As respects their form, feminine nouns only have a (107.) 
characteristic termination. The feminine endings are tt— 
(H_), V, \ *! (J">V, HI, ID). With respect to the first of 
these, care must be taken not to mistake for the feminine 
termination the mark of the emphatic state of masculine 
nouns, § 38, which is identical with it. 

The termination H is according to the Hebrew orthography, and is (108.) 

not a proper Chaldee form, except in the case of feminine nouns formed 
from masculines in \_, in which it is the regular termination, e. g. "^DD, 
a Chaldean ; nW^DS, a Chaldean woman. 

t t: - 

There are several nouns which are feminine, though not having any of (109.) 
the characteristic feminine terminations. Such are the names of countries, 
and of towns, and appellatives denoting localities generally, the names of 
members and parts of the body, particularly of those that are double, and 
of instruments, e.g. rpN, path; )1^, ear; yiTl, sword. 

§ 33.— VERBAL NOUNS. 

Verbal nouns are connected in form and meaning with (HO.) 
the Participles and Infinitives of the corresponding verbs, 
and, generally speaking, nouns having the forms of Infini- 
tives, denoting the action, or state, &c, are in signification 
abstract, while participial nouns, denoting the subject of the 
action or state, are concrete. It should be observed that 
the forms of the Infinitive and Participle to which the 
nouns are related are not always found in the Chaldee, but 
must be sought for in the cognate dialects, the Hebrew 
and Arabic. 



42 PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. [Part II. 



Forms of Verbal Derivatives. 

(a) JYouns derived from Pehal. 

(111.) I. The following are some of the most ordinary forms derived from 
Participles, or participial nouns, with concrete significations : — 

1. btpp, btop, btpp, ^P> various forms of the first participle, e.g., 
tjbtt, king; ""123, man; t£72\ ^V i 1H- 3 ' priest; thv, age; — from a sb 
verb, *0*T, pure ; — from verbs W, TJ*T, thin ; 2H, great ; — from verbs TO, 
NEp, statue; HEAD, *fe*p. 

t't t 

2. bt3p, btep, intensive forms; e.g. 2^2, War; 233, to/; "123, ^ro, 
lit. very strong one, comp. -with "123, man, lit. strong one. From a Sv verb, 
^hv, exalted. 

3. btS^p, b^p, other forms of the first participle (to the first of which 
belong several adjectives expressing colours), e.g. pE-!D, red; O^b-TO, youth. 

4. btep, another intensive form, to which belong several adjectives de- 
noting corporal defects, this sense being derived from the notion of inten- 
sity so great as to be vicious, e. g. nbw, dumb; ttHn, deaf. 

5. Vtap, VtDp, b^tap, bitop, forms of the second participle, from which 
many adjectives are derived, e.g. b^fTl, terrible; T*nt, small; b^2M, gate ; 

pi:>\ 



( 112.) II. The following are nouns having the forms of Infinitives, and gene- 
rally abstract in signification : — 

1. btap, btap, b&p, b^p, Vtap, btap, bitap, b^tap, e.g. nbw, peace; 

E722, step; D3?ta, tas^; K?^!), stool; Tp!£, w ^>' p^tp, forgiveness; 
KJSQb, garment ; — from a verb 2727, jn, #r^ ; — from a verb "»Q, ri3H, 
knowledge; W»T, science ; — from a verb sb, rn21, purity. 

2. btapE, btoptt, e.g. ,Tft», bowl; TOTO, «fc;-from verbs {a, IDE, 
s<w; fcTJESE, prison; — from a S3 verb, "WE, word ; — from a verb TO, 



Chap. III.] OF THE NOUN. 43 

(b) Nouns derived from the other Conjugations. 

1. Infin. Pahel. btep, b^p, bnapJTl (Arab, form); e. g. ban, destruc- (113.) 

fo'ow ; H23% clamour ; D-llp, sanctification ; SD^bttTJjl, reward' ; — from a 

fo verb, -I^S, /cm. Of the form btopE (Infin. of Hebr. Puhal), )12m, 
preparation. 

2. Pahel Participle. — b&p», e. g. ttflattfp, servant. 

3. />*/m. Aphel— b^ana, "nbfcpw (nbtapn), e.g. pttfba, «wMor; 

• : fr r t : tt: •: 

nDEtsn, concealment; — from verbs 7D,Sn i )n3M, war; T^TTV^, illumination; 
— from a verb '•D, n^DpS, cincture; — from a verb 137, NDSH, agitation. 

4. Schaphel. — b^tfiptt?, e.g. 'IfflSft?, servitude; Palpel; e.g. bsbs, wA^J, 
from bb^. 

Rem. 1 . — As there are some common forms of Infinitives and Participles, 
e. g. bl3p, a question must in some cases arise, whether a noun should pro- 
perly be regarded as derived from an Infinitive or a Participle. The sense 
will not always indicate to which class it belongs, as nouns derived from 
Participles maybe abstract, and those derived from Infinitives, concrete, — 
a fact which need not appear strange, as the use of the abstract for the 
concrete, and vice versa, is common in all languages. 

Rem. 2. — Forms derived from Passives will readily present themselves, 
e. g. Herons, tumult. 

§ 34.— DENOMINATIVE NOUNS. 

Denominative nouns include those formed from other 
nouns, whether the latter be primitive or derived from verbs. 
The denominatives are in many cases analogous in form to 
the different classes of verbals, their mode of formation 
being derived from that of verbals, which were a more 
ancient part of the language. 

The following are some of the common forms: — C 114.) 

1. JSTouns with the termination V_, generally adjectives, and forming 
from numerals, and from the proper names of persons and countries, Ordi- 
nals, Patronymics, and Gentiles, e.g. , H?3j stranger; ^TO^, Chaldean; 
^27nn, fourth. 



44 PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. [Part II. 

2. Concretes formed by the addition of ) — , e. g. prjN, another; pSttE, 
seller; ]HDD73, despiser. 

3. Many feminines terminating in iy\ and JT — , and being the abstracts 
corresponding to the concretes from which they are formed, e. g. n^Dbp, 
kingdom, from Tjbp ; rfiDftbN, widowhood, from ]ftbs ; iTtthtt?, # rooting 
up, from ttnttf. 

4. Forms like (», 2) of the Verbals, e. g. 3Ttfn (for V^H) doorkeeper, 
from 37*nXH ; }QD, *««7or. 

§ 35.— OF THE PLURAL OF NOUNS. 

( H5.) The plural termination of masculine nouns is ^ - added 
immediately to the singular, e. g. "HCO, rock, plur. P"HO, 
rocks; but (a) nouns ending in ft -, or *• -, derived from 
verbs ft7, in the plural terminate -in ])-; and (b) those 
ending in ^ _ or ^ft in the plural terminate in pft -, e. g. 
X% plur. $| ; ^7i?, plur. ]^P7)?. 

(116.) The plural termination for the feminine gender is |— , 
e. g. NJ^TOj province, plur. lJ'Tp. This termination imme- 
diately takes the place of the termination of singulars end- 
ing in ft— , but (a) feminine nouns ending in Hft— (from 
masculines in V ) form their plural in £_, and (6) femi- 
nines in 1, 1, and V in the plural terminate in \] and \l, 
e.g. n»D7I?, plur. r T £7j?; ID^D, plur. I}? 1 ?)?; 137, plur. 

H31; n^b, plur. jntsto. 

( 117.) In the Chaldee, as in the Hebrew, many nouns which in 
the singular have the form of masculines take the feminine 
termination in the plural, e. g. 3ft, father, plur. |H?$ ; ^^ 
or D'2>, name, plur. )TO^ ; ^C?^, physician, plur. ]lpft ; " 1 P73, 
throne, plur. ]}CH5- 

( 118.) Again, many nouns of the feminine form in the singu- 
lar have the masculine plural termination, e. g. Hbft, ell, 
plur. ]^?ft ; ftv>/9, word, plur. l^ft ; K|tf, cAam, pi. p?]l. 

(119.) Some nouns have a double form, both the masculine 



Chap. III.] OF THE NOUN. 45 

and feminine, in the plural, e.g. H/9N, plur. pj$$ and ]nfttf ; 
*0"p, 6fess%, plur. ]^ni and 1?"]3 ; D1\ day, plur. P^n 
and ipi* 1 ; 7£, vozc^, plur. p£ and \?p r ; KJtf>, year, plur. 
p3# and ]}#. 

In some cases, to the feminine plural termination, a second plural ter- (120.) 
mination is added, e. g. ]nVin2, jrHD^b^, where the construct plurals, as 
if they were singulars, receive the plural termination )—. 

Some nouns are found only in the singular, e.g. ^n^, gold; bro, iron; ( 121.) 
?]DD, silver (the pi. fBDD denotes silver coins). Others occur only in the 
plural, e.g. N^EEJ, heavens ; ]^n, life; "p*E, water; )^%,face; particu- 
larly those denoting different times of life, e. g. } V W3, boyhood. 

The dual number is found only in a few instances, in Biblical Chaldee. 
In the Targums J'Hri, two, is sometimes used with nouns to supply the 
want of a dual. 

§ 36 —STATES OF NOUNS. 

Besides the states of nouns known in the Hebrew as the ( 1^2.) 
absolute and the construct, there is in the Syriac and Chaldee 
a third state termed the emphatic, or the definite. This state 
is marked by the termination of the noun, and its effect 
originally was to supply the place of the definite article, 
e. g. ^75, king ; &5?^> ^ ie king, equivalent to \2feft in 
Hebrew. However, in the existing language the original 
definite sense attached to the emphatic state is in many 
cases lost, and we find words in this state where it is not 
intended to express a definite sense. The departure from 
the original use of the emphatic in this respect is, it may be 
observed, greater in the Syriac than in the Chaldee. 

§ 37.— OF THE CONSTRUCT STATE. 

The form of a noun in the construct state differs less ( 123.) 
from the absolute form in the Chaldee than in the Hebrew, 
for the absolute forms in the Chaldee being shorter, are less 
susceptible of contraction. The construct state is, there- 



46 PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. [Part II. 

fore, generally distinguished only by its termination. The 
peculiar terminations are stated in the following rules: — 

a. Masculine nouns in the singular have no characte- 
ristic termination for the construct state. 

b. The termination p- of masculine nouns in the plural 
is changed into "*-, e. g. pft^H, wise men; 7H5 ^?n, wise 
men of Babylon. 

c. The termination K- or H- of singular feminine 
nouns is changed into il T . Nouns terminating in 1 and 
V assume the terminations TV) and TV-* e.g. NJHP, pro- 
vince; 731 HITHft, province of Babylon; 1^?/?, kingdom; 
^IHn ft^yP, kingdom of Darius. 

d. The feminine plural termination ] - is changed into 
H-, and similarly, ]1 and ]] become T\\ and TV, e.g. ^J^P 
Krfl37P, provinces of the kingdom. 

§ 38.— OF THE EMPHATIC OR DEFINITE STATE. 

(124.) The characteristic of this state in both genders and 
numbers, with the exception of case (A) mentioned below, 
is the termination &— , which is applied to the noun accord- 
ing to the following rules : — 

a. Singular masculine nouns not terminating in K— , 
or V, take immediately the termination K-, e.g. N"n&0, 
from 11 tO. If the noun admits of contraction, the K— is 
added to its shortest form, e. g. tf|)7P, from ^P or "^ /P. 

* The terminations rv\ and JT— are commonly spoken of as the origi- 
ginal feminine terminations, which, the H being dropped, become -1 and 
*»— , see (10, c), and note. The trnth rather is, that -1 and •»— were 
original characteristic feminine terminations, and that a kind of case- 
ending for the construct state was formed by the addition of n. Quite 
analogous is the relation of the fern, termination M— to the construct ter- 
mination D— . See Fiirst, Lehrgeb., § 181. 



Chap. III.] OF THE NOUN. 47 

b. Masculines terminating in N— , in the emphatic state 
have the termination frO ; e. g. tf \0, from *\?J. 

c. The termination JV of masculine nouns in the plural 
is changed into NJ— , e. g. NJ57©, from P??ft. Nouns ter- 
minating in N— in the sing., which in the plur. end in 
\\— , have for the plur. emphatic termination, as others, 
HJ-, e. g. X% from tf?J, plur. of *6l 

<i. Singular feminine nouns ending in K— form the em- 
phatic by substituting for the fern, termination &H— , and 
those ending in V , 1, % form the emphatic immediately 
from the construct state by adding K— e. g. from N275, 
emph. KlJffrD; from ntfto, constr. fin^D, emph. KHntpD; 
from I^D, constr. rfiD 1 ?©, emph. KJT:?75. 

e. If the feminine singular terminates in K^-, the em- 
phatic terminates in NJT— ; and if the singular terminates 
in HiJ— the emphatic terminates in NJT— , or NJV— , e.g. 
NIT 1 ?;, from 8^0, NIT/Olp., or KIT©"]?., from nNETJj?. 

/. The emphatic of feminine plural nouns is formed by 
adding 8— to the construct plural, e.g. NJiyi?, NJTnttfB, 
WT^O. T 

t t : : - 

g. If the feminine singular ends in UN— , the form of 
the emphatic plural is &JT— (the ^ of the masc. from which 
the fern, noun is derived being restored), e. g. ^JTftlj?, 
from HNDTP. 

t t :'- 

h. The exception to the N— termination is in the case 
of masculine nouns ending in the singular in V , of which 
the termination of the emphatic singular is HN— , and that 
of the emphatic plural is^K— , e. g. ^"JP, emph. sing. HNDlj?; 
emph. plur. ^D*Tj?, which is the same as the constr. plur. 
This is the common form of patronymics and adjectives, 
and is the masc. form corresponding to fern, nouns in HN— 
see case (e). Instead of the anomalous forms of the emph. 



48 



PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. 



[Part II. 



plur. of nouns of this class, ^£*]j?, NJTO*7j?, sometimes, but 
less frequently, the regular forms N*ND*|j?, MnNQ*7j?, are 
found. 



§ 39.— ON THE SUFFIXES OF NOUNS. 

The suffixes appended to nouns, and denoting the ge- 
nitive of the pronouns, are different in form according as 
they are appended to singular or plural nouns. The fol- 
lowing are the suffixes of each class : — 



(125.) 



Suffixes of Singulae Nouns. 



Singular. 
c. V> 

m. H— , 
f. PT_, 



my. 
thy. 

his. 

her. 



Plural. 
c. N3-L, 

T T 

m. li3, CTD, 

f- 13, 

m. fm, din, 



your, 
their. 



(126.) 



(127.) 



Suffixes of Plural Nouns. 
Singular. Plural. 

1, c. \to\-, . 
m. p # D>-, 

m. iinv , Dirt. 



1, 


c. 


V, 


my. 


2, 


m. 
f. 




thy. 




i m ' 


•»nSl v % 


his. 


3, 


1 f. 


T T 


her. 



our. 



your. 



their. 



Rem. 1. — Instead of the sing. suff. of 3 masc. sing, ft—,* M— is found in 
two places, in Dan. iv. 15, v. 8. This suff is frequently written fully 

HP . The plur. suff. of 3 masc. sing, ^ni is sometimes used for the singular 

in the Targums. 



* For "convenience, sing. suff. and plur. suff. are used to designate the 
forms of suffixes for singular and plural nouns respectively.- 



Chap. III.] OF THE NOUN. 4Q 

Eem. 2. — The morels 5M, father; HN, brother; UT\, father-in-law, take (128.) 
with suffixes the forms *OM, ^TO, -lOT, and the sing, suffixes of the 2 
and 3 pers. sing, have with these nouns the forms, % >H, tiff; thus, 

■5TJGN, >n^«, ntton. 

Eem. 3. — «p>— and tpV- are orthographic variations for the usual (129.) 
form of the plur. suff. of 2 masc. sing. The plur. suff. of 2 fern. sing, is 
sometimes written *?]—, thus coinciding with the contracted masc. form. 



§ 40.— NOUNS WITH SUFFIXES. 

The changes that nouns in the Chaldee undergo with (130.) 
suffixes are less than in the Hebrew, for the reason alluded 
to (123). The following are the rules as to the modifica- 
tions arising from the suffixed state : — 

a. The termination of masculine derivative nouns in 
11 -, with suffixes, is changed into tf-, e.g. FJSP7& from 
7?7£* T ne termination of nouns in 8- is changed into 
■*— i e. g. frvjj, from x?2. This is analogous to what we 
have seen to take place in the formation of the emphatic 
state of these nouns. 

b. The plural suffixes displace the plural termination 
of masculine nouns, e.g. T5/P, kings; \)jp3?D,your kings. 
In fact, the *• of the plural suffixes belongs to the plural 
(construct) termination of the noun, as in HebreAV, see 
Gesen., Hebr. Gramm., § 89, 3. 

c. The rules for the formation of the suffixed state of 
feminine singular nouns are the same as those for the for- 
mation of the emphatic state, as will be seen by a reference 
to the Paradigm of feminine nouns. 

d. The plurals of feminine nouns take the suffixes ap- 
pended immediately to their construct forms. 

In the Syriac the same suffixes are used for both numbers of feminine (131.) 
nouns. This departure from the analogy of the Hebrew is also common 

11 



50 PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. [Part II. 

in the Chaldee ; and we frequently meet with plur. fern, nouns with the 
suffixes of the sing. form. 



§ 41.— INFLEXION OF MASCULINE NOUNS. 

(132.) "We have seen that changes in the noun occur under 
various circumstances, viz., in passing (1) from the sing, 
to the plur.; from the absolute to the (2) construct, (3) 
emphatic, and (4) suffixed, forms, both singular and plural. 
These changes are termed inflexion or declension. As 
regards declension, masculine nouns may conveniently be 
divided into eight classes, types of each of which are given 
in the Paradigms. The principle of the classification will 
be afterwards explained. 



Chap. III.] 



OF THE NOUN. 



51 



Paradigms of Masculine Nouns. 



II. 



III. 









a 


b 


Sing, absol. 


1'np (abode.) 


Djri5 (word.) 


nb^ (age.) 


*p (hand.) 


constr. 


ni-rp 


cans 


nby 


T 


emph. 
m. suff. 


t : 


t t : • 

n^aris 

•■T : ■ 


t : It 


ST 

t: 

PIT 


Plur. absol. 


•jni-ra 


r??6? 


' • : It 


rT 


constr. 


^Vra 


•■Baria 

■• t : • 


W37 

•• :i t 


H T 


emph. 

m. suff. 




M>ceina 

t -t : • 

>rtariD 

t : • 


S T^X 

' •• : it 


t ~ : 



IY. 





a 


b 


— \ 
c 


/SVft^. tffoo/. 


•qbp, tyba (king.) 


12D (book.) 


y»5 (eye.) 


constr. 


V% rf?? 


nsp 


r? 


emph. 


ssbp 


t : • 


t •• t : - 




^b 


pnsp 


ft??. ™?y 


m. suff. j 


ifosba 


7i^-iDp 


x*®??. 


P£w. ftfoo/. 


piSa 


ri?p 


TTS 


constr. 


^sba 


•nap 


wy w& 


emph. 


sjsba 


t - ; • 


T~ - T-;~ 


„ ( 


N-robfc 


--NlilDp 


vybw vribi? 


m. sw/. 


T^?^ 


fp'TBp 


jIm** 'fiyy^v 



52 



PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. 



[Part II. 



Paradigms of Masculine Nouns — continued. 



v. 



VI. 









r 

a 


b 


Sing, absol. 


htopm Called.) 


0> (sea.) 


DS (people.) 


constr. 


btopna 




&!! 


DM 


etnph. 


Hb&pna 




T~ 


NEK 




nb&pna 




JWJ 


niaM 


m. suff. < 


i psbtapna 




fD^ 


jiDISN 


JPlur. absol. 


pbtopna 




r*R 


r??*? 


constr. 


'•b&pna 




w 


"»BH 


emph. 






T 


wzaH 




| "rfibfcpnp 




^ni^_ 


^ni^N 


7)1. Stiff, i. 


VII. 

A 




fW£ 


VIII. 




a 


5 

b 




Sing, absol. 


«b^ (revealer.) 


>b:ia 




Wg (first.) 


constr. 


wba 


>bia 




'PIP 


emph. 


s>bn 


Sjb^D 




nsmp 


m. suff. < 








prsmp 


Plur. absol. 


^ r* 


r^» 




r«?7P 


constr. 


>bj 


"*1??^ 




^?ii7 


emph. 


«^? 


s>biip 




^?ip 


w ' 


[ ^V? 


Nnibia 




''niMD'Tg 


m. sujf. , 


| ^ 


fi^bao 




tf^wffif? 



Chap. III.] OF THE NOUN. . 53 



Explanations. 

To Parad. I. belong generally all unchangeable nouns. ( 133 
Such are those which have one of the long vowels V, V, 
1, % before the last consonant. 

Examples are "l-ltS, mountain; ttf'H, head; bV», day; ^tfiN, furnace; (134.) 
]Y"D, herald; ^0,fish; b-ltap, slayer. 

To Parad. II. belong nouns of one or more syllables, ( 135.) 
having — in the final syllable, such as 7JJ, w/ctf; Jltf, s^n; 
l^t^, remnant; ]T£, £7*00 ; 0^?, ^rJ. The — in the 
constr. sing, is shortened into — , e. g. K^PI \T$, the tree of 
life. Before suffixes beginning with a vowel it remains 
unchanged, e. g. ^^ V, my tongue : likewise, in the abs. and 
emph., and generally in the constr. plur. Before suffixes 
beginning with a consonant sometimes the — remains un- 
changed, at other times passes into — ; thus, JIHTTZP, their 
abode, Dan. ii. 11; but p^^H, your sentence, Dan. ii. 9. 

f QttfW, N^SttfN, Dan. ii. 27, iv. 7, from the sing. *)t$M, are formed irre- ( 136.) 
gnlarly, as if from a sing. *)tt?N. 

To Parad. III. belong nouns with - or - in their final (137.) 
syllable, and which are either monosyllabic, or dissyllabic 
with the vowel of the first syllable unchangeable. 

Examples are }t, species; DE7, name; ^rD, priest ; btjfip, killer ; ( 138.) 
1QD1D, mourning; bpQ, iron, emph. sbrnD also belongs to this class. 
Such instances as "pbtOp for ^bft|7, tj^^ for T]12tl, are contrary to analogy, 
and the vocalization is inaccurate. The — of monosyllables before ]D and 
|1n becomes __ or _, e. g. ]1nptt7, ji3T. 

To Parad. IV. belong those nouns which correspond to (139.) 
the different classes of Hebrew Segholate forms. Some- 
times, but almost exclusively in Biblical Chaldee, their 
form is the same as in Hebrew, with — in both syllables. 



54 PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. [Part II. 

The peculiarity of their inflexion is that they resume their 
monosyllabic ground-form with a vowel under the first 
letter in all cases where they receive an increase at the end, 
as by the addition of suffixes, by the emphatic termination 
&— , and even by the plural termination, in which last re- 
spect they depart from the analogy of Hebrew Segholates, 
e. g. K^D, ttS 1 ?;?, |^p, from Hfo. 
( 140). The vowel of the inflexion-forms of nouns of the forms 
~, — , —j is — , or — , more rarely—, — naturally when the 
first or second letter is a guttural. Cholem sometimes is 
retained, sometimes passes into — , e. g. 'Vli^"!^, from t^ni^, 
Dan. iv. 15. Such forms as «£p?, 8^21 fr ° m ^?, ^ 
are accounted for by supposing original forms 7^?, ^3^. 

( 141.) In such forms as "pj£ the t sometimes becomes a consonant, e.g. constr. 
plnr. ^5, but also 13>5 ; emph. sing. SJ>E, or S2>2, &c. 

(142.) To Parad. V. belong the Ithpehal participles. The 
inflexion is similar to that of Class IV. The vowel of the 
last syllable falling away, when the word receives an in- 
crease at the end, the antepenult, letter takes a helping 
vowel. 

(143.) To Parad. VI. belong nourfS, the last letter of which is 
doubled when the word receives an increase at the end. 
They are for the most part monosyllabic, and derived from 
verbs W. The final vowel, in consequence of the sharpen- 
ing of the syllable, is changed into its corresponding short 
vowel. In some nouns - passes into t ; e.g. 1^, side, 
emph. frnV- 7JD, totality, i. e. all, in Biblical Chaldee, is in the 
emph. Nvb, but in the constr., and with sufF., 71? (with Qam. 
Chat.), e.g. P'Tv?? Dan. u- 38. In the Targums the 
vowel is 1, or - e. g. pHylS, l^N- 

( 144.) To Parad. VII. belong forms derived from verbs &7, 



Chap. III.] OF THE NOUN. 55 

comprehending Nouns, Participles, and Infinitives. These 
forms terminate variously in N— , V, V, V* As a general 
rule, in the sing, the original *• appears as a consonant when 
the word receives an increase, e. g. K vJ, iT7JJ, from &?1 
In the plural there is a contraction, and the * belonging to 
the plural termination only appears, e.g. ]v3, vJ, KJ7J. 
Instances occur where there is a further contraction, and 
the plur. termination becomes ]— , or, according to the ana- 
logy of the same class of Hebrew nouns, ]V, e.g. )jn, Gen. 
xxxvii. 13 ; pf^, Job, i. 13. 

Such forms as 'OS, "CH, properly belong to Class III., taking, like (145.) 
nouns of that class, a helping vowel, when the word receives an addition j 
e. g. emph. sing. NOS, K^O'l. The emph. plur. H^") must be referred to 
a singular *yi. The inflexion of some nouns of this form is irregular, 
e. g. *Op, wretched, fern. WIV, constr. plur. ^pV, emph. plur. N* W ; ^73, 
^wn?, plur. J»pa, constr. plur. "^pa. 

Iniinitives Pehal of verbs W? are either inflected regularly according to ( 146.) 
this Paradigm, retaining the M (as >), or drop it, e. g. PfO!flD, from N!2!£, 
with suff. of 3 masc. sing. ; "SJ37HB, from K3?!2, with suff. of 2 masc. sing. 

To Parad. VIII. belong nouns ending in V ptf— ). (147.) 
These nouns are for the most part denominatives, and are 
either Ordinals, Patronymics, or Gentiles. Some adjectives 
derived from verbs 87, e. g. \3T, *• 7#, are also included in this 
class. In inflexion the ^ is changed into N (moveable), 
which forms a syllable with the emph. or plur. termination, 
or suffix. The — of the second syllable, which thus becomes 
open, is changed into — . 

It has been stated (124, h) that the emph. plur. of nouns of this class has ( 148.) 
usually the anomalous termination *>W-_, so that the constr. and emph. 
forms of the plur. are identical. In place of the termination ^S— , we find 
in Biblical Chaldee bO— , e. g. HVlBfl, WH-VP. This is sometimes termed 

•• t ° •• t : • •• t : 

the Syriac form, the termination of the emph. plur. of nouns in Yud being 
IX e. g. from LLm^), \7LsJd (STItt7»). 



56 



PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. 



[Part II. 



§ 42.—INFLEXION OF FEMININE NOUNS. 

Feminine nouns may be divided into three classes, types 
of each of which are exhibited in the Paradigms. 



* 





Paradigms of Feminine Nouns. 
I. 

A 






a 


b 


c 


Sing, ahsol. 


WHO (province.) 


ObO (kingdom.) 


•»2"1)D (nurse.) 


constr. 


WHO 


rvoSo 


fTSn'a 


empli. 


snqHO 


srrabo 


Nrpania 


( 


nri2Ho 


nt/robo 


nfrsno 


m. suff. 1 


prrnaHD 


jinnJoSia 


flnn»2HB 


Plur. ahsol. 


ijT!? 


n?^ 


ra-ib 

■t : : - 


constr. 


nyra 


rni 1 ?'? 


njana 


empli. 


mtujhb 


«npSo 


Hnrcsna 


j 


>niroH» 


*»ninjiSo 


*rrirr»2rna 


m. suff. 1 


t • : 

•jinriDHO 


ftnnoSa 


i : : - 



II. 



III. 





a 


b 


c 




£Ywy. «#so?. 


Wb0-)W (widow.) !)bs (prayer.) ^bs ( 

t : ; - 


'fem. of kSj-) nSOIp (first.) 
••T t t :' - 


constr. 


nbonw 


rvibs 


rpba 

t : t 


™E7E 


emph. 


t : - : - 


smbi 

T ; 


srpbn 

T • T 


(Mnwj:) sn^*rp_ 




( nrnbwH 


nnrnbs 


nn>b^ < 


;nn^7f2) nrrmjE 


m. suff 


ninnSanM 


^inn-ibs 


linrr»b:i 


•jinn^-rp 


Plur. ahsol. 


T ; : ■* 


n 1 ?? 


't: t 


K?P7G 


constr. 


nbon« 


mbs 

t : - 


mba 

t : t 


nsbij: 


emph. 


T T : ; - 


smbs 

t t : - 


S Ct^? 


NrnEnp_ 




hninbc™ 


Tiirnbs 


NHirpSj 


NHinwi2 


m. suff. 


hinnbonM 


pnrnbs 


: t : t 


jin/rm;? 



Chap. III.] OF THE NOUN. 57 

Explanations. 

To Parad. I. belong all unchangeable feminine nouns (149.) 
ending in ft— , 1, V, of which the last syllable begins with 
one consonant, e. g. is such a syllable as ftD, "Q, 1*. The 
formation of the construct and emphatic states, of the plural, 
&c, follows immediately, from the rules already given 
(§§ 35, 37, 38), and requires no further explanation. 

To Parad. II. belong nouns of which the final syllable (150.) 
begins with two consonants, or if a consonant with — be 
regarded as forming a syllable, those of which the penulti- 
mate syllable has Sheva. When the word receives an in- 
crease at the end, as by the emphatic termination, or by 
suffixes being appended, two consonants with half- vowels 
would come together, e. g. from ft7£T!ft, ft.rw£Hft, like 
&r?57E?. To prevent this, the first takes a full vowel, ge- 
nerally — or — ; sometimes, but rarely, ~, e. g. from ft£^, 
emph. #%$&, from tfl^, ft^H, from ft/Df], ftfiZpn. 

Nouns of this form ending in 1 or V are inflected in ^51.) 
the singular, as Class I., but in the plural necessarily take 
a helping vowel, — or — , e. g. IDT, plur. ]1DT for yO\, &c. 

Some nouns having a half- vowel under the first radical, and of which (152.) 
the second is M, in inflexion suffer the vowel to pass to the first letter, e.g. 
from HMD, plur. iriHE. 

t : ' r ' T T 

To this class belong derivatives from verbs ft7 ending (153) 
in ft^ following a consonant without a vowel. In the sing, 
emph. and the sing, with suffixes, to avoid the concurrence 
of two Shevas, a helping vowel (— ), is assumed, in which 
the ^ quiesces, e. g. from iHvJ, emph. ftF) v3 for ftf) "7 J. 

To Parad. III. belong feminine nouns in lift-, coming (154.) 
from masculines in V . 

The ft, it is seen, in the emph. sing and plur., and be- (155.) 

1 



58 PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. [Part II. 

fore suffixes, becomes ** moveable ; but in many cases, too, 
the i quiesces in - or -, e. g. KJWTi?, K^lll, ^j^T\, 

T .... 5 T . . _. 

(156.) The usual termination of the plur. abs. is ]& ; but the 
termination ]) is also found, e. g. from sing. "H?^, l^T?^- 

( 157). Rem. 1. — It sometimes happens that nouns of one class take the plural 
which, according to analogy, belongs to nouns of a different class, e. g. 
«b?, plur. Y)bv, as if from sing. sf?j, MBE?, plur. pSttf. 

( 158.) Eem. 2. — When feminine nouns are derived from masculines by the 
addition of one of the feminine terminations, N__, •*), \_ -, the modification 
of the form is the same as in passing from the abs. to the emph. state of 
the masc. noun, e. g. NjflVlS from dVto ; NSbtt and /TObtt from Tfb?p, 
&c. 

§ 43.— IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 

( 159.) There are several nouns, the inflexion of which does not 
conform to the general rules which have been given, and 
which exhibit various irregularities, arising in many cases 
from the derivation of the forms from a second unused 
ground-form. Most of the words affected with these ano- 
malies are irregular in the cognate dialects also. They are, 
generally speaking, the words in most common use. 

The following are some of those of most frequent occurrence :— 

SM or n«, father; emph. N3M ; with suffixes, SQM, e. g. lf:DS, ^TVOM, 
MMN, 75^S (for "ON, my father, the emph. is always used, except in 
one place, Dan. v. 13); plur. ?ni2N; constr. nrnS; emph. snnnS; 

with suff. ^rraN, but also TinnN, "nnrnN. 

• T T ~: - T T : - T T T _ : 

nS, brother; emph. «n«; with suff. >n«, Tj^nN, '•rFinH, or "*!|nM; 

plur. i>nw; with suff. >nst, "rjns, ip™, ^niriw, fP*)lN. 

£N, mother; emph. SEN; plur. ?nBH; with suff. pnnJTDN and 

firing. 

fifclM, fifclM (by aphser. ttfo), man; plur. ^H^N and ^Bfoj constr. 



Chap. III.] OF THE NOUN. 5 ( J 

HttN, WnriS, WnnpW, in pause tfHS, woman; constr, nJHS; plur. ^tp*3; 
emph. NJBfa. 

1T2, house ; constr. JT2, ^2 ; emph. NJT2, NJT2 » ^ ur - T^ s 5 constr. 
>fl2, with suff. fCfla. 

" T * ■« T 

*12, sow; emph. W2; with suff. ?TJ2, nrnja; plur. ^32 (from J2); 
constr. *»32 ; emph. N*22. In one place the sing, emph., with M prosthet., 

«3n«. 

J"I2, JHH2, daughter ; emph. NJT12; with suff. W12; plur. p2 (from 
N32) ; emph. sr)32. 

T, ^m<7; emph. NT, and with S prosthet. NTH ; with suff. PIT, and 

MT^ pnT. 

UV, people; plur. ^tiM (like Syr., ^. i V)V) \ from ^Q±); emph. 

t - : - 

Dttf, or QE7, rc«w0; emph. NttttJ; with suff. p'n^tt?; plur. ?nftD; 

constr. nnEttf ; with suff. finnrrepn?. 

This list does not comprehend all irregular nouns, but it is unnecessary 
to extend it, as the unusual forms are indicated in the Lexicons. 



§ 44.— NUMERALS. 

The cardinal numbers are properly abstract substan- (160.) 
tives, as in Hebrew, and have both a masculine and a femi- 
nine form. The Chaldee has the same peculiarity in refer- 
ence to the cardinal numbers as the other Shemitic 
languages, namely, that the masc. forms of the nouns from 
3 to 10 are used with fern, nouns, and the fern, forms with 
masc* nouns.* 

The following Table exhibits the abs. and emph. states (161.) 
of both genders of the numerals from 1 to 10: — 

* For an explanation of this phenomenon see Gesen., Hebr. Gramm., 
§ 95, 1. 



60 



PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. 



[Paht II. 





Masculine. 




Feminine. 






A_ 






A 






t 




^ 


/* '" 




""^ 




Absol. 




Constr. 


Absol. 




Constr. 


1. 


in 




in 


sin 

I - ." 




nnrr 


2. 
3. 
4. 


snbn 




•nn 
nrhn 






" t : 


5. 


HEten 




nEten 


Dan 




\ntifon 

•• t : - 


6. 


Kntz? 




nnttf 


n^ 




" T " 


7. 


t ; • 




TOnE? 


sntf 




•• t : • 


8. 


t : ~ : 




-nonn 


"™fl 




•»JTaoi=i 


9. 


t : 




nsEJn 


vtin 




•• t : • 


10. 


KIDS 

T : - 




rnp? 


"to? 




V?"!?? 



( 1 62.) «. When 'Hj-l is joined to suffixes, it has the form Vl£), e. g. jin^Yin, 
both of them; JIIFYVt, loth of you. 

h. rvti is also written ntf, flitf. For TOntp we find TfV2M&; for 
3ntt?, nttf, and n^tt? j and for npV, ~)by. 

(163.) The numbers from 11 to 19 are expressed by joining 
to the units the numeral ten (in the form 1D% masc. and 
*HP# fern.). In this case the form of the units is slightly 
modified. In the later Targums the units and *1pl?, or 
"HPJPj are contracted into one word.* 

In the following Tables the contracted forms are given 
in parentheses : — 



* As in our language, fourteen, i. e. four ten, &c. 



Chap. III.] 





OF THE 


NOUN. 






Masculine. 




11. 


ipv in 




C^n) 


12. 


idv "nn 




(npnn) 


13. 


iD2? snbn 

~~: t t : 


(np>bn, 


np^nbn) 


14. 


npv MM-1M 




("lp^a-iN) 


15. 


np_E Mtpan 




(-ip^'n) 


16. 


-ID!? «nK? 

T • 




(-rnna?) 


17. 


— : t : • 




(^P^) 


18. 


( man) 

I t: - : J 




(np\3ptf) 


19. 


ip3) neen-i 




(-ipritt?) 



61 



11. 


nos sin 

•• : - t _ : 


W9T0 


12. 


•npjy Mnnri 


(np^nnn) 


13. 


nps nVn 


(np^bn) 


14. 


no? ssns 


CnpWM) 


15. 


Wps ttfpn 


(vjw) 


16. 


vips na? 


CHpfrtf ^pnaJ) 


17. 


•npi 3na? 


(npitt?) 


18. 


nps "onn 


(vipxipn) 


19. 


np? rti?n 


Cnpnttf, npntp) 



Twenty is expressed by nP# or Pipy, the plur. of *)D# : (164.) 
to. The tens from 30 to 90 are expressed by the plurals 
of the corresponding units, e.g. p£v#, 30; |1£n$, 40; 
r#??n, 50; ppty, 60; pj/?^ or pjn^, 70; liotf or 
IJPJn, 80; |iyt^P, 90. These are all of common gender. 

The intermediate numbers between the tens, 21 to 29, (165.) 
&c, are expressed by connecting the unit with the ten by 
the copulative 1, the ten being placed first, e. g. THI nPJ?, 
masc; 81$) ^PV, fern. 21; Ktjftpni ptfy-l, masc. 35; 



62 PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. [Part II. 

( 166.) The remaining numerals are as follows : — 

100. nwEi 

200. vnm or )nm 

300. n«E rhn 

400. n«D 22ns 

And so on, the fern. abs. of the units being always pre- 
fixed. 

iooo. *lbw 

2000. -psbs ^nri 

3000. ^sbwsnbn 

4000. pa^H «^s-i« 

• : - t : : - 

And so on, the masc. abs. of the units being always pre- 
fixed. 

10000. I^Qbw H-ID2 (or in) 
120000. rial nDS Smn, i.e. twelve ten-thousands. 

't : • ••: - t : - 

The letters of the alphabet are employed in Chaldee in the same 
manner as in Hebrew to designate numbers. See Gesen., Hebr. Gramm., 
§ 5, Eem. 3 ; Lee's Hebr. Gramm., Arts. 20-22. 

(167.) The ordinals for numbers from 3 to 10 are formed from 
the cardinal numbers by the addition of the adjectival ter- 
mination V P^t), the principal vowel of the cardinal 
being changed into V. They are as follows : — 



M 


r asculine. 


Feminine. 


3. 


wbn 


t • : 


4. 


T?i 


t t • : 


5. 


>^pn 


nst2?^n 

t t • — : 


6. 


VTfittf 


Hn\n\nttf (emph.) 


7. 
8. 




Sn^aB? (emph.) 
Hfi^Eijl (emph.) 


9. 


l^ttfcl 


SVWttfo (emph.) 


10. 


"'T?? 


NHnjOT (emph.) 



Chap. IV.] OF THE PARTICLES. 63 

The ordinal first is expressed by ^^H ( m Talm. ^|?), (168.) 
from Dlj?, beginning ; that for second by ]^)1, from flltfjl, 
i. q. Hebr. H^, to repeat. First and second are also ex- 
pressed by yi&7E an ^ H T C!?- 

Rem For the usual form VTbrt we find, Dan. v. 7, ^b-Pl : however, 

see the Anal, on the verse. 

The ordinals from 11 to 19 are expressed by compounds (169.) 
of the cardinal units, and the ordinal ^TPJ-?., tenth, the latter 
being contracted to "Hp or WJP, e. g. Wp^n or ^PID, 
eleventh ; "HD^ll, twelfth, and so on. 

The ordinals beyond 19 have no peculiar forms, but are (170.) 
expressed by the cardinals. Beyond 10 in Hebrew the or- 
dinals have no peculiar forms. 



CHAPTER IV. 



OF THE PAltTICLES, 



§ 45— IN GENERAL. 

The general name of Particles is given to words employed (171.) 
to modify the idea expressed by other words, or to indicate 
the relation between words or parts of a sentence. They 
comprehend Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions, and In- 
terjections. The Particles in Chaldee are either (1) primi- 
tive, or (2) derived from other parts of speech. Both pri- 
mitive and derived particles may be other parts of speech, 
e. g. nouns, which are used as particles, and which, in some 
cases, do not appear ever to have been used otherwise. 



64 PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. [Part II. 

§ 46.— ADVERBS. 

( 172.) The following adverbs may be regarded as primitive : — 
&7, not; TN, where? *]!$, also; &3, here; HEpfl, there y and per- 
haps ^T\ £, when? 

( 173.) The following are derived adverbs, with proper adverbial 
terminations: — Qft?, 6y day; &J/pi\ daily ; ^JTSP^j cartf- 
fully; fflrjJn, again; JVP^tf, in Aramaic. 

(174.) Instances of other parts of speech which came to be 
used as adverbs are substantives, e. g. 7/5, wholly {comple- 
tion) ; KJjrift, 5#fo&0 (lower part); verbs, e.g. 31ft, again 
(Infin. of verb) ; #159, backwards (part. Aphel of JH.5); 
adjectives, e.g. ]5, certainly, so (firm) ; substantives with 
prepositions, e.g. Tp, instantly (from the hand, off-hand); 
K*Tn?, together (as one); IHJ3, partly (in part). 

( 175.) The list of adverbs formed from nouns with prepositions might be easily 
extended. Thus we find NtotifapS truhj {in truth); b?n3, mightily {with 
might), — of speaking, aloud; pfiptlSL, violently {with violence). In many- 
cases, however, it might appear that snch words should be regarded as pe- 
riphrases of adverbs, rather than as adverbs. In all languages similar pe- 
riphrases are common. 

(176.) Examples of compound adverbs are ^TO^N, ever? comp. of ^M and 
^r\tl ; M3p, from here, comp. of prep. "|D and fcO ; OPltt> from there, comp. 
of ]» and DR 

( 177.) The adverbs JVN and WW (lit. heing, existence), there is, and irb 
= JTN isb, there is not, with suffixes, express the persons of the verb sub- 
stantive, e. g. ^niiTW, he is ; ^nirpb, he is not. 

( 178.) The interrogative H is an instance of an adverb formed by abbreviation 
from a longer word, if it be, as Gesenius thinks, contracted from bn. It 
is generally pointed with — , but with — before W, or a letter with 
Sheva. 



Chap. IV.] OF THE PARTICLES. 65 

§ 47.— PREPOSITIONS. 

The following are original prepositions, namely, (a) the (179.) 
inseparable prepositions, which are the same as those in 
Hebrew : — 

2, in, on, with. 
b, to, towards. 

3, like, as. 

These are regularly pointed with Sheva, which, accord- 
ing to the common rules, before a word whose first letter 
has Sheva, becomes (— ), or before a Chateph is changed 
into the corresponding short vowel, e.g. ^33, ^?P3, ^?$3. 
Before feeble letters a contraction commonly takes place, 
e.g. Xnhtib for Xnhtih. With the suffixes we have ^ ^3, 
T3, fo3, M, ^3, T ]b3, 11112, &c. ^3, the form of 3, as "a 
separable preposition, is sometimes found, (b) The prepo- 
sitions rH7, to, at; r^D? and JTO, as, Kfe, which with nouns 
are separable, but are joined immediately to the suffixes, 
and then appear as inseparable, e. g. ^?J?, ^ j?- Also 7J7, 
upon; ]ft,from; D#, w;zYA; ^3, between. 

Of the original prepositions that have "been specified, even the simplest, 
e. g. the inseparables 3, b, 3, cannot be regarded as primitive. See Gesen. 
Hebr. Gramm., § 100, 2, note. Many of them, e. g. 73?, ]£, |*>3, mb, are 
properly nonns in the construct state. They are, however, rightly de- 
scribed as original prepositions, as they do not appear to have been ever 
otherwise employed. 

The following are examples of other parts of speech ( 180.) 
which came to be used as prepositions : — *yi vH, in place of, 
lit. change ; Ml nil, under, lit. lower part ; *l£3, after, con- 
tracted from "10 S3, in the place of 

Prepositions originally nouns with suffixes sometimes appear as fern. (181.) 
forms ; thus b^IOEN, on account of; ^Jjlb^tDipS, on account of me. Some- 
times they take the suffixes used with plurals; e.g. *rrfaX3, '} , D* , b3?. 

K 



QQ PARTS OF SPEECH, AND INFLEXION. [Part II. 

(182.) The preposition )tt is either used separately, or is joined to the noun 

which it governs. In the latter case, the 3 is either assimilated, e. g. 

rr^Jp ; or, if the first letter of the noun be a guttural, it becomes ft, e. g. 

KSTINIQ. With the suffixes it is written SflO, e.g. **J2E, ^T12p. Similarly, 

with suffixes C9 becomes By, e. g. i&p, tfSl??. 
( 183.) The following are compound prepositions — b^pb, Dip 1 ?? b^D, N b2, 

ins (see above), b^TO> & c - 

§ 48.— CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 

( 184.) The conjunctions which may be regarded as primitive 

are ), and ; 3, as ; ]H, if; "f?, as; "HN, smc£; 1^, or. 

Rem. — Though these conjunctions are commonly regarded as primitive, 
it is to be recollected that even the simplest of them can be connected with 
primitive nouns, or verbal roots. The conjunctional and prepositional 
senses of 3 are intimately connected, and it is not plain in some cases to 
which class of particles it should be assigned. 
(185.) Derived (compounded) conjunctions are, ?nb, therefore (comp. of b, 
and pron. *]T\, they); sb v*[ or Sftb^, so that not; ^ TO, until that; 
? n?n an d ^ b"H2l, because. 

(186.) Examples of conjunctions borrowed from other parts 
of speech are D"!3, but; *% that (properly the relative, as 
^#8 in Hebr.; comp. Lat. quod.) 

The rules for pointing 3 and 1 are the same as for the inseparable pre- 
positions. The conj. 1 is pointed as in Hebrew. 

( 187.) Of Interjections, some are onomatopoetic, being merely 
the sounds expressing certain feelings, e. g. Nil, ho! 1, woe, 
alas; comp. Lat. vo3; *H/ or "W/, that! — or they are bor- 
rowed from other parts of speech which naturally came to 
have the character of interjections, e.g. 1JD3 (by entreaty) 
I beseech! — 7Q1HI (ruin) alas! — inn (Imp. Plur. from 3»T) 
come on! 



PAKT III. 

SYNTAX 



CHAPTER I. 

SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 



§ 49.— RELATION OF THE SUBSTANTIVE TO THE ADJECTIVE. 

In the Chaldee, as in the Hebrew, adjectives being few in 
number, the deficiency is supplied by substantives in the 
folio wing ways : — 

The noun denoting the quality, which would be ex- (188.) 
pressed by an adjective in other languages, follows as a 
genitive the noun to which the quality belongs, e. g. 
^1V. "H ^J0> a vision of the night, i. e. a nocturnal vision, 
Dan. ii. 19; &3Fn -V> an iniage of gold, i. e. a golden 
image, Dan. iii. 1; KJtfTlp "*$ ! Q/, garments of holiness, i.e. 
holy garments, Ex. xxix. 29. In examples like KT *]1pJl3, 
with strength of hand, i. e. with strong hand, Ex. xiii, 3, 
where the substantive expressing the quality is followed by 
that to which the quality belongs, in the genitive, it is in- 
tended that the former should represent the prominent or 
leading idea. With L ?!2, totality, the whole, this latter is the 
usual mode of expression, e. g. ^?H 7JD, the whole of the 
wise men, i. e. all the wise men. 

Many adjectival ideas relating to attributes of different ( 189.) 
kinds, and in particular to personal qualities, are expressed 



68 SYNTAX. [Part III. 

by certain concrete nouns, which are followed by the nouns 
denoting the qualities in the genitive. The concrete nouns 
which are generally thus employed correspond to those 
similarly used in Hebrew, and are 151, man; *7#3, master; 
*H.9> t ,ne same; 15, son: e. g. nvU^ 15|? ® n eloquent man, 
Ex. iv. 10; XyUp ^5, hairy, II. Kings,' i. 8; KJO^I n.2?, 
dreamer, Gen. xxxvii. 19; ttn?^ ^5, eastern people, Gen. 
xxix. 1. 

§ 50.— OF THE PLURAL, AND THE REPETITION OF NOUNS. 

( 190.) Besides its regular use to denote plurality, the plural 
number is used to express certain other ideas, namely — 

(1) Where indefmiteness is intended, e. g. T)j?3 *QJ?W 
TJHJ, he was buried in the cities (i. e. in one of the cities) of 
Gilead, Judges, xii. 7. 

(2) To denote power, &c. (pluralis excellentiw) . VH?? 
and P3f3i, both signifying lords, are employed in this way, 
e.g. DV]V57 ftS/E) 1 ? pPPJIST?, against their master the king, 
&c, Gen. xl. 1. pJ1 w]J, the highest, is thus used, Dan. vii. 
19, 22, 25, 27. 

(191.) In order to express plurality without a plural noun, a 
singular repeated is sometimes used. In this mode of ex- 
pression, however, some further idea beyond mere plurality, 
such as the whole, all, or distribution, or diversity, is implied, 
e. g. TTI TJ, Deut. xxxii. 7, all generations; WH^ ^T}V., 
^lTiri/3, each flock separately, Gen. xxxii. 16; /j?J?P 
7|505% (to?) different weights, Deut. xxv. 13. 

§ 51— SIGNS OF THE DIFFERENT CASES. 

( 192.) The genitive relation is expressed in Chaldee in different 
ways: — (1) by the construct state; (2) by "7 as a prefix 
to the word in the genitive, or by H before the second 



Chap. L] SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 69 

noun. 1 or H is the relative, and the noun which pre- 
cedes is in the emphatic, or the construct state, or has a 
suffix, which may be regarded as pleonastic, e. g. tf£1J? 
WDU/1, birds of heaven, Gen. i. 28; K^ferH KC^W, *A* 
£m<7's captain, Dan. ii. 15; KH78"^ J^DC^, #Ae warne 0/" 6W, 
Dan. ii. 20. The genitive of material is often thus ex- 
pressed, e. g. nrn"H n^fcO, Ms head of gold, Dan. ii. 32. 
(3) hy*7, e.g. ^jff? 1[^ a king of Israel, Ezv. v. 11 ; 
particularly in reference to periods of time, e. g. 1"0 t^3 
t^Hi 37 '"^]Dj ^ the first year of Cyrus, Ezr. vi. 3. 

The construct state does not always indicate the genitive relation, the (193.) 
construct form, that of the plural especially, being often used for the abso- 
lute form in the Targums. 

The dative relation is regularly expressed by the prepo- (194.) 
sition 7, e.g. K^feOy ")??$, he says to the Chaldeans, Dan. 
ii. 5. 

The accusative most frequently has no characteristic in- ( 195.) 
dication, and the case is known by the position of the noun 
in the sentence, standing as the object of a transitive verb. 
Sometimes, however, it has the characteristic tV correspond- 
ing to the Hebrew — fi$ or JliJ, and less frequently /, e.g. 
KJDttf JV KH3, he created the heavens, Gen. i. 1 ; Xfflh WW, 
they praised the gods, Dan. v. 4. 

The vocative is regularly expressed by the emphatic (196.) 
form, e. g. ^.p ^2?/J£7 **???> king, live for ever, Dan. ii. 4. 



§ 52.— USE OF THE ACCUSATIVE. 

Besides the regular use of the accusative as the object (197.) 
of a transitive verb, it is employed: (1) in reference to 
time and measure, in answer to the questions hoiv long? how 
often? or how far? e.g. fQQ\ fl^K *n£?P JYW? H3J$, / 



70 SYNTAX. [Part III. 

will cause rain to fall for forty days, Gen. vii. 4 ; POP. 
^"Q Kin NftiTp '^{^ an & h e kneeled three times a day, Dan. 
vi. 10; KJD T^j?tf T tf^£ p$K n.^ ^EH, *A* waters pre- 
vailed upwards fifteen cubits, Gen. vii. 20. (2) Less frequently 
in designations of place, in answer to the question where ? 
e. g. T?3£ tV2 ^y*F\, remain in thy father's house, Gen. 
xxxviii. 2. The preposition 3 is more commonly used to 
designate the place where. The accusative is not employed 
to denote motion to a place, which is regularly expressed 
by the preposition ?. 
(198.) Another employment of the accusative is in adverbial 
designations of different kinds, or in cases where in Greek 
or Latin the accusative would be used with Kara, secundum, 
expressed or understood, e.g. Tj?5 VUi? ^P"]1D "^7, only as 
regards the throne will I be honoured, Gen. xli. 40. Such 
instances, however, are not so frequent in Chaldee as in 
Hebrew, and a preposition is more commonly employed, or 
the idea is expressed by some diiFerent modification of the 
structure of the sentence. 



§ 53.— MODES OF EXPRESSING THE COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE. 

( 199.) The comparative is expressed, as in Hebrew, by the pre- 
position \D ( • 0) prefixed to the noun with which that 
qualified by the adjective is compared, e. g. ]12 2") nTJIll. 
nrniin, and its appearance was greater than its companions, 
Dan. vii. 20 ; 131 WH bin D^D ffJH ^TH, and the serpent 
was wiser than every beast, &c., Gen. iii. 1. In the former 
example there is a species of brachylogy which often occurs 
in connection with comparisons ; for if the idea was fully 
expressed, it would be IJI ft^T}?? 3"1, its appearance was 
greater than the appearance of its companions. 



Chap. I.] SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 71 

The modes of expressing the superlative are also simi- (200.) 
lar in Chaldee and in Hebrew : thus we find the adjective, 
followed by the genitive of the noun denoting the object 
with which the comparison is made, e.g. E* 1 ^^ '?^> the 
meanest of men, Dan. iv. 17 ; or the emphatic form of the 
adjective is used, e.g. NJ ! D£ D# tXltJ] NHI., and behold the 
youngest is with our father, Gen. xlii. 13; or finally, a kind 
of superlative is made by connecting a noun with its plural 
in the genitive, e.g. l^Tlp ^7P? the mos t holy thing ; *tf7Q 
N*? /?, the greatest of kings. 

§ 54.— SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS. 

The numerals from 2 to 10 may stand: (1) in the ab- (201.) 
solute state before the substantive, e. g. ]^5 NF)7#, Gen. vi. 
10 ; or (2) in the absolute state after the substantive, e. g. 
T\\l} pftft, Dan. iii. 1 ; or (3) in the construct state before 
the substantive, e. g. pt£3# AJ^tf, Num. xxxiii. 13. In 
the latter case the numeral is regarded as a noun ; in the 
two former cases as an adjective. 

The numerals above 10 generally stand before the noun, (202.) 
e.g. \hh r#31S! 1W : V!H3n8j Gren.\di. 4 ; ]^K nk>J7 t^Dn, 
Gen. vii. 20 ; '\W& #Vw '\V&&, Gen. xvii. 1; "ifeJJ *tf)^ 
P5PQ, Exod. xxvi. 26; not, however, invariably: comp. 
Dan. iii. 1 ; vi. 1,2; Gen. xxxii. 14, 15. 

Fractional numbers, e. g. ^, J, J-, are sometimes ex- (203.) 
pressed by a substantive denoting the fraction, e.g. K£>ftin, 
a fifth part ; sometimes by such a periphrasis as that in the 
following example : p8P r6$3 *ap£ ]/? ^H $1$% an omer 
is one of ten (i. e. a tenth part) in three seah (i. e. in an 
ephah), Exod. xvi. 36. 

In designations of weights or measures, the noun expressing the weight ( 204.) 
or measure is sometimes omitted, though less frequently than in Hebrew. 



72 SYNTAX. [Part III. 

(205.) It has been stated (167-9) that there are in the Chal- 
dee ordinal numbers corresponding to the cardinals from 
1 to 19; but in place of these ordinals, the cardinals are 
sometimes used in designations of time, e. g. HIH £"0^3 
*1 ¥^«?3 / , in the first year of Belshazzar, Dan. vii. 1 ; tfJ73$3 
W2V &nif#, on the seventeenth day, Gen. vii. 11. 

(206.) Numbers are expressed distributively by the cardinal 
numbers repeated, e. g. KJO?* Htf3?\ % sevens, seven of each, 
Gen. vii. 9. Once, twice, &c, are expressed by NJ5J, with 
the cardinals, e.g. nJH7]jl PWf, $nc£, Dan. vi. 10; "IJ^J? : 
PJP.T, £m fo'm&s, Gen. xxxi. 7. Adverbs such as two-fold, 
threefold, &c., are expressed by means of 1H, with the cor- 
responding cardinal, e. g. 1J1 *7J/ H^3^"*Tn, seven-fold more 
than, or seven-times more than, &c, Dan. iii. 19. 



§ 55._ CONSTRUCTION OF ADJECTIVES. 

(207.) When the adjective is used to qualify the substantive, 
that is, as an epithet, it regularly stands after the substan- 
tive, e. g. nTfT ! Q1., excellent greatness, Dan. iv. 33. 

(208.) When the adjective is used as a predicate, the verb 
substantive being expressed or understood, its position is 
sometimes before and sometimes after the substantive, 
e.g. ^yST\ T\, my iniquity is great, Gen. iv. 13; H27 K";¥? 
L&^3 K^$n> ti ie thoughts of man's heart {are) wicked, 
Gen. viii. 21. It may be observed that the adjective is 
emphatic in sense where it precedes the substantive. 

(209.) Whether adjectives be employed as epithets or predi- 
cates, they agree generally with their substantives in gender 
and number. The exceptions to this, as when a singular 
collective noun has a plural predicate, are rather apparent 
than real, and are explained on the principle of the con- 



Chap. I.] SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 73 

structio ad sensum, the sense being regarded rather than the 
exact grammatical relation of the words. 

An adjective, when its application is explained and qua- (210.) 
lined by a substantive, precedes the substantive, in the con- 
struct state, e. g. TVT\ 7?^, humble in spirit, Prov. xvi. 19 ; 
KIT? ^3D, the wise of heart, Job, xxxiv. 34. When this 
construction occurs in the Hebrew, we sometimes find the 
preposition 3 joined to the substantive in the Chaldee, e.g. 
Gen. xxxix. 6, NJ^.3 "^§^, fair in countenance, where the 
Hebrew is l$h H^. 

Where adjectives standing alone are employed in a (211.) 
neuter sense, that is, where neuter adjectives would be used 
in Greek or Latin, and where in English we supply the 
word thing or things, the feminine singular or plural is used 
in the Chaldee, e.g. in^X] 7?£?ft &P, a mouth speaking great 
things, Dan. vii. 8. 

§ 56— CASE ABSOLUTE. 

It is not uncommon to find a noun placed at the begin- (212.) 
ning of a sentence, standing in no grammatical relation to 
any other word. In this way either the structure of the 
sentence is simplified, or prominence is given to the noun 
thus placed, as expressing the principal idea in the sentence, 
e. g. 7 vl. nil &H &7 — TOftl, and as for me — this secret was 

\~J •. T-TTT T "J " / V 

not revealed to me, Dan. ii. 30; JVin Htn "03#B 7# ^*0 M?m, 
and as for the visions of my head upon my bed, I was seeing, 
&c, Dan. iii. 10. 



74 SYNTAX. [Part III. 



CHAPTER II. 



§ 57.— SYNTAX OF THE PKONOUN. 

(213.) When a personal pronoun is the subject of a sentence, the 
logical copula, or verb substantive, is not expressed, being, 
so to speak, included in the pronoun, e.g. pJlK 77N, you 
{are) spies. Gen. xlii. 9 ; &50^ ^5, we (are) honest, Gen. 
xlii. 11 ; p^SJ? rP7?EH Kin, this (is) what I said unto you, 
Gen. xlii. 14. 

( 214.) The pronoun of the third person is used to connect the 
subject and the predicate, even when the former is of the 
first or second person, e.g. J"n$ H ^/TH^y 1£fl ttjnj^, &'0 are 
^ servants of God, Ezr. v. 11 ; 'K'O'l tflfrftiN, ar£ £Aow 
Daniel? Dan. v. 13. 

(215.) The separate pronouns are always in the nominative, 
except in one case, that is, where a suffix is used, and the 
pronoun is repeated for the sake of emphasis. As the suffix 
cannot be written without the verb or noun, the repetition 
is effected by the personal pronoun, which then must be 
regarded as an accusative or genitive, according as the suf- 
fix is joined to a verb or substantive, e.g. JpJtf *]& *s|F\jniiO, 
and I may make thee, even thee, to know, Pro v. xxii. 19; 
7N!fi']T HJS Vyn, the spirit of me, of me Daniel, Dan. vii. 15. 

( 216.) Redundancy in the use of pronouns is a characteristic 
of the Aramaic dialects ; but the Chaldee is less remark- 
able in this respect than the Syriac. The following are the 



Chap. II.] SYNTAX OF THE PKONOUN. 75 

principal cases in which the peculiarity may be observed : — 
(1) When suffixes precede a genitive, e.g. H7& H ^D^SK, 
servants of God, Ezr. v. 11. This case is of frequent occur- 
rence. (2) When the suffix with a preposition is followed 
immediately by the preposition with the noun to which the 
suffix refers, e.g. 7^;|J*J3 FQ in him, in Daniel, Dan. v. 12. 
(3) Similarly, when the suffix with a verb is followed im- 
mediately by the noun to which the suffix refers. See 
Hos. xiii. 1. 

The suffixes to nouns, which are in fact equivalent to (217.) 
possessive pronouns, generally express the subject, but 
sometimes also the object, e.g. l^rn, not your decree, but 
the decree concerning you, Dan. ii. 9 ; HJv^j the fear of 
him, Exod. xx. 20. 

The possessive pronouns may be expressed in another (218.) 
way besides the ordinary method by suffixes, that is, by r^\ 
(compounded of the relative ^ and the preposition 7) with 
the suffixes of the different persons, e.g. v^, mine; H/H, 
his; IjTH, our. 

When one noun is followed by another in the genitive, (219.) 
and the two thus connected express one complex idea, the 
suffix referring to the whole idea is appended to the second 
noun, e.g. p^DITT vJ/3, your enemies, Lev. xxvi. 38. 

§ 58.— USE OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 

The relative pronoun ^, or \ by itself expresses the ( 220.) 
nominative or accusative of the relative, who or whom, e. g. 
TSy\\ ^ ^[7, to thee who hast given, Dan. ii. 23 ; K"}5^ E*7K, 
man whom he had created, Gen. ii. 8. In the latter case the 
suffix is sometimes appended to the verb, conformably to 
what we see takes place in the other oblique cases of the 
relative. By this, ambiguity is avoided. 



76 SYNTAX. [Part III. 

(221.) The other oblique cases of the personal pronouns being 
expressed by suffixes appended to prepositions or nouns, 
the oblique cases of the relative are expressed by connect- 
ing ^ (T) with the personal pronouns, sometimes imme- 
diately, as FJ7, to him ; iTH, to whom; but more usually with 
one or more words intervening, e. g. pHY? /1Pjn KJTlj?, the 
cities to which we shall come, Deut. i. 22; J/Dt^tl tt7 H Qtf 
n^J^v, a people whose language thou shalt not understand, 
Deut. xxviii. 49; FD nnifl^ V^% the land in which they 
sojourned, Exod. vi. 4. The pronoun is sometimes not ex- 
pressed, but understood, so that the oblique cases of the rela- 
tive are then expressed by "H or ^ alone, e.g. p/pTH &fti^3, 
on the day on which ye shall eat, Gen. hi. 5. 

(222.) Similarly, a relative signification is given to adverbs 
by connecting with them ^ or *H, e. g. |ftJ?, there; \ftF\1, 
where. One or more words may intervene between the re- 
lative and the adverb whose signification is affected by it. 

( 223.) The personal or demonstrative pronoun must often be 
supplied before the relative, especially when a preposition 
or mark of a case stands before the latter, e. g. JV K3J7T 
^"QfT^, I know, (lie) whom thou blessest, &c.,Num. xxii. 6. 

( 224.) The relative is sometimes omitted, but less frequently 
than in Hebrew, e. g. |1D1p^ : ^??7? t7%2~[$, four kings (which) 
shall arise, Dan. vii. 17. Sometimes in Hebrew both the 
pronoun and the relative must be supplied after a noun in 
the construct state, e. g. ri7tp£l T2, by the hand (of him 
whom) thou wilt send, Exod. iv. 13. In such a case, both 
(^ 1?) are usually expressed in the Chaldee. 

§ 59.— OF THE DEMONSTRATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 

( 225.) When we find the demonstrative pronoun repeated, the 
words being joined by the conjunction 1, or a preposition, 



Chap. II.] SYNTAX OF THE PEONOUN. 77 

they are to be rendered the one, the other, e. g. i"OT DJ7 POT, 
the one with the other, Dan. ii. 43; &H ]£? *n, the one from the 
other, Dan. vii. 3. 

When the noun which precedes the interrogative is in (226.) 
the construct state, the interrogative is to be regarded as 
in the genitive, e.g. ft$ \D rQ, whose daughter art thou? 
Exod. xxiv. 23. 

§ 60.— MODE OF EXPRESSING THE PRONOUNS FOR WHICH PROPER 
FORMS ARE WANTING IN THE CHALDEE. 

The reflexive pronouns myself, thyself, himself are ex- (227.) 
pressed (1) by the passive conjugations, the characteristic 
of which, 21K, denotes the reflexive self; (2) by the pro- 
nouns as suffixes of nouns or prepositions, e.g. frjjpjj F^?/, 
to her husband with herself Gen. iii. 6; (3) or, finally, by a 
circumlocution with some substantive, such as $9.J, e.g. 
^53 "It?, guard thy soid, i. e. thyself, Deut. iv. 9. 

The personal or demonstrative pronoun is sometimes (228.) 
omitted before ^1, but sometimes it is expressed by the in- 
terrogative \0, e.g. /§? ts7 ^'15, he who shall not fall down, 
Dan. iii. 6. The meaning of ^~]P, however, in this and 
similar passages is rather whosoever. Each, every one, with 
reference to a person, is expressed by "D3, or £0£? ; some- 
times by "Dl repeated, e.g. Exod. xxxvi. 4; and similarly 
with respect to things, by the repetition of the noun ; 
with reference either to persons or things, each, every, may 
of course be expressed by 73. 

Any one, som,e one, is expressed by £0&, Jer. i. 4 2 : any- (229.) 
thing is expressed by &£|1H$, corresponding to the Hebrew 
121. None, no one, nullus, is expressed, as in Hebrew, by 

T 

Besides the mode of expressing the one — the other, by the (230.) 



78 SYNTAX. [Part III. 

repetition of the demonstrative pronoun, the same may be 
expressed by *D3 with HK, brother, or ^3£], companion, e.g. 
VTTI$ T\]?fo "Q<? 1£H§nN, they were separated the one from 
the other, Gen. xiii. 11. It may be remarked that "QH is 
applicable to things without life. 
(231.) The same, the self -same, may be expressed by the per- 
sonal or demonstrative pronoun with the Hebrew article ; 
or, if the noun be governed by a preposition, by a pronoun 
suffixed to the preposition, e. g. ^IJlH 8*133, that same man, 
Jer. xx. 4 ; 82l#&> H3, m £A# same instant, Dan. iii. 6. 



CHAPTER III. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



§ 61.— THE USE OF THE PRETERITE AND FUTURE. 

(232.) 1. The Preterite is regularly employed in reference to an 
event in past time. Hence it is the common historic tense, 
e. g. &l?2U/ TV ^ 8^3 pZJHpJ, in the beginning Jehovah created 
the heavens, Gen. i/l; th)f 12% K3 1 ?/? "I^l?^, Nebuchad- 
nezzar the King made an image, Dan. iii. 1. Its employment 
for this purpose is much more extensive in Chaldee than in 
Hebrew, for in continued narrative in Hebrew the Future 
with Vav conversive is commonly used ; but in the Chaldee 
there is no Vav conversive ; so that in continued narrative 
we find several Preterites connected by ), where there are 
Futures in the Hebrew, e. g. Gen. i. 3, 4, 5, &c. 

2. The Preterite is used for the Pluperfect, principally 



Chap. III.] SYNTAX OF THE VEEB. 79 

in dependent sentences, e. g. 12% H tt^l3J£"73ft, from all 
his work which he haft, made, Gen. ii. 2 ; "T^jn N7j?n r\V)l 7ift 
J1, afow# a^ £/z# beasts of the field which Jehovah had made, 
Gen. iii. 1. 

3. It is used as a past Subjunctive tense, principally 
after hypothetical clauses, e.g. #3 KJ52fiJ?$ XTO, yshfix 
l^jpt ]THtt ]J*T KJDJI 2/ w?<? had not delayed in this, we would 
now have returned twice, Gen. xliii. 10 ; tf^ft^ ^7, would 
that we had died! Numb. xiv. 2. See Judges, xiv. 18. 

4. The Preterite is sometimes used where we would em- 
ploy the Present, as when the condition or attribute ex- 
pressed by the verb has existed and still continues, e. g. Gen. 
iv. 9, ftjjnj K7, " I know not now, nor am I wont to know." 
In verbs expressing state or condition, the use of the Preterite 
in reference to present time is common, e.g. 1^55 W HD7 
^SN, why is thy countenance downcast ? Gen. iv. 6. Gene- 
rally speaking, when the statement does not refer to any 
particular point of time, the Preterite may be employed for 
the Present. 

Besides the regular employment of the Future in refe- ( 233.J 
rence to future time, it is used — 

1. For the Optative, e.g. Nfti^ "tltifT, may the day perish! 
Job, iii. 3. 

2. For the Imperative, principally in negative com- 
mands, e.g. 7rHJl Is?, fear thou not, Gen. xlvi. 3. 

3. When something conditional or potential is implied, 
that is, where we use the auxiliaries may, can, might, should, 
&c., e.g. /3\ft, thou may est eat, Gen. ii. 16 ; DiniK K7 NJ& 
rTO? 7J7, should I not spare Nineveh? Jon. iv. 11. 

4. For the Subjunctive after particles implying that, so 
that, &c, ]JW ]Q\ "% that he would give time, Dan. ii. 16. This 
is common with the copulative 1 which in Chaldee, as in 



80 SYNTAX. [Part III. 

Hebrew, frequently marks the end or object. See Gen. 
xxvii. 4 ; Exod. v. 1. 

( 234.) Rem — In the later Targums we find a strange kind of Pluperfect and 
Imperfect, formed by prefixing the Preterite of Win to the Preterite of the 
verb, e. g. nTftn N"irn TIMl, Eve who had desired, Gen. iv. 1 (Jon.). This 
occurs generally in relative sentences. 



§ 62.— USE OF THE IMPERATIVE AND INFINITIVE. 

235 \ Sometimes we find two Imperatives joined by the co- 
pulative I, the first containing an exhortation, and the se- 
cond a consequence of obeying it. In such a case the 
second may be translated as a Future, e.g. I/D^f^l 1T3J7 &H, 
this do ye, and be saved, i. e. and ye shall be saved, Gen. 
xlii. 18. 
( 236.) Th e construction of the Infinitive with prepositions is 
sometimes found in the Chaldee, e.g. D*l# ]1%ft ^HUTOJ, 
in his coming from Padan Aram, i. e. when he came, Gen. 
xxxiii. 18. Most frequently, however, when this construc- 
tion occurs in the Hebrew, the sense is expressed in Chal- 
dee by the finite verb with some conjunction, as it would 
be in our language : thus, Gen. ii. 4, for D&^QH^ in 

00 i 7 t : it • : 

the Hebrew, we find in Onkelos 18^3 W ^?? *• e - when they 
were created. 

When an Infinitive is governed by a verb implying 
power, command, or purpose, it has usually 7 prefixed; 
n^nnb hzv, he will be able to show, Dan. ii. 10: m^nb IBK, 

TT -I - : - 7 7 7 T T : - _; } 

he commanded to destroy, Dan. ii. 13. The same takes place 
when Infinitives are governed by nouns, e.g. £05P? )T# &7, 
it is not time to collect, Gen. xxix. 7. In both cases, and 
particularly in the latter, the 7 is sometimes omitted. Si- 
milar is the use of the Infinitive with 7 following TV8 % &7, 



(237.) 



Chap. III.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 81 

or JT7, HD, e.g. <T^n/ K7 ^j ^AicA may n#£ fo changed, 
lit. irAzcA zs not for to change, Dan. vi. 9. 

After ^Jl7, the Infinitive with 7 makes a kind of peri- (2S8.) 
phrasis of the Future, e.g. 3K?7 *^?^ ^15-j a72( ^ ^ 5wn 
was afow£ to 5^, Gen. xv. 12. 

The Infinitive is often connected with the finite verb to ( 239.) 
express intensity, certainty, or continuance of the action, e. g. 
JirnOTl J ^P^? ^7? ye shall not certainly die, Gen. iii. 4 ; 
■»3P« PTRap$, Jwz'S fm% increase, Gen. iii. 16 ; ^Bg ^COp/? 
^pl^, Joseph is surely killed, Gen. xxxvii. 33 ; 71 IT ft 75^, 
Mow mayest at all times eat, Gen. ii. 16. 

The suffix appended to an Infinitive may refer either to the subject or 
object of the action expressed by the verb. In the former case the Infini- 
tive is regarded as a noun, and takes the nominal suffixes. 



§ 63.— USE OF THE PARTICIPLE. 

The participle by itself in Chaldee is sometimes used (240.) 
for the finite verb, generally expressing the present tense, 
e. g. "lEfcO K37D njlj, the king answer eth and saith, Dan. 
ii. o. 

The participle is frequently used with the verb >1V7, in (241.) 
place of the finite verb. In this case a continuing action 
is generally denoted, e. g. Wn PITH, thou wast seeing, Dan. 
ii. 31. 

With the personal pronouns, or with rPtf, the participle ( 242.) 
is used for all times, but most frequently for the present, 
e. g. &JH2& pnttfn, we deem it necessary, Dan. ii. 16 ; ]$1 
N2tf, I will judge, Gen. xv. 14. 

When participles are followed by a noun which ex- (243.) 
presses the object of the action of the verb, a two-fold con- 
struction is allowable, the participle being either regarded 

M 



82 SYNTAX. [Part III. 

as a noun followed by a genitive, or as a part of the verb 
governing the noun in the same manner as the verb, e. g. 
jnp ^^ going out of the gate,Gen.xK^v. 24; pPP§*]| jOnS, 
spreading their wings, Exod. xxv. 20. Neither mode of 
construction is confined to active participles. 

§ 64 EXPRESSION OF THE OPTATIVE. 

(244.) We have seen (233, 1) that the Future is used to 
express the Optative. It may also be expressed by cer- 
tain forms of circumlocution, e. g. (a) by an interroga- 
tive pronoun, with a verb in the third person, e.g. ^JD] ]? 
^5H? O would that I were made judge! lit. who will make me 
judge? II. Sam. xv. 4.* Like the phrase |FP ^/? in Hebrew, 
1C! IP is used to express the Optative, and that in cases 
where the verb }J13 does not seem to be quite applicable, 
e. g. &£*/?*] ]JT ]ft, would that it were evening, Deut. 
xxviii. 67. (&) By the interjection ^, e. g. NJflP'l ^ 
would that we had died, Numb. xx. 3. 

§ 65.— NUMBER AND PERSON OF THE VERB. 

( 245.) To the general rule, that the verb agrees with its sub- 
ject in gender and number, some exceptions occur : 
(a) Thus masculine forms (being those of most common 
use) are sometimes employed in reference to feminine sub- 
jects, e. g. TQJ/1T; tih KTSjHw, no work shall be done, Exod. 
xii. 16. (b) Plural verbs may be used with singular col- 
lective nouns, e. g. ftjttj "/3 pm^, all the sheep will die, Gen. 
xxxiii. 13. The case is similar when the nominative to a 

* For an instance of a similar circumlocution for the Optative in Latin, 
see Virgil, Georg. II., 488, 489. 



Chap. III.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 83 

plural verb is implied in a previous collective noun, e. g. 
120/tp^ .... tft^Jtf T3J73, let us make man, .... and let them 
rule, Gen. i. 26. 

The third person sing. masc. or fern, is sometimes em- (246.) 
ployed impersonally, e. g. IH? T\*pJl, David was distressed: 
lit. it was anxious with David, I. Sam. xxx. 6. 

The indeterminate third person (corresponding to the (247.) 
English one or they ; German, man; French, on) is expressed 
in Chaldee (a) most frequently by the third person masc. 
plur., e. g. Vrnrirn htiffl pTJIfT Vb n, tAa* Daniel and his 
companions should not be destroyed; lit. that they should not 
destroy Daniel, &c, Dan. ii. 18. (b) By the third person 
sing., e. g. TO£> tOJ?, $0 name of it was called, Gen. xi. 9. 
(c) By the second person sing. 

It is very common to find in Chaldee a passive verb fol- (248.) 
lowed by an accusative of the noun, which is the subject of 
the action, and which, therefore, we might expect to find in 
the nominative, e. g. TTJ7 JV ^i:r6 T^JINI, and to Enoch 
was born Irad, Gen. iv. 18; IfoK ^bstfB Yp HpTl 1 ? Kjn^l, 
awd the words of ' Bebekah were told to Esau, Gen. xxvii. 42. 

Grammarians usually explain this construction by stating that the pas- 
sive in such cases is to be regarded as an impersonal active. 

When several substantives connected by and have a (249.) 
common predicate, it sometimes is in the singular, parti- 
cularly when it stands before the nouns, but more fre- 
quently in the plural. See Exod. xxi. 4 ; Gen. xl. 1 (Jon.). 



§ 66.— REGIMEN OF VERBS. 

We find in Chaldee many verbs governing the accusa- (250.) 
tive, which, according to the analogy of other languages, 



84 SYNTAX. [Part III. 

we would expect from their meaning to be followed by- 
other cases.* Such are 2^N, to reply to, to answer; JHJ7, to 
happen to, to befall ; *7j??, to command ; )^n, to trust ; £*7?^, 
to serve; "15?, to fo^f good tidings to," i.e. to gladden with 
good tidings. 

( 251.) Verbs implyingfulness or «?#rt£, such as #3P, to 6<? satiated; 
J?3&>, the same; fr^P, and its reflexive, ^9tfK, to be filled ; 
&*D"!> &> swarm with; "IS?', to overflow with; "IDH, to fo tfc- 
ficient in, to want, also, contrary to analogy, take an accusa- 
tive case of that in respect of which the fulness or want 
exists. 

(252.) In the following cases verbs govern two accusatives: — 

1. Yerbs which in Pehal govern one accusative, in the 
causative conjugations, Pahel and Aphel, govern two, e. g. 
I^EH |in]T P!T]p, thou shalt gird on them girdles, Exod. 
xxix. 9; K^/H ^3V7^^P, you will make known the dream 
to me, Dan. ii. 5. 

2. Yerbs signifying to clothe or cover one with anything 
(Exod. xxxiv. 24) ; to do one any service or injury (Gen. 
xxx. 29) ; of asking anything of any one (Deut. xiv. 26) ; 
of making one something (Exod. xxx. 25) also govern two 
accusatives. 

( 253.) Some verbs are followed by a dative, contrary to what 
analogy would lead us to expect, e. g. &^!p, to call, to give a 
name to; pt^J, to kiss; 7K£p, to inquire of, ask. Passive verbs 
are followed by the dative of the person or thing from 
which the effect proceeds, e. g. ]*\j7 TDJt/JV, it shall be done 
by you, Exod. xii. 16. 

* According to the analogy of the Greek and Latin, these verbs would 
be followed by some other case than the accusative, but they can all be 
rendered by verbs which in English would govern the accusative. 



Chap.III.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 85 



§ 67.— USE OF PREPOSITIONS WITH VERBS. 

What prepositions are employed in connexion with 
verbs is in general to be ascertained from the Lexicons. 
The following rules may be useful to guide the student : — 

The preposition 3 follows verbs of seizing, holding, e. g. (254.) 
P?H ; verbs of acknowledgment, disowning, e. g. 1?? ; verbs 
signifying to look upon, to hearken to, to smell to, e.g. &TH, 
Vftti), JTH ; verbs signifying to invoke, to call upon, e.g. ^v¥ ; 
to ride over, e. g. C07Sp ; after verbs of eating or drinking, 3 
is joined to the noun, signifying the cup or dish (Dan. 
v. 2). 

The preposition 7 follows verbs signifying to make one (255.) 
anything, to become anything, e.g. ]0J, &W; see Jer. ix. 11, 
Gen. ii. 24. 

Verbs implying mental emotions, e. g. DHH, to pity ; (256.) 
**"JD, to rejoice; "1P3, to despise; D1H, to have mercy, are fol- 
lowed by /V in connexion with the object towards which 
the emotion is felt. "Tj?.?, to command, is followed by IV , 
with the person upon whom the command is laid. 

The preposition ]D follows not only verbs signifying to (257.) 
flee from, but those of kindred signification, such as to fear, 
to beware of, to abstain from. ]0 is also used with verbs 
signifying fulness, emptiness, &c, in connexion with the 
noun in respect of which the fulness, emptiness, &c, exists. 
The preposition "1£3 is naturally used with verbs signify- 
ing to follow' after, pursue, &c. 

§ 68.— VERBS USED FOR ADVERBS. 

Sometimes a verb placed before another qualities its (258.) 
meaning as an adverb. Thus, once more is expressed by 



86 SYNTAX. [Part III. 

FppiN, to add; well by inpiN, to make good; first by D^P, to 
cause to precede; much or greatly by ^P&, to make much or 
great. These verbs are generally followed by the infinitive 
of the verb whose meaning they qualify : e. g. ^Difi x? 
ft/^D W^?, it shall n o more give its strength, Gen. iv. 12. 
^£^3 b'xVD) W^P-Q, saluting thee first, Gen. xlix. 8. 
|^3 *73#97 MP#j ^ hath done much wickedness, Joel, ii. 
20. Sometimes the two verbs are joined by the copula- 
tive, e. g. npni pHVI nni, aTza 7 Isaac digged again, lit. re- 
tumed and digged, Gen. xxvi. 18. 

§ 69.— ELLIPSIS, CONSTRUCTIO PXjEGNANS. 

( 259.) The most common kind of ellipsis is when the substan- 
tive verb is omitted, e. g. 1^^^Sp^3 H5?^ "H, whose name 
(was) Belteshazzar, Dan. ii. 26. The use of the participle 
for the finite verb (240) is to be thus explained. In general 
the mode of supplying an ellipsis in any particular case 
readily presents itself. 

( 260.) The pregnant construction takes place when a verb stands 
in a construction to which its meaning is not strictly 
suitable, and another verb must be supplied, connected in 
the writer's mind with the verbal idea that is expressed ; 
e.g. iT'TinY 133 ^1-^ 1'"J??£\ the men wondered each to his 
fellow, i. e. wondered {and looked or spoke) each, &c, Gen. 
xlii. 33. 



Chap. IV.] SYNTAX OF THE PARTICLES. 87 



CHAPTER IV. 

SYNTAX OE THE PARTICLES. 



§ 70— OF WORDS EXPRESSING NEGATION. 

The negative particle K7 (written in one place, Dan. (261.; 
iv. 32, iT7) is the same as the Hebrew K7, and, like it, ex- 
presses unconditional negation. JT7 differs from it, as ]^ 
differs from &7 in Hebrew, by including in it the verb sub- 
stantive, thus signifying there is not. Hence, it is often 
found with personal pronouns, and with participles, e. g. 
yfT 818 TV?, Twill not give, Exod. v. 10. 

The use of ]8, or DK, if, as a negative particle, is derived (262.) 
from its employment in oaths, the adjuration being men- 
tally supplied, e.g. 2B8 *08, I will not take, Gen. xiv. 23, 
where the speaker is supposed to imprecate on himself some 
calamity if he would take. 

§ 71— OF ADVERBS REPEATED, OF INTERROGATIVE PARTICLES, &c. 

The repetition of adverbs sometimes denotes intensity, (263.) 
87Tr? 81^, very greatly, and sometimes continuation, e. g. 
^Xj "l^t, by little and little. 

The prefix H is the usual mark of an interrogation, but (264.) 
this particle is not always employed, and that a sentence 
is interrogative is sometimes to be ascertained only from 
the context, e. g. 1^# *H3 p?. $8, art thou my son Esau? 
Gen. xxvi. 24. 

The disjunctive form of question (whether — or) may be (265.) 
expressed by DN — /I ; e. g. 8^2 DN *W SOpIl, whether it 
be good or bad, Num. xiii. 20. 



88 



A — Paradigm of the 





PEHAL. 


ITHPEHAL. 


PAHEL. 


Fret. 3 m. 


^PP 


bapns 


^12 


3 / 


^bap 


nbapns 


nbap 


2 m. 


nbap 


" nbapnw 


nbap, wnbap 


2 /• 


flbap 


nbapriH 


J^P 


1 e. 


nbap 


nbapna 


nbap 


Plur. 3 m. 


=ibap 


•nbapn« 

i • : • 


sibap 


3 /■ 


Nbap 


MbapnM 

t - '; : • 


«bap 


2 m. 


pnbap 


pittbapna 


pnbap 


2 /. 


^nbap 


Jfibaprw 


V&&B. 


1 c. 


ssbap 

t : - ' : 


wabapn« 

t ; - ': : • 


ssbap 


Infin. 


b^p^ 


wbapriN 

t t ': : • 


sbap 

T T '- 


Imp. 2 m. 


^?P 


b^p™ 


bap 


2 /• 


^bap 


•bap™ 


>bap 


P/wr. 2 w. 


s»bap 


sibap™ 


sib^rT. 


2 /• 


«abap 


Nabaprw 

t i - ': : • 


«abap 

T : •• '- 


i^. 3 m. 


bap"] 


^QP.t?. 


^P' 


3 /• 


bapn 


bapnj-i 


bapfl 


2 m. 


bapi-i 


baprvi 


^(2^ 


2 /• 


pbapn 


pbapnn 


rb^pn 


1 0. 


baps 


bapnw 


^ps 


Plur. 3 #&. 


pbap"; 


ftbagrp 


vfo®m 


3 / 


jbap* 

' t : ': * 


jbapm 


ty&\ 


2 m. 


^bapi-i 


1-ibapnn 


t^bapn 


2 /• 


jbap^i 


jbapnjq 


?>fcp? 


1 c. 


bapa 


bapna 


bapa 


1 m. 


bap 


bapna 


baps 


1 P<*r£ 


sbap 

t :i't 


wbapna 

t ; '- : • 


Mbapa 

t - ~ : 


( m. 


Vap 




bapa 


2 PartA 

\ f. 


sb^ap 




Mbapa 



Regular Verb, §§ 11- 


13. 


89 


ITHPAHAL. 


APHEL. 


ITTAPHAL. 


bapriN 


^&1?N 


b^pn« 


nbtspnw 


nbtpps 


nbtppnw 


nbrspriN 


nb^pw, anbips 


nb&pns 


tfbtep™ 


ttbfcps 


nbtspriN 


nbtspnw 


nbttps 


nbtppjjiw 


^btapriN 


^bips 


^ibttpnw 


«bipn« 

t t '- : • 


«b£p« 


sb&pnN 

t t ': - • 


Vinb^pnw 


pnbtpps 


^nb&p™ 


jnbtepriN 


^b&ps 


irib^pn« 


NjbtepriN 




sabipns 


sbtapns 

t t '- : • 


sbtppK 


wbtDpnw 

t t ': - • 


btapns 


^i?*? 


b&p™ 


^btepris 


^b^ps 


^b&pj-iM 


^bfcpnN 


•ib&ps 


^b^pn« 


ssbipriN 


Nab&pN 

t : ■• ': - 


Nsbfcp™ 


btepn? 


^i?- 


^fcp^ 


btepnn 


btspn 


bbpnj-i 


btepnn 


^i?fi 


b&pnn 


■pbtepnn 


pbtDpn 


pbftpnn 


btapns 


bpps 


b&p™ 


^btaprp 


l-^&i?! 


l-ibtpprv 


jbtepm 

' t : '- : • 


fr?i£ 


tbtpprp 


pibtapnn 


I^btopfl 


^bbptti-i 


fbtep™ 


ibtppn 


ibaprin 


bfcprn 


bt?P5 


bfcpna 

-': t • 

bttpnz? 


btepnxp 


btapa 


sbtap™ 

t : I_ : • 


sbtapB 

t : ': - 


«btabna 

t : ': - • 




^P*? 






Nbtsptt 

t : ': - 





N 



90 B — The Regular Verb in Pehal, with Suffixes, §§ 


16,17. 


Suffixes. 


Preterite. 


Suffixes. 


Future. 


3 masc. sing. 


3 w^stf. ^>kr. 


3 masc. sing. 


3 m«sc. ^*r. 


1 c. sing. 

2 m. sing. 

3 m. sing. 

2 m. plur. 

3 m. plur. 

1 c. \sing. 

2 m. sing. 

3 m. sing. 

2 m. plur. 

3 m. plur. 

1 c. sing. 
3 m. sing. 
3 m. plur. 

1 c. sing. 
3 m. sing. 
3 m. plur. 

2 m. sing. 

3 m. sing. 

2 m. plur. 

3 m. plur. 


nbtpp 


^btpp 

^nnb&p 

p^btop 


1 0. sm^/. 

2 m. sing. 

3 m. sm^r. 

2 m. plur. 

3 w. jp?«r. 

1 e. swy. 
3 m. sing. 
1 c. ^?wr. 
3 m. plur. 

1 C. «?f^. 

3 m. sing. 
3 m. plur. 

1 £. SWf 

2 m. sing. 

3 m. swa^. 

2 w. j#/wr. 

3 w. plur. 


' '■aabtofp 
l-iabtpiT 


^bta,T 
nn-ib^p^ 


3 /m. swy. 


3 /m. ^>^r. 


Imperative. 


vpribtap 

nrnb&p 
fbnbtap 
ftofibfcp 


?J>£p 

>nbtsp 

• t : '- 

f^p 

r^btpp 


1 

2 m#s£. swf 2 masc. plur. 


nb&p 

H2btop 

t : ••. ' : 


^bjpp 
^rnbtpp 

N^btsp 
1-^b^p 


2 m#s0. sing. 


2 masc. plur 


\?nbpp 

nnb&p 

j-ianbfcp 


PTDJinb^p 
jiovib&p 


2 fem. sing. 2 fem, plur. 


•^bpp 
>n>btpp 


•oabtap 
•™b&p 


2 fem. sing. 








Infinitive. 


1 com. sing. 


1 com. ^?/wr. 


•♦bfcpB 


^fib&p 

nnb&p 
p^nb^p 
^anb&p 


"n?Vfcp 

^njbpp 

t: - : | 


rob 
i^b* 
finbl 


PP.Q 
s?p» 

r>PP 
3pS 



C — Paradigm of Verbs IS, § 20. 



91 





PEHAL. 


APHEL. 


ITTAPHAL. 


Pret. 3 til. 


P23 


P??« 


p2n« 




3 /• 


nj2M 


np2« 


npQJHN 




2 m. 


ripb 


£P!?n 


npsnw 

t ' : — • 




2 /• 


fli??? 


^ps« 


npsns 




1 e. 


njTQa 


n P£N 


npsns 




Plur. 3 m. 


!JpD3 


^psw 


^Pinw 




3 /• 


M|JM 


«jj|« 


MperiM 

't • 




2 nt. 


IVlpM 


JVlpBH 


^np2n« 




2 /• 


WlTS 


WP|N 


?npQn« 




1 c. 


s^pb 

t'.j - : 


«3pSM 


fcOpBflN 




Infin. 


P?9 


«p2« 

■tt - 


wj7Qn« 




Imp. 2 m. 


Pli P§ 


P??« 


psn« 




2 / 


•»pa 


S P?« 


^pfriM 




Plur. 2 til. 


sips, S|pB 


JlpBN 


^panM 




2 /• 


S3p2 * 

t': >. 


NJpSN 


S2pfnS 




. Fut. 3 tii. 


pS> ? pQ> 


P.?_ 


psn^ 




3 /• 


pan, psfi 


P??J? 


psttn 




2 02. 


pen, pan 


P??^ 


psnn 




2 /• 


rpari 


ri??n 


t^sAn 




1 c. 


pBN, p5M 


pas 


P?™ 




PZwr. 3 m. 


W* 


l-Pf. 


tnpsrr 




3 /• 


l&f. 


ll?f- 


1I??W 




2 til. 


ppan 


^5P 


^psnn 




2 / 


jjjan 


1P T ^ . 


"t: - • 




1 c. 


P??> RSI 


P.?3 


P3^3 




1 m. 

1 iVtf.J 


pD3 
i .. T 

SPD3 

't ;It 


PS 1 ? 
HpSE 

't : - 






( til. 

2 Part. 

\ f. 


p^M 
S,TD2 


PrP 





92 



Paradigm D— Contracted Verbs yy, § 21 





Pehal. 


Aphel. 


Tttaphal. 


Pret. 3 m. 


P?. 


P?W 


p^w 


3 /• 


njn 


npro 


npWM 


2 m. 


np^, sjnp^ 


^p™ 


np^ns 


2 /■ 


ripl 


flPW 


np^ns 


1 c. 


n iTI 


A*™ 


np^nM 


Plur. 3 m. 


^ 


sip'TO 


!)p^n« 


3 / 


H,TT 


MpTO 

't ■■- 


HjTTfiH 


2 m. 


propi 


J-TfiplH 


innyw™ 


2 /• 


WP1 


WiTfM 


jflprra 


1 c. 


«?P1 


w?P?w 


HJpTON 


Infin. 


PI? 


H|7W 


WJJWM 


Imp. 2 w. 


P^T 


p^s 


p^ns 


2 /• 


s R*r 


••pw 


'p?™ 


Plur. 2 m. 


V* 


^TTH 


sipTOM 


2 / 


w$t 


K3p?TN 


Njp^nw 


Fut. 3 w. 


PT 


PT. 


P^l 


3 /. 


pv?n 


p*w 


pwn 


2 m. 


p'^n 


P™ 


p^nn 


2 /• 


rp^ 


ri™ 


^P^rin 


1 c. 


p'^TM 


p® 


P^fr? ' 


Plur. 3 m. 


ppT 


ftw 


ppW 


3 / 


w??? 


?!?T. 


jjwp 


2 m. 


flpw 


ppy 


l-p^nn 


2 / 


«r«? 


IFTfi 


«EW» 


1 c. 


P%3 


P5 


PW? 


1 Part. 


W23 

't':It 


PTO 
«5W 


pwa 
Npwn 

't : - • 


2 PflT*. 

1 /• 


P^JH 


P!P 

«P T ^P 





Paradigm E — Feeble Veebs ''B, § 22. 



93 



Verbs IS. 


Yeebs >S. 


Pettat,. 


Pret. 3 m. sing. lb) 

3 / sing. mb\ 

1 c. sing. fT-fb^, &c. 

Imp. 2 m. sing, lb, VI, 2H 

Inf. tV»H 

p?^. 3 w. «%. nb^, ib? 


, reg. 




Ithpehal. 


P/*^. 3 m. sing. "T^ns, Tby"lN 




Pahel. 


Pret. 3 w. siw^. "tV 
Fat. 3 w. ««%. -rb^, iby] 


^1 


Itegpahal. 


Pref. 3 w. sing. *fb\nH 


nE\nw 


Aphel. 


P/-^. 3 m. sing. Tbis 
P^. 3 m. sing. Tbt», Snfrp 




a-Hbv; 



94 



Paradigm F- 





PEHAL. 


ITHPEHAX. 


PAHEL. 


ITHPAHAL. 


Pret. 3 m. 


°5 


npns 

't : • 


&\2 


DffinM 


3/- 


™|J 


TOpn« 


™2*P 


np^pns 


2 m. 


??>?' ??i? 


napM« 

t ; 't : • 


f«¥!B 


fifcg?n« 


2/ 


F?i? 


^»5^i« 


np*p 


na*pn« 


1 c. 


™?i? 


M?lJflM 


fiP*B 


™%™ 


Plur. 3 m. 


.153,7 


sftajjriM 


w.P 


^pris 


3/- 


«g? 


M ?i7™ 


w?*B 


N&3?nH • 


2 w. 


f-vi&p, 7^np|7 


ivifcjjj-w 


]Vl&»p 


)vna?pnM 


2/. 


jriBp, ]^pj7 


?n^ns 


?jnp*p 


^p. s jinN 


1 e. 


HJ&jJ, «2nj? 


saajjn« 


M3to;p 


waa?pnM 


Infin. 


(taps) qgD 


t't : • 


T T - 


«ajpri« 


Imp. 2 w. 


tap 


Dpnw 

t : • 


Q !!B 


D?pfW 


2/ 


^P 


^»pns 

' t ; ' 


"»ajl2 


^pilpns ■ 


i^r. 2 w. 


iMp 


•IBjJtfH 


^.1B 


^prw 


2/ 


Mawip 

t : ' 


NDttpttN 

t : 't : • 


sap^p 


fcoo»priM 


Fut. 3 m. 


DS|,T 


Dprr> 

't ; • 


d;p , » 


B-BC 1 "! 


3/- 


fisjpn 


Dpnn 

't : • 


0^121^ 


D»pnn 


2 m. 


rapn 


npnn 

't : • 


D»i2ri 


D*pnn 


2/ 


rw-p 


r^jj^-T 1 


rp*ptt 


r^p™ 


1 0. 


EflpN 


npnM 

't : • 


D»pM 


&320? 


P/wr. 3 m. 


f^p: 


VIBjJIT 


^37! 


1-wpri; 


3/ 


JMpJ 


W 


??;b! 


?»32™ 


2 w&. 


?«pn 


I^j^nn 


jwpn 


l^pnn 


2/ 


iwipn 


l?i?pfi 


7B»pn 


1932™? 


1 tf. 


mpa 


Dpna 

t : • 


Djpa 


Q 32™ 


( m. 


D\*7, DMp 

•'t •• 't 


Dpn» 


Q 329 


E*P™ 


1 Part.] 


t :'t 


NEpriE 

t 't : • 


N»*p» 

t :'- : 


sa^priD 

t :'- : • 


( m. 
2 Part. \ 


^1? 

Htt'p 

T '■ 




KE^PP 





Feeble Verbs, "IS, § 25. 



95 





APHEL. 


ITTAPHAL. 


POLEL. 


ITHPOLAL. 




C(?« 


a^pnw 


ba'ip 


opipnN 




na^ps, na^pN 


ra>pn« 


npaip 


napipns 




na^pH, na^pN 


np^pn« 


naaip 


riaaipnH 




jwph 


ripens 


naaip 


f-iaa'ip™ 




na^ps, na^ps 


na^pfiN 


naaip 


naaip™ 




y&\# 


•la^pnw 


Jiaaip 


•lapipns 




«^p« 

t '• -; 


sa^pris 


Naaip 


saa'ip™ 

t ~ ' : ■ 




I'V^pN 


^na^ns 


1-vipaip 


jviaaipns 




jriapN 


jrip^pnw 


jripaip 


jnapip™ 




SDapH 


wa^p™ 

t : • : : 


Naaahp 

t : - ' 


saaaip™ 




«D|7« 


NOiTTlN 


saaip 


waaipns 

t t ' : • 




D^pM 


n^pns 


aaip 


DpipnM 




^pN 


^pjfiN 


•»aaip 


•^aaipriH 




•WpN 


^p^H 


^aa'np 


siaaipnw 




N2ppM 


«2»^pn« 


wapaip 


Haaphpnw 




^l?? 


a>pn? 


e^PI 


aaiprn 




c^pn 


D^pnn 


aaipn 


apipnn 




trpn 


D^pnri 


aaipn 


aaipnn 




r^pn 


^n^pnn 


ppaipn 


fapipnn 




n^ps 


D^priM 


□pips 


aaipns 




]-i^p> 


1-wpjr 


^apip? 


^apipn? 




19^ 


1?W 


19?ipJ 


fapiprp 




7-ia^pn 


l^pnn 


^aaip^ 


7-iapipnj-i 




la^pn 


lO^pJVl 


?apipn 


jaaipnn 




E'i?? 


D^pnp 


Dfiipa 


aaipn? 




D^pp 


n^p/np 


cpipp 


aahpnp 




sa^pa 


sa>pnp 


saaipa 

t : : 


waaipna 

t : ' : • 


apa 

't : 




apipp 






Nafja 




Naa'ipa 

t : ' : 





96 






Paradigm G — 




PEHAL. 


ITHPEHAL. 


PAHEL. 


Pret. 3 m. 


•» v- •»- sba 


ftariM 


^a 


3 /■ 


nba 


n*bariN 


nw\_ n>ba 


2 m. 


n\J rvba 


irbarw 

t •• .- ; • 


rpba 

T • ~ 


2 /• 


J??— rift? 


nftanw 


/rba 


1 a. 


vpJ' rrba 


>/rbariN 


*0 V n^ba 


Plur. 3 m. 


ft? 


•Wbarw 


sw_l ^Vl 


3 /• 


n«ba 


s»baVis 


s*ba 

T • " 


2 m. 


?*trpba 


^rpbans 


(b) liimVa 


2/ 


jrnba 


?/rbaris 


(>) irrta 


1 e. 


t •• : 


Hasans 

t •• : : • 


4) «?ft? 


Infin. 


s>_ «_ sba^ 

t : t •• : • 


nsbans 

t t : : ■ 


nsba 

T T - 


Imp. 2 m. 


V «^- ^ba 


s_ >banw 


«_ ^ba 


2 /• 


■l, sba 


sbariN 


sba 

T ~ 


P/wr. 2 m. 


ft? 


ibans 


•fta 


2 / 


iba MHba 

' t : t t : 


sabans 

it:: • 


S3v>2 

T T ~ 


PW. 3 m. 


■»-_, «b;> 


«_ ftary 


«_ ^ba> 


3 /• 


n 1 ?^ - 


^bann 


^bari 


2 m. 


sban 


^bann 


^ban 


2 /• 


rV?p 


Vbann 


^ban 


1 <?. 


abas 


^bans 


>bas 


P/wr. 3 m. 


)ib^ 


pbarr 


vfo* 


3 /• 


't : : ■ 


rbarp 

' T : - -• • 


pba> 

' Tt - : 


2 m. 


jiban 


pbann 


?iban 


2 /• 


tftan 


rbann 

't : - : • 


rban 


1 *. 


sbaa 


^bana 


*g 


( m. 


*_ sba 


s_ >ba™ 


s_ *>ba_p 


1 iW. 

1 / 


w^ba 

t : t 


H^barup 


«>baza 

t ! ~ : 


( m. 


•»-, «ba 




"*%?? 


2 i«. 


*oba 

t : - 




«>ba& 

T! - : 



Verbs VO, §§ 26, 27. 




97 


Ithpahal. 


Aphel. 


Ittaphal. 


"bans 


"ba« 


"bans 


njbans 


n"_ba« 


ns^_ n"bans 


n"bans 


n\_ n"L n"bas 


n"ban« 


n"bans 


n"bas 


n"bans 


vrbans 


\rC n"bas 


n"ban« 


vbans 


nw»4- ^V?^ 


vbans 


nN»bans 


s*bas 


a^bans 

t * : — • 


j*in"banH 


iwbas 


jvrbanw 


in"ba™ 


tf?b?N 


?n"bans 


N^banN 

t • - ; • 


«a"baN 

t • : - 


«a"bin« 


nsba™ 

t t - : • 


n«bas 

t t : - 


nsbans 

t t : - • 


s_ "bans 


s_ "bas 


«_ "b^ns 


sbanH 

t- : • 


«ba« 


sban« 


"fens 


ibas 


ibans 


wabariM 

t t - : • 


wa"bas 

t ■• ; - 


sa"banw 

t •• : - • 


s_ "ban" 


«_ "ba? 


«_ "ban". 


"bann 


"ban 


^nn 


"bann 


"ban 


"bann 


pbann 


pban 


pbann 


"bans 


"baw 


"bans 


pban" 


P^l 


fbixp. 


•pbar." 

t : - : • 


pba^ 


?"ban" 

't : : - 


pbann 


fiban 


libann 


rbsnn 

■t : - ; • 


)tyn 


rbann 

t : : - • 


^bana 


*Z& 


"ban? 


"bam 


ML "ba^ 


sbanp 


H"banB 

t: - : • 


N"ban 

t ; : - 


N"bans 

t : : - • 




"ban 






N"batt 

t : : " 





ANALYSIS 



TEXT OF THE CHALDEE PORTION 



BOOK OF DANIEL 



As some references are made in the Analysis to the Philologia Sacra of 
Glassins, it may be necessary to mention that the edition used was that 
by Dathe, Lipsia, 1776. The references to Hengstenberg are to the 
translation in Clarke's Foreign Theological Library of Yol. I. of his Bei- 
trage %ur JEirileitung iris alte Testament. The letters E. Y. are employed 
to denote the Authorized English Yersion of the Bible, 



ANALY.SIS. 



CHAPTER II. 

1 — Yer. 4. . NSbft, ling ; emph. of m. n., "-jbtt, i. q. Hebr. ; in the Tar- 
gums, "-jbfc : Gr. (139). The emphatic state is employed as usual for the 
vocative: Gr. (196). Plur. ahs. ^sbB, emph. N'obft. 

2. I^pbv'b, for ever, in scecula ; comp. of prep, b, and ^ftb^, plur. of 
m. n. nb3J, i.q. Hebr. abfa. Emph. plur. «^b2J." See Parad. 2 of masc. 
nouns. 

3. **n, live; 2 m. sing, imper. Pehal from jTn or N^n, i. q. Hebr. JTn : 
Gr. (91). Live for ever was the usual mode of saluting kings in Eastern 
nations. See iii. 9 ; v. 10 ; vi. 7, 22. Nehem. ii. 3. 

4. "llQM, teW*' in pause, 1K)M; 2 m. sing, imper. Pehal from n^S, i.q. 
Hebr. 1»M. 

~ T 

5. Nftbn, the dream ; emph. of m. n. obn, i. q. Hebr. Dibn. With 
suff. of 2 m. sing. Tjftbn, ver. 28. With suff. of 1 sing, ^bn, iv. 9 (6). 
Plur. abs. pfcbn. 

6. TyH^b, to thy servants; comp. of prep, b, plur. of m. n. "Q?k *- <!• 
Hebr. "D?* see Parad. IV. of masc. nouns, and suffix of 2 m. sing., which 
displaces the termination of the plur. of the noun. 

7. Mia?B«1, and the interpretation; comp. of the conjunction "1, which has 
the form *l before the labial, and N*">E?2 emph. of m. n. IttJS, derived from 
"itPB, i. q. Hebr. "lfiS, to explain, interpret. We have the same noun with 
the suffix of 3 m. sing. JTTttfQ, verses 5, 6. The emph. form with the termi- 
nation H for S , and with the conj . "1, mtt^Q 5 !, occurs, ver. 7. 

8. n-TT3, we will show ; 1 plur. fut. Pahel of HIH, i. q. Hebr. nin, 
which is not used in Pehal, and in Pahel signifies to declare. See Parad. G. 
The Hebr. nin is not found in Kal. The primary meaning of the word 



102 ANALYSIS. [II. 5. 

is to breathe, and from thence comes the signification of the Pihel inHebr., 
and of the Pahel in Chald., to breathe out, to declare. n-inSl 1 sing. fut. 
Pahel occurs ver. 24. 

9. — Yer. 5. /TO, answered; 1 part. Pehal of 713V, i.q. Hebr. 7TO. The 

••t *■ t-: x TT 

part, is used for the pret., Gr. (240). The plur. of same, "p33>, occurs iii. 24. 

10. ")DM1, and said; 1 part. Pehal of *")£« with conj., see No. 4. Plur. 
of same with conj., ^EN"!, ver. 7. 

11. N^HtEOb, to the Chaldeans; comp. of prep, b, and emph. plur. of m. n. 
H&WD. The plur. abs. is ^M^feS, and the emph. ^STO3, which is the mar- 
ginal reading here : see Gr. (124, h). The pointing of the Kethibh would 
be H^TtEDb, an irregular form of the emph. plur., Gr. (148). The nation 
derived its name from Chesed the son of Nahor, Gen. xxii. 22. From the 
practice of astrology by the people, the noun also came to be used as an 
appellative, signifying an astrologer, or magician. 

12. nnbtt, this thing, or word; properly Hflbp, emph. of f. n. nbfc, 
which signifies a ward, or matter, like ~)21 in Hebr., or prjfia in Greek. 
The plur. is irreg. "pbp, emph. H*bp, constr. ^btt. The root is bbp, i. q. 
Hebr. T?D, signifying in Pahel to speak. See vii. 8. 

13. ^3D, from me; comp. of prep. )12, i.q. Hebr., which with suffixes 
becomes 3E, Gr. (182), and suff. of 1 sing. 

14. /TOW, (is) gone; according to Eur st an adverb signifying firm, fixed, 
but generally regarded as the fern, of 1 part. Pehal of *7TH, to go away, depart. 
Cogn. perhaps btM, same sign. If a part, the form is irregular, as if from 
the masculine form "TT M. The words 121 nnbft, which are rendered in the 
E. Y. " The thing is gone from me," i. e. the dream is forgotten by me, 
should rather be rendered, " The word is gone out from me," i. e. I have 
issued my edict, which cannot be recalled, nbp is used iii. 28, to signify 
the king's edict. The rendering of Theod. 6 Xo'ryos cnrlairi air' i/xod agrees 
with that of the E. Y. This is also the interpretation of Bertholdt ; but, 
as Rosenm. says, "neminem torquet insomnium cujus oblitus est." It 
cannot be supposed that the king had forgotten the dream which had pro- 
duced such an impression on his mind. He requires the magicians to tell 
him the dream, not because he had forgotten it, but because he desires 
that test of their being able to interpret it correctly. See Hengstenberg, 
Diss., pp. 65, et seq. 

15. in, */; part. i. q. Hebr.; when repeated, whether, or; with conj. 
fljl, ver. 6. 



II. 6.] ANALYSIS. 103 

16. wb, not; neg. part. i. q. Hebr. wb. In iv. 32, it is written Jib ; 
with interrog. J7, sbn. 

1 7. *32fl3ninn, you will make known to me ; comp. of 2 m. plnr. fat. Aphel 
of J?T, i. q. Hebr. V1\ Grr. (82, 83), and suff. of 1 sing, with a epenth., 
Gr. (69). The same word, written defectively >323ninn, occurs ver. 9. 

18. I^Sain, pieces, fragments ; plur. of m. n. DIPT, derived from Din 
to cut in pieces. 

19. f^n^rin, you shall be made; 2 m. plur fut. Ithpahal of "Q27, 
which corresponds in sign, to the Hebr. HWV ; " you shall be made pieces," 
i. e. you shall be cut in pieces, — a mode of punishment usual in Eastern 
nations. The rendering of the LXX., 'Trapadeiy/LiaTurOrjaeade, and that of 
Theod., eh a7ru}\eiav eaecGe, only express the general sense. 

20. f^.nn 1 ), and your houses ; comp. of conj., which becomes ^ before 
the labial, the plur. of m. n. iT2, i. q. Hebr., and the suff. of 2 m. plur. 
Constr. sing. iTSj emph. HTPSi; with suff. of 3 m. sing. FtfT?Sl; plur. abs. 

21. ^bia, a dunghill ; m. n. derived from bia, to pollute. 

22. JTOfewn^ shall he made ; 3 m. plur. fat. Ithpehal of UW, i. q. Hebr. 
See Parad. E. Eor a copious illustration of the threat of the king, see 
Havernick's note on the passage. 

23.— Yer. 6. finnfi, you will show; 2 m. plur. fut. Aphel of mn, No. 8, 
and ^ainn, show to me, 2 m. plur. imp. Aphel of same verb with suffix of 
1 sing, n^inna, we will show, 1 plur. fut. Aphel of same verb, ver. 7. 

24. prift, gifts; plur. of f. n. Ka_TO, i. q. Hebr. nanft, derived from 
?ri3, to give ; same with suff. of 2 m. sing, TjnaFltt. 

25. nST^D 1 !, and a donation; comp. of conj. and f. n. nST^a. If the 
word be Chaldee, it perhaps comes from tSta, to demand, exact. There is, 
however, this difficulty, that the preformative a would indicate that the 
word came from a Mphal form, and this conjugation does not exist in 
Chaldee. It has also been derived from TT2, to spoil. Buxtorf's suggestion 
that it may be derived from T^Sl or HT22, to despise, "nam. largitiones pro- 
fusiores sunt quidem despectus bonorum," seems absurd. Some have thought 
that the word is the Greek vofiiapa, with respect to which opinion see 
Hengstenberg, Diss., p. 11. It is, after all, most probably a word of 
Persian origin. The plur. with conj. and suff. of 2 m. sing., TyiTSTSa-'l 
occurs v. 17. 

26. ip^l, and honour; comp. of conj. and m. n. "lp^; emph. S~ip\ 



104 ANALYSIS. [II. 7, 8. 

The Hebr. verb 1p* signifies to be heavy, valuable, honoured. Comp, Latin 
carus. 

27. mb, great; adj. derived from WW, i.q. Hebr. fc-Ob, to be great. 

28. "pbspJn, you shall receive; 2 m. plnr. fat. Panel from b^p, i. q. 
Hebr. *?2.p, used only in Pahel, and signifying in this conj. to receive. 
The primary sense of the verb is to be in front, and in Pahel it means pro- 
perly to meet, or receive one who is before, or coming to meet one. 

29. "Wp^fc, from me; )72 is the prep. i. q. Hebr. No. 13; Dlj? or Uip, 
i. q. Hebr. Dip, is properly a norm, signifying that which is before, the front 
part, and thence comes to be used as a prep, signifying before. s Enp"|p 
is, therefore, literally a parte anteriore mei, but the meaning is merely from 
me. It is to be noticed that the suffix here (that of 1 sing.) is of the form 
which belongs to plural nouns, Dip being always joined with suffixes of 
plur. form ; e. g. with suff. of 3 m. sing. irfifiTpj with suff. of 2 m. sing. 
TpEnp_; with suff. of 1 sing. ^Ip. The _ of suff. of 1 sing, becomes _ in 
pause. 

30. ?nb, therefore; comp. of prep. b, and the fern. pron. )71, they. The 
same compound is used as an adversative particle, nevertheless, but, unless, 
see ver. 11, 30 ; but in this sense it is, perhaps, compounded of the neg. 
part, sb and the particle )71, if, No. 15. 

31. — Ver. 7. TO, they answered; 3 m. plur. pret. Pehal of rTO, No. 9. 
See Parad. G-. 

32. il^Dri, again, a second time; adv. corresponding to Hebr. n*OE7, 
derived from 712F\, i. q. Hebr. T12W, to repeat. 

33. nafcO, let him tell; 3 m. sing. fut. Pehal of IttN, No. 4, the N 
quiescing in _, Gr. (86, a) ; with conj. "IftN^; 1EM2, 1 plur. fut. Pehal, 
ver. 36. 

34. >ni"T2^b, to his servants; comp. of prep, b, the plur. of m. n. 
-D2, No. 6, and suff. of 3 m. sing. 

35. — Ver. 8. n^yjft, of certainty, surely. 2*%\ is an adj., well-estab- 
lished, true, derived from S2 1 ), unus. in Pehal, in Pahel to speak truly. The 
expression n^_"]B, ex certo, truly, is like totc'p ]D, ver. 47. 

36. 37T, (I am) knowing, (I) know; 1 part. Pehal of 3H\ No. 17. 
Plur. TOT, v. 23. 

37. S2S, pers. pron. 1 sing. ; also written nDN. 

38. ^, that; properly the relative qui, quae, quod, i. q. Hebr. ItpN, 
like which it is used as a conj. that. It originated in the demonstrative 



II. 9.] ANALYSIS. 105 

HT. In ver. 25 it is employed, as *»3 is in Hebr., prefixed to the recta oratio; 
"he said," -oa nns^n >1, "that I have found a man." 

39. WTO, the time; emph. of m.n. fTO, time. According to some, the 
word sometimes specially denotes a year, see iv. 16 (13). The root is 
TTO, turns, a denominative from 137, prep, during, and conj. while, until, 
which comes again from JfTO, to pass away, and is properly a noun, du- 
ration ; plur. abs. fOTO, emph. S^TO. 

40. f V13N, you; pers. pron. 2 m. plur., i. q. Hebr. DiHN; also written 

41. paitt, (are) gaining, lit. "buying; m. plur. of 1 part. Pehal, from 

• : It „ 

]2T, to buy. 1^1 H3TO ^1, "that ye are gaining the time," i. e. seeking to 
gain time, seeking delay. on Kaipov i^a^opa^ere, Theod. See Ephes. v. 
16, Coloss. iv. 5. 

42. bb, properly a substantive, totality, the whole, i. q. Hebr. ; with 
Makkeph ?3. Followed by a sing, it signifies the whole, totus ; followed 
by a plur., all, omnes. With sufF. of 3 m. plur. ^rfe, all of them, vii. 19 ; 
the same with prep. 3, fiilyOSl, ii. 38. Emph. sing. Nv>5, everything, ii. 
40 : the same with prep, b, sbbb, iv. 28 (25). 

43. b'D.p, derived from b^p, Eo. 28 : a prep, over against, v. 5 ; before, 
in front of, ii. 31 ; on account of, v. 10 ; followed by ^1 it is used as a conj. 
because; ">1 b:np"b3, " on this very account, because," or "wholly because 
that." This expression has also a relative sense, "for which cause," as 
in ver. 10. The meaning "in the same way as," " quemadmodum," has 
been assigned to the expression in some places, e. g. ii 40, and vi. 10, but 
it is not clear that it has not its causal sense in these passages. The mar- 
ginal note here indicates that some copies read bnp— another form of the 
same word. 

44. JliTTn, you see; 2 m. plur. pret. Pehal (see Gr. 92) from ntn 
or Wjn, to see, i. q. Hebr. ntn. 

45. — Yer. 9. ?n *1, but if, or so if quodsi, i. q. Hebr. DS ^3 ; eav ovv, 
Theod. 

46. r\1V\, one ; fern, of the card. num. in, i. q. Hebr. ins. 

47. fc^n, this ; pron. 3 f. sing., i. q. Hebr. 

48. fi^rn, comp. of constr. of f. n. HI, and suff. of 2 m. plur. The 
word HI is also found in the later Hebr., and is, perhaps, of Persic origin. 
Its common signification, as inverses 13, 15, is a law, decree, and it is so ren- 
dered here in the E. Y. " there is but one decree for you," i. e. sentence of 

Q 



106 ANALYSIS. [II. 10. 

death. It may be better, with Michaelis, to refer it to the words immedi- 
ately following, " I pronounce the same judgment" on you all, that ye 
have sought to impose on me, JTT being taken to signify sentence, judgment. 
The objective use of the suffix is to be observed. 

49. PD-p* false, lying; fern, of ni3, adj. derived from yj3 t i. q. Hebr. 
5?3, signifying in Pahel to lie. 

50. n/TJTO-"), and corrupt; comp. of conj., and fern, of 2 part. Pehal of 
i"l?TO, i. q. Hebr. HT1W, to destroy. 

51. )W3Dtn, you have prepared; 2. m. plur. pret. Aphel of )12t, not 
used in Pehal, in Pahel to prepare. The points in the text are those of 
the Keri ] VttS'^tn, which is the pret. Ithpahal of the same verb ; see 
Gr. (8, 43). The latter would signify you have agreed with one another. The 
rendering of Theod., aweOeaOe, would express either meaning. The Aphel 
is probably the true reading, and the fact that the verb does not occur else- 
where in Aphel may have given rise to the Keri. 

52. "lEHftb, to speak ; comp. of prep, b, and infin. Pehal of *1)DH, 
No. 4: see G^ (86). 

53. *q TO, until that; see Nos. 39 and 38. 

54. N2fittP, shall he changed; 3 m. sing. fat. Ithpahal of fctitt?, i.q. Hebr. 
TX3ti5. 3 m. plur. iafl-ttfy with the ) apocopated, v. 10: see Gr. (95). ^ TO 
"131, " till the time be changed," as in E. V., i. e. until circumstances be 
altered, until I become less anxious than now about the dream. evo<$ ov 6 

Kaipbs 7rapeX07], Theod. 

55. Sn^NI, and I will know ; comp. of conj., and 1 sing. fut. Pehal of 
57T, No. 17. The fut, according to analogy, would be 3?T, or VV, and 
the Haghesh being resolved by D, it becomes SHIP : Gr. (85). 

56. *0_pinn.Fl, you will make known to me ; 2 m. plur. fut. Aphel of 
TVtfl, No. 8, with suff. of 1 sing. : see Gr. (69). The final syllable of the 
verb is written defectively. 

57. — Yer. 10. VTS, there is ; i. q. Hebr. V2\ Cognate to this word is 
the verb subs, in Greek and Latin, ian, est. It is used with the suffixes 
(generally those of plur. nouns) to express the various persons of the verb 
substantive, e. g., with suff. of 3 m. sing. \"li/TM, ii. 1 1 ; with suff. of 
1 plur. NirPW, iii. 18; with interrog. 71 and suff. of 2 m. sing. 1JV1W!, 
ii. 26 ; with suff. of 2 m. plur. f'toWS, iii. 14. 

58. tt?3M, a man; m. n. also BWM, as it is written here in some copies, 
i. q. Hebr. BfiaH; In emph. state NH73H. Plur. abs., like the Hebr., 
D^BfaM, iv. 17 (14). Plur. constr. n$3N. 



If. ll.] ANALYSIS. 107 

59. b37, upon; prep. i. q. Hebr. With plur. suff. of 2 m. sing. Tpb37, 
iii. 12. With plur. suff. of 1 sing, *bjr, iv. 34 (31). 

60. NPltt^, the earth, lit. the dry {land); emph. off. n. TVlStSy, i. q. 
Hebr. 

61. b^, w»72 #0 «£&?; properly the fat. Hophal of the Hebr. verb 
bb\ The corresponding verb in the Chald. is bp% or b^\ of which the 
fui Pehal is bs?, iii. 29. It is followed by an ruin, with b, Gr. 237. 

62. n^innb, to show ; comp. of prep, b, and inf. Aphel of mn, No. 8: 
see Gr. (96). 

63. 2T, chief, lord; prop, an adj., great. 

64. ta^btth, and ruler ; comp. of conj. and m. n. E^bttf. The word is 
properly an adj., and is so used. It is derived from the Pahel of tflbtt?, to 

rule, i. q. tabtt? of later Hebr. The word Sultan has the same origin. The 

" T i_ 

clause 131 **rpN-Nv should perhaps be rendered, not as in the E. Y., " there 

is no king, lord, nor ruler," but, " there is no king (however) great and 

powerful," ;n and X&hw being regarded as adjectives. kuOoil was fiaci- 

Xevs fields Kat upyjrn? k. t. A,., Theod. 

65. H2*D, like this, such ; i. q. Hebr. DST3, comp. of 3, and demons. 
pron. UN, this, emph. of )^, i. q. Hebr. HT. 

66. bstp, hath ashed; 3 m. sing. pret. Pehal of verb, i.q. Hebr. b«B?. 
It is commonly followed, as here, by b of person interrogated. 

67. Db"in, scribe; m. n., which is also in the Hebr. Some regard the 
word as of Egyptian origin, designating the sacred scribes, or writers of the 
hieroglyphic characters, lepo^pafijubarei^, who formed one of the classes of 
Egyptian priests. Gesenius thinks it to be of Hebrew origin, and derives 
it from tain, a style, with £ formative ; or from grin, and Will, signi- 
fying in Hiph. to consecrate. Plur. abs. ^HEnn ; plur. constr. N*£2t3~in. 

68. 1]tt?N), and magician; comp. of m. n. Hebr. and Chald.; plur. abs. 
7>Dtt?H ; emph. S>SE7M, as from sing. V)WH. Plur. emph. with b HJSttfab, 

v. 7. The root P)Wi$ is not in use in Hebr. or Chald. >°i »|, Syr., sig- 
nifies to use incantations. The primary notion is, perhaps, laying up, 
hiding. 

69. ^DDI, and Chaldean, or astrologer ; comp. of conj. and prop., or 
appel. n. ^DS), in pause *>l'W2 : see Ko. 11. 

70._Yer. 11. TWffr, (is) difficult, or, E. V., rare.; f. of adj. T»j9J, de- 
rived from "){?>, No. 26. 

71. pnw, another; adj., i. q. Hebr. ins. 



108 ANALYSIS. [II. 12. 

72. PT2^T, will show it; 3 m. sing. fut. Panel n^in"), from TlMl, No. 8; 
with inserted Nun (Gr. 69, 99), and suff. of 3 f. sing. 

73. ]nb, except, unless; see No. 30. Some hold that the first part 
of the compound with this sense is the neg. part, sb ; but Gesenius thinks 
that the adversative use of the compound depends on its causal power. 

74. prfjN, the gods; plur. of m. n. Plbw, i.q. Hebr. nib«. The 
emph. Mnbs is specially used of Jehovah : see ver. 20. With suff. of 1 
plur. MjnbM, ver. 17. Emph. with conj. and prep, b, Wnbsbl, v. 23. 
"With suff. of 3 m. sing. PinbN, vi. 5. With suff. of 2 m. sing. Tinbw, 
vi. 16. With suff. of 1 sing. ^nb«, vi. 23. With prep. 2 and suff. of 3 m. 
sing. nnbs2, vi. 24. 

75. jirnTO, their habitation; comp. of m. n. "HD, i. q. "THE, which 
is derived from 1M, i. q. Hebr., to inhabit, and suff. of 3 m. plur. 

76. D37, with; prep., i. q. Hebr. 

77. N~ib2, flesh, i. e. mankind; emph. of m. n. ")t&2, i. q. Hebr. ltt?2. 
78. — Ver. 12. na*T, this; emph. of ft demonstr. pron., No. 64. b2(7"b| 

fOT, on this account: see No. 43. 

t •/ 

79. D22, was angry; 3 m. sing. pret. Pehal of verb, which is equiva- 
lent to the Hebr. V\2p. 

80. ^f^l, and was furious; comp. of conj., and 3 m. sing. pret. Pehal 
of verb, i. q. Hebr. ?\%p. The primary sense is to break, and thence the 
sign, to break forth in anger. 

81. N\2ttf, greatly, very much; same as No. 27, used here as an adv. 
Theod., whom other versions follow, renders this verse Tore 6 fiaatXevs eV 
Ovfiw Kal opcyrj ei7rev k. t. X. He regarded D32 as comp. of the prep. 2, 
and a noun D3, from DD3, to be moved to angsr. T\£p he must also have 
regarded as a noun with the prep, understood. The conj. 1 before *")ftN 
would thus be redundant. As there is no doubt of the existence of the 
verb D22, the rendering of the E. V., " the king was angry and very 
furious, and commanded," &c, is preferable. 

82. n"T2inb, to destroy ; comp. of prep, b, and inf. Aphel of 12N, i.q. 
Hebr. T2S, to perish. See Gr. (42, d), and (86, a). 

83. ^2n, the wise men, magicians; constr. plur. of adj. E^2n, i.q. 
Hebr. D^n. The same with prep, b, ^3nb, ver. 14. Plur. abs. with 
prep, b, TESnb, ii. 21. 

84. b22, Babylon; prop, name signifying confusion, see Gen. xi. 9, 
from bb2, to confound. 



II. 13, 14.] ANALYSIS. 109 

85. — Yer. 13. NTIT1, and the decree; comp. of conj. and emph. of m, 
see No. 48. 

86. npB3, went forth; 3 f. sing. pret. Pehal, from pQ3, to go out. The 

first letter has _ in place of the more nsual . From pM is derived the 

f. n. MpD3, expenditure. 

87. ^btepHE, slain; plur. of part. Ithpahal of bfcp, i.q. Hebr. bfcp, 
tfo s?«y. The words 151 S*B^prn may be rendered, as in the E. V., "that 
the wise men (should be) slain," the conj. 1 being nsed to denote the end 
or object. Prom ver. 24 it appears that Arioch had not yet commenced to 
execute the king's decree. With the E. Y. agrees the rendering of the 
LXX., edocyjmaTi'oOri Travras airoKTelvai. The version of Theod., Kal ol ao(fiol 
aireicTeivovro, which, in accordance with the use of the imperf. in Greek, 
might signify, " and the wise men were about to be slain," may perhaps 
best express the meaning of the original. 

88. i^ 1 ), and they sought; 3 m. plur. pret. Pehal of TO2, or S^22, 
i.q. Hebr. TO3, to seel; 3 m. plur. fat. Panel ?ta>, iv. 36 (33). 3 m. 
sing. pret. Pehal with conj. )AV^\, ver. 16. Infin. Pehal with prep. 
b XV^qb, ver. 18. Plur. m. of 1 part. Pehal ^M, vi. 5. 3 m. sing. 
fat. Pehal N27^, vi. 7. 1 part. Pehal, iTOSl, vi. 11. The proper sign, of 
the verb is, to cause to swell, or boil as water; and thence is derived that of 
ardently desiring, earnestly seeking. The 3 plur. act. of the verb may be 
used here impersonally for the passive, as is usual in Hebr. and Chald., 
or a nominative may be understood indicating the king's agents. LXX., 

e^rjTJOr] Se 6 AavirjX Kal 7TavTes ol jllct' avtov k. t. \. 

89. bs*:n, Daniel; prop, name, signifying "God's judge," i.e. one 
who judges in the name of God. 

90. >iTrnrn, and his associates; comp. of conj. and plur. of m. n. "DPI, 
or *nn, i. q. Hebr. "Drf, an associate, with plur. form of suff. of 3 m. 
sing. The Hebr. verb "On, to join, and to be joined, properly signifies to 
bind. Prom the cogn. b*2H, to twist, to bind, comes our cable. Among the 
derivatives is f'rnn (literally the conjunction, union), the name of the 
ancient town in the tribe of Judah. H^n belongs to Parad. IY. 

91. nbtoprinb, to be slain; comp. of prep, b and inf. Ithpehal of 
bftp, JSTo. 87. nbtSpb, inf. Pahel of same with prep, b, ver. 14. 

92. — Yer. 14. ?H W ?> ^en, on that; comp. of 3 and the adv. "pTW, 
then, afterwards, i. q. Hebr. TM, properly the dual of n. NIN, derived from 

mx = rnw = rra, to pass by. 



110 ANALYSIS. [11.15,16. 

93. ^iin, answered; 3 m. sing. pret. Aphel of 2W, i. q. Hebr. 
*Dr\W, to turn back, signifying in Aphel to return, to give back, to answer. 

94. Ntar, prudence; f. n. from D3^, to counsel, corresponding to the 
Hebr. TVSV from Y&. 

T •• ' - T 

95. D3?tp^ and wisdom; comp. of conj. andm. n. D3?tD (1) taste, flavour ; 
(2) reason, wisdom; (3) sentence, mandate, from D^tD, i. q. Hebr. KJtD, 
£0 £0«fc, to judge by tasting, to perceive. "He answered prudence and 
wisdom," i. e. he made a wise and prudent answer. Eosenm. explains the 
words to mean "he answered (inquiring as to) the object and reason of the 
king's mandate." 

96. Tp^sb, to Arioch ; comp. of prep, b, and prop. n. Tji'HN, which 
means lion-like, from "HM, with the Persic adjectival termination. 

97. N^nSto, the guards; emph. plur. of m. n. nSD, i. q. Hebr. The 
word literally means executioner, and hence body-guard, as the king's 
guards in Eastern countries inflicted capital punishment. See Eosenm., 
Schol. in Gen. xxxvii. 36. 

98. — Yer. 15. nD, what; interrog. pron., i. q. Hebr., once Ezr. vi. 7, 
written NO. TllZTTV, propter quid, why. 

99. !7D!£nnft, hasty, urgent; fern, of 1 part. Aphel (see Gr. (50)) from 
?]^n, to be sharp, severe, and in Pahel and Aphel trans., to urge. The 
Aphel of this verb joined with F]S, or "p3N, signifies in the Targums to set 
one's face resolutely or obstinately to a thing. Hence may be explained 
the version of Theod., y ^vw/xy y avails av-ry, i. e. this rash decree. The 
meaning given above, which is consistent with the primary signification of 
the verb, agrees better with the context. The word occurs again iii. 22, 
and apparently in the same sense as here. In iii. 22 it has the contracted 
form TOSTO. 

t : : ~ 

100. 3nin, made known ; 3 m. sing. pret. Aphel of 3JT, No. 17. 

101. — Yer. 16. "by, entered; 3 m. sing. pret. Pehal of bb^. The word 
is specially applied to one seeking an audience of a king. Plur. of 1 part. 
Pehal ^hv, iv. 7 (4), v. 8, Keri for Kethibh r^JJ- 

102. )p1, time; m. n. properly, a stated time, derived from ]DT: see 
No. 51. Emph. N2ttT; plur. abs. ^3t»; emph. N*3BT. 

103. )FO), he would give; 3 m. sing. fat. Pehal, from ]ri3, i. q. Hebr. 

70J : see Gr * ( 78 )- 

104. nb, to him; comp. of prep, b, and suff. of 3 m. sing. 

105. iT^nnb, that he ivould show; see No. 62. The use of the inf. 



11.17-19.] ANALYSIS. Ill 

with b, following the conj. 1, to denote the object or end, is to be noticed; 
" he desired of the king time, that he might show him," &c. The same 
mode of expression occurs in ver. 18. 

106. — Yer. 17. PTiTsb, to his house; comp. of prep, b, m. n. JT2, 
No. 20, and snff. of 3 m. sing. : see Gr. (141). 

107. btS, went ; 3 m. sing. pret. Pehal of verb, i. q. Hebr. The mar- 
ginal note directs attention to Pattach, where we would expect Qametz on 
account of Athnach. 

108. rPDDnb"), and to Hananiah ; comp. of conj., the prep, b, which 
before the Chateph is b, and the pr. n. n*02n, which is compounded of 
)2F] and PP, meaning, "him whom God gave," like Qeodoaio? and 
QeoSwpTjTos in Greek. 

109. bsttT'E, Mishael; pr. name comp. of S D, 'W, and bs, signifying, 
" who is what God is ?" 

110. rfHTSQ, and Azariah; comp. of conj., and pr. n. JTHT^, which 
is compounded of "TO and PT\ " whom God aids." 

111. — Yer. 18. ^JprTTj, and mercies; comp. of conj. and plur. m. n. 
^ftrH, i. q. Hebr. The primary sense of the verb OJT1 is, to be soft, and 
the proper meaning %£ the noun is, the boivels, -ra GTfKa^^ya, regarded as 
the seat of the affections. 

112. N^Sttb, to desire, ash; comp. of prep, b, and infin. Pehal of N3J3: 
see No. 88. For the use of the infin. with b following the conj., see 
No. 105. Translate here, as in the E. Y., " that they would desire," &c. 

113. N S EEJ, the heavens; emph. of plur. m. n. )^W, i. q. Hebr. 
U^W. With prep, b, H*EB?b. With prep. 2, N»»E?3. 

•-t J - i : t- : • x : t - : • 

114. HT"l, secret; emph. of m. n. n. The emph. plur. N s n occurs 
ver. 29. and the plur. abs. ^T"l, ver. 28. The corresponding verb is not 

in use in Chald., but in the Syriac there is ]]), to conceal. 

115. f-'nsirP, they should destroy; 3 m. plur. fat. Aphel, from "DM, 
No. 81. The plur. act. is used impersonally for the pass. : see Gr. (247). 

Q7T109 av firj a.7ro\uov7aL AavcrjX kcii ol (fiiXot aviov, k. t. A,., Theod. 

116. "1MB!?, the residue ; m. n., i. q. Hebr. 

117. — Yer. 19. NITJIS, in a vision ; comp. of prep. Sand Mltn emph. 
of segh. m. n. ITfl, i. q. Hebr. "pf!"!, derived from TVttl, No. 44. Constr. 
plur. with conj., *Otni; with prep. 3, ^112. 

118. S^Vb, the night; emph. of m. n., i. q. Hebr. nb^b. With prep. 
2, H"»V?5i," v. 30. 



112 ANALYSIS. [11.20,21. 

119. *>Vl, (was) revealed; 2 part. Pehal of tfbs, i. q. Hebr. nbS; see 
Gr. (97.) 

120. Tpa, blessed; 3 m. sing. pret. Panel of *i]~te, i. q. Hebr. TflS. 
The verb is followed by b, a construction which is also sometimes found 
with the Hebr. verb. tpQB, blessed, the 2 part. Pahel of the same verb 
occurs in ver. 20. 

121. — Yer. 20. rtinb, let (the name) be; this form has been generally- 
explained as compounded of the part, b, meaning that, in order that, and 
mn\ the 3 masc. sing. fut. Pehal of the verb subs. mn, the preformative 
of the fut. being omitted. Similar forms for the 3 masc. and 3 fern. plur. 
finb, and ri^j occur ii. 43, v. 17. In the second edition of his Grammar 
"Winer adopts the view of Beer, that the b in these forms is an unusual 
preformative of the future in place of \ 

122. nptP, his name; comp. of m. n. UW, i. q. Hebr., and suff. of 3 m, 
sing. The ordinary Chald. form of the word is Dtp, iv. 8 (5). With suff. 
of 3 m. sing. PTEE7, iv. 8 (5); pi. abs. fnfttt?. The redundancy of Chald. 
modes of expression as regards the use of pronouns is exemplified here, 
" Blessed be his name which is God's." "When ^ is thus used as the mark 
of the genitive, the noun is put in the emph. or constr. state, if it has 
not, as here, a suffix. 

123. Nftb^, age, eternity ; emph. of m. n. db3?, No. 2; used adverbi- 
ally in the sense for ever, iv. 34, (31). 

124. WrMn, wisdom; emph. off. n. ilDpn, i. q. Hebr. ; with prep. 
22, nft^nSl, ver. 30; with conj. n^^rT), v. 11 ; constr. with conj. 3, 

nmm, v. n. 

125. KPH^Q^, and strength; comp of conj., and emph. off. n. m^DS, 
i. q. Hebr. Here again we may notice the redundant mode of expression, 
" because wisdom and strength which his (is) it," i. e. " because wisdom 
and strength are his." ^ where it first occurs is a conj., for, because that, 
as in verses 37, 47. 

126. — Yer. 21. H^rT), and he ; comp. of conj. *], and NTT, pers. pron. 
3 m. sing., i. q. Hebr. * 

127. N3^np, changeth; 1 part. Aphel from fcOttf, No. 54, Gr. (50). . 

128. M^ETI, and the seasons; comp. of conj. and emph. plur. of ]ET; 
see No. 102. Some understand this word to mean here fixed periods or 
seasons, and S*^^ to be a general term, but the words are probably used 
synonymously, comp. vii. 12. Similarly, we find in the New Test, xpovoi 
kuX Kaipol, Acts i. 7 ; I. Thess. v. 1. 



11.22,23.] ANALYSIS. 113 

129. rTOna, (he) removeth; 1 part. Aphel of rTO, to pass atvay. 
VTO/T, 3 m. sing. fat. Aphel, vii. 26. 

130. D^ntt 1 ), and setteth up; comp. of conj. and 1 part Aphel of D^p, 
i. q. Hebr. Eftpft, 3 f. sing. fat. Pehal, ver. 39. 

131. nn\ (he)giveth; lpart. Pehal of SIT, to give. Plur. ^Sn> vi. 2. 
The root S»T is of rare occurrence in Hebr., but common in the other Se- 
mitic dialects. SJT borrows fat. and infin. from ]J11 

132. NSnaW, and knowledge ; comp. of conj., and emph. ofm. n. 2H2D, 
understanding, knowledge, i. q. Hebr. 3H1Q, derived from 37T, fat. $^3\ 
Abs. form with conj. VVHto v. 12 ; with conj. and suff. of 1 sing, VB^SEfy 
iv. 34 (31). 

133. ^Vl^h, t° those knowing ; comp. of prep, b, and constr. plur. of 
2T, 1 part. Pehal of 2T, No. 17. 

134. rWS, tender standing, intelligence ; f. n., i. q. Hebr. 
135.— Yer. 22. wbj, revealeth; 1 part. Pehal of sba, No. 119. 

136. snp^p^, ^ profound things; emph. of fern. plur. of adj. j^)D$, 
profound. The Hebr. verb p)33J signifies fo £0 deep. See Gr. (211). 

137. sm^ppJ), and the secret things; comp. of conj., and emph. of 
fern. plur. of "i-Pipp 2 part. Pahel of "lfip, i. q. Hebr. "ITID, to hide. 

138. HSittJnS, in the darkness; comp. of prep. S, and emph. of m. n. 
fjlttffT, i. q. Hebr. TJtt?n. 

139. NTHa*!, and the light ; comp. of conj., and emph. ofm. n. Tna. 
In the text the word has the vowels of Tina, the more common form. The 
Hebr. verb 1HD signifies to give light. 

140. FTE37, with him ; comp. of prep. USJ, No. 75, and suff. of 3 m. sing. 

141. N~)E7, dwells; 3 m. pret. Pehal of verb, which has also the form 
Vnt3. The primary sense of the verb is to loose, as in iii. 25. And thence 
it is used of those who halt at an inn, unloosing the burdens from their 
beasts, and so comes generally to signify to lodge, to dwell. Comp. Gr. 
KaraXvco and iccndXvfia. 

142 Yer. 23. t|b, to thee; comp. of prep, b, and suff. of 2 m. sing. 

143. V"in2S, my fathers; comp. of plur. of m. n. SN, i. q. Hebr. SN, 
and suff. of 1 sing. As SS in Hebr. has the fern, form of plur., so the 
plur. of SN is ]nSN ; constr. nnsN. Sing, with suff. of 2 m. sing. tJ^SN. 
"With suff. of 1 sing. ^SS. See note on v. 13. 

144. Sn'irrc?, (I) thank; 1 part. Aphel of ST, i. q. Hebr. PIT. See 
Gr. (83). The contracted form NTE occurs vi. 11. The primary sense 

R 



114 ANALYSIS. [11.24,25. 

of the verb is to cast, to throw ; the sense of praising, giving thanks to, of 
the Hiph. in Hebr., and of the Aphel in Chald., Gesenius thinks comes 
from that of confessing, professing, praise following the confession of bene- 
fits received : the sense of professing ', again, he derives from that of point- 
ing out with the hand extended, i. e. cast forth. Piirst thinks that the 
primary meaning of the verb is to utter, to speak, and compares the Sansk. 
wad, to speak, and the Gr. avB-v, aelheiv. 

145. rDttfp*!, and praise ; comp. of conj., and 1 part. Pahel of H'D.W, 
i. q. Hebr. r\2.t&. The primary sense is to soothe, and thence comes that 
of praising, i. e. soothing by praise, of the Pihel verb in Hebr., and of the 
Pahel verb in Chald. 2 m. sing. pret. Pahel, flPDttf, v. 23. 

146. .FQn s , thou hast given; 2 m. sing. pret. Pehal of mn\ No. 131. 

147. >b, to me; comp. of prep, b, and suff. of 1 sing. 

148. )V^, and now ; comp. of conj., and adv. )V5, a lengthened form 
of the Hebr.' )D. 

. 149. \lH3nin, thou hast made known to me; comp. of 2 m. sing. pret. 
Aphel of 3JT, see No 17, and suff. of 1 sing. The same person, with suff. 
of 1 plur. M3fi3nin, occurs also in this verse. 

150. MJ^i, we desired; 1 plur. pret. Pehal of W^S; see No. 88. 

151. Tjap, from thee; comp. of prep. fQ f No. 39, and suff. of 2 m. 
sing. *\p is properly the constr. form of a noun )fo, a part, derived from 
)ys, to divide. Its power as a noun is manifest in such passages as ver. 33. 

152 — Yer. 24. ">2ft, appointed; 3 m. sing. pret. Pahel of rap or N2tt, 
i. q. Hebr. JTDE. See Parad. G. In its primary sense the word implies 
. Cogn. to it are f2E and flSE, and Gr. i/e/tw. From the idea of 
are derived the senses of assigning and numbering. The Pihel of 
the Hebr. verb, as the Pahel of the Chald., signifies to appoint. 2 m. sing, 
pret. Pahel, iT2ft, iii. 12. 

153. fp'l, and thus ; comp. of conj., and adv. ]3, i. q. Hebr. 

154. "Crinn, destroy thou; 2 m. sing. fut. Aphel of ins, No. 82. 
The fut. is used for the imper. when a negative precedes. See Gr. 
(233, 2). 

155. *ob2?n, conduct me; comp. of 2 m. sing. imp. Aphel of bb^, 
see Parad. D, and suff. of 1 sing. blOT an anomalous form (see Gr. § 21, 
note), of the pret. Aphel of the same verb occurs in the following verse. 

156. — Yer. 25. nbrannSl, in haste, speedily ; comp. of prep. 2, and 
the infin. Ithpehal of br?22, i. q. Hebr. bnS, or brT2, to he in trepidation, 



II, 26, 27.] ANALYSIS. 115 

used as a noun. The Kal of the Hebr. root, and the Pehal of the Chald., 
are not in use. 

157. nn3tt?n, I have found ; 1 sing. pret. Aphel from J"pE7. See Gr. 
(73). Infin. Aphel with prep. V, nnStpnb, vi. 4. 1 plur.'fut. Aphel. 
n3E?n:?, vi. 5. 1 plur. pret. Aphel, NSnSEJn, vi. 5. 3 m. plur. pret. 
Aphel with conj. •inSt^rTI, vi. 11. 3 m. sing. pret. Ithpehal, rpJHEJrT, 
ver. 35. Tor the use of vsj with the oratio recta, see ISTo. 38. 

158. *"Q2l, a man; m. n., i. q. Hebr. ~Q2}. PI. abs. ^"OSl; eonstr. 

Hnaa, (as if from «nns). 

159. >y%, the sons; eonstr. of plur. m. n. ^33. ?3 is not used in the 
sing, in Chald., t3 taking its place, which with suff. of 3 m. sing. PH21 
occurs v. 22. 

160. Mrflbs, the captivity ; emph. off. n. rflba, which is derived from 
rh%, "No. 119. The primary sense of the root is to make hare, and thence 
to desolate. Thus the Hiphil of the Hebr. verb, and the Aphel of the 
Chald., signify to lead into exile. "CH \33, "the children of the captivity 
of Judah," the exiles of Judah. 

161. T)i"P, Judea; pr. n., i. q. Hebr. HTTP. 

162. 3nin\ will make known; 3 m. sing. fut. Aphel from £T, No. 17. 
163.— Yer. 26. n^NEJpbn, Beltesha%%ar ; pr. n. The Assyrio-Baby- 

lonic name given to Daniel in Nebuchadnezzar's court. That the name 
was connected with that of the Babylonian god, Bel, appears from iv. 8 
(5). Of the various derivations proposed, Rosenm. prefers that of Gese- 
nius, who thinks it to be compounded of 722, tscha, a termination in the 
Zend marking the genitive, and ")S, i. q. 1W, a prince, i.e. "the Lord," 
or "Prince of Bel." 

164. "Tpnwn, art thou; see No. 57. 

165. bn3, able; 1 part. Pehal of bn5, to be able, cogn. to b'"D and 
bb\ Plur. of same, X^T}^, v. 8. 

166. *0ri3ninb, to make known to me; comp. of b, S^T'in, before suf- 
fixes rWTin for rWjin (see Gr. (68)) infin. Aphel of 9T, No. 17, 
and suff. of 1 sing. 

167. — Yer. 27. )^X astrologers; apparently the plur. of 1 part, of 
"lta, i. q. Hebr. *ltS, to cut. The word has been variously explained to 
mean soothsayers, who cut up the victims, and astrologers, who decide or 
determine events by the position of the stars, or who divide the heavens 
into regions, and thus foretell the future. The second explanation is pre- 



116 ANALYSIS. [11.28,29. 

ferred by Fiirst. The last is adopted by Eosenm. Ta^apyvol is the ren- 
dering of the word by the LXX., and Theod., who regarded it as a proper 
name signifying the inhabitants of a country, which came like ^TO3, see 
No. 11, to be used as an appellative denoting experts in the art for which 
the country was famous. Emph. plur. with conj. H'HTrfi, iv. 7 (4). 

168. "pb;:\ able; m. plur. of 1 part, of b^ or b^, see No. 61. 

169. — Yer. 28. D~Q, but, yet; an adv. with adversative signification. 
In the Targums it is affirmative, yea, truly. Gesenius and Fiirst connect 
the word with an unus. root Ul'D., having, among other significations, that 
of making firm. 

170. N^Bfifel, in the heavens; see JSTo. 113. 

t - : • 

171. "l&p'TS'Da, Nebuchadnezzar ; pr. n., the signification of which Ge- 
senius thinks to be "the prince of the God Nebo." The second word in 
the compound, chodna, denotes God or Gods. The word is written by 
the LXX., and Theod., NafiovxoZovSoop. With prep, b, ngaTOl&lb, 
iii. 9. 

172. rYHnNS, in the end; comp. of prep. 3, and f. n., i. q. Hebr. 
fcTOi'* JT"inN3, "in the latter days." See Eosenm., Schol. in Gen. xlix. 
l, T Is. ii. 2." 

173. K*fti\ days; emph. plur. of m. n. Dl% i. q. Hebr. Plur. abs. 
'pE'T ; constr. *W, but also as in Hebr. ^E)\ Ezr. iv. 7. With conj. and 
prep, 3, Wn-1. Emph. sing, with prep. 3, NEV3, vi. 10. 

174. \ltrn, and the visions of; comp. of conj., and constr. plur. of m. n. 
Yrn, see No. 117. 

175. TjtPbn, thy head; comp. of m. n. fi&T], i. q. Hebr. W$n, and suff. 
of 2 m. sing. With suff. of 3 m. sing, PIBftri. With suff. of 3 m. plur. 
finHfrn. Plur. abs. ^XSlVT^ and (Ezr. v. 10) pttfen, 

176. Tp?E^?, thy bed; comp. of m. n. aSfito, i, q. Hebr., and suff. of 
2 m. sing. 

177. W-^n T\T\, literally this (is) it; i.e. as in E. Y., are these. 

178. — Yer. 29. iTFIDN, as for thee; the nom. of the pers. pron. used 
absolutely, as H2M in the beginning of the next ver. : see Gr. (212). The 
usual orthography is /H2JM, as the marginal note indicates. The Kethibh 
should be pointed PTPIDN, Gr. (17). 

179. ?p2V2H, thy thoughts; comp. of plur. of m. n. fPlSH, derived 
from TO"), to think, and suff. of 2 m. sing. Plur. abs. ^i^STl ; constr. 
•9$>jn. With conj. and suff. of 3 m. sing. *nfa^|3rn 



11.30,31.] ANALYSIS. 117 

180. 5|pVD, came up, rose; 3 m. plur. of the tense Pehil, Gr. (54), 
from pbp, to ascend. Cogn. pD2, same sign.: see Gr. (103). The Pehil 
here has the same sense as Pehal. Pern. plur. of 1 part. Pehal, )php, vi. 
20. 3 m. sing. pret. Pehal npbp, vii. 8. 

181. "^ns, after; constr. plur. of ins, prop, a noun, the hinder part, 
used as a prep. The prep. nri2 is used in this sense in the purer Chald. 

182. — Yer. 30. N**n, living beings; emph. plur. of adj. >n, alive. Abs. 
plur. i^n. 

183. >Va, (is) revealed; same as ^bsi, No. 119. 

184. )llb, but; see No. 30. 

185. rnn^, constr. off. n. m^, i. q. Hebr., cause, reason, rna^rb^ 
^1, "to the end that," as in iv. 17 (14). rn^T is in the construct state 
to indicate the close connexion with the words following. JTO'TliT is used 
impersonally: see Gr. (247). Translate as in margin of E. Y., "for the 
intent that the interpretation may be made known to the king." eveicev 
rod TTjv av^jicpicfiv rw fiaaCke7 <yvwplcai is the correct rendering of Theod. 
The translation in the text of the E. Y. is not consistent with the use of 
the idiom, >1 nwb?. 

186. Tp^b, thy heart; comp. of m. n. ^h, i. q. Hebr. and suff. of 2 m. 
sing, ib is a contraction of the ground-form ^b, which form reappears 
when the word receives an increase at the end. With suff. of 3 m. sing, 
nrnb. With prep. 3, and suff. of 1 sing, ^ba, vii. 28. 

187. — Yer. 31. TVjtl, (wast) seeing; 1 part. Pehal from HTn : see 
No. 44. The word denotes especially seeing God, and seeing in prophetic 
vision. 

188. JT1_n, wast; 2 m. sing. pret. of HVn : see No. 121. SeeGr. (92). 

189. -*)bsn, and behold; comp. of conj. and -lbs, a softened form of 
«V)M, behold, which is probably formed by transposition from SfrH, imper. 
of n«"). 

T T 

190. nb!£, an image; m. n., i. q. Hebr. db)S, properly a shadow; 
emph. HDbs. 

191. in, the first cardinal number: see No. 46. It is here used for 
the indef. article, as IPTS commonly is in the later Hebr. fTTH, the fern., 
is similarly used, vi. 17. Michaelis conceives that "Til here is employed 
emphatically to denote a single image made up of many parts. elicwi> /xla, 
Theod. 

192. f3*T, this; demonstr. pron., i. q. Tp. Fern. TpF. 



118 ANALYSIS. [11.32. 

193. nyt"), and its splendour ; comp. of conj., m. n. VT, and suff. of 3 
m. sing. "With conj., and suff. of 1 sing. vpJX The derivation of VT is 
PIPIT, unus. to shine. Prom VT comes the name of the second Hebrew 
month, Zif, the month of beauteous flowers. 

194. *1\fiV great, excessive; adj. derived from the Hebr. *"tfV, to abound, 
which is not found in the Chald. 

195. DSp, (was) standing ; 1 part. Pehal from Wp: see "No. 130. See 
Parad. F. 

196. Tjbnpb, before thee; comp. of prep. b, blip, No. 43, and suff. 
of 2 m. sing. 

197. PTVfl, and its form ; comp. of conj., m. n. VI, contracted from 
Ibp, form, appearance, and suff. of 3 m. sing. VI is connected with the 
Hebr. PIS*"), to see. 

T T 

198. VlTT, terrible; 2 part. Pehal of blTT, i.q. Hebr. bnt, to /<w; 
properly fo cre^p, #0 0£o%$r stealthily, as those in terror. 

199. — Yer. 32. Nttb^ ^H, this image; the nom. used absolutely, as in 
verses 29, 30. 

200. nni, gold; m. n., i. q. Hebr. nm. Emph. N2rn, ver. 35. 

201. itfi, good, fine; adj., i.q. Hebr. sits. The manner in which, what 
in other languages would be the genitive of material, is here expressed by 
the relative ^, is to be remarked: see Gr. (192, 2). Literally, " as for 
this image, its head, i. e. as for the head of this image, it was a head 
which was of fine gold." After PTttfrO, xSn must be supplied. 

202. ^niin, its breast; comp. of plur. m. n. ^in, i q. Hebr. Pftn, 
and suff. of 3 m. sing. >in, the sing, of yiH, occurs i n the Targums, but 
not in Biblical Chaldee. 

203. ^ni^-iTl, and its arms; comp. of conj., plur of in. n. SH^, i.q. 
Hebr. 21*-)*, and suff. of 3 m. sing. Plur. abs. )^X Prom 3n^, by 
prosthesis of S, comes SHlfy same s ^ n - 

204. fpp, silver; in pause for r|D3, m. n., i. q. Hebr. *|D3. Emph. 
SQD3, ver. 35. 

205. >ni2?p, its belly ; comp. of plur. of Vp, i. q. Hebr., and suff. of 
3 m. sing. The word is not used in the sing, either in the Hebr. or in the 
Chald. Plur. abs. *p3?H and )Vp. The root, which is unus., may have 
implied the idea of softness ; but, according to Purst, it means to be wound 
or twisted together, and he compares volvulus, derived from voho, and ilia 
from elXeiv. 



11.33-36.] ANALYSIS. 119 

206. ntTD'TO, audits thighs; comp. of conj., plur. of f. n. 512"^, i. q. 
Hebr. *-]*l\ and suff. of 3 m. sing. Plur. abs. )2R±; plur. constr. 

rai\ 

t : ~ 

207. tEPD, copper, brass; m. n., i. q. Hebr. fiHTD. Emph. NttJrD, 
ver. 35. 

208.— Yer. 33. irripttf, its legs; comp. of plur. of m. n. pa?, i. q. Hebr. 
pW, and suff. of 3 m. sing. 

209. bnD, iron ; m. n., i. q. Hebr. bns. Emph. «bnQ, ver. 35. 
The Chald. verb fTSl, ^o pierce, is the root of both words. 

210. ^nibl"], its feet; comp. of dual of c. n. bin, i. q. Hebr., and suff. 
of 3 m. sing. Dual abs. "pbin ; emph. N*bcn. 

211. JinSB, part of them, i. e. partly ; comp. of )ft, see No. 39, and 
suff. of 3 f. plur. The marginal note indicates that the *) is superfluous. 
The Kethibh has the masc. suff., and should be pointed "pnslD. bjn is of 
the common gender. 

212. *pn, clay; in pause for ^OTl, m. n. ; emph. MQpn, ver. 35. 
The Hebr. verb ^OH signifies to scale off, scrape. Cognate to it are 
GKaTTiuj and scabo. 

213. — Yer. 34. fTTOfin, cut off, cut out; 3 f. sing. pret. Ithpehal of 
1T2, see No. 167. bT^tSiE, which is expressed in ver. 45, is here under- 
stood. aTreaxtaOrj e£ opovs, Theod. >1 IV, until that ; see No. 53. 

214. ?riS, a stone; f. n., i. q. Hebr. Emph. with conj. S2SS1, ver. 35. 

215. PT»3, by hands; comp. of prep. 2, and ^T dual of f. n. T, 
i. q. Hebr.'T. Emph. NT; with suff. tJT, ^T, in pause "»T. «Vh 
^T?> ^. "which was not (done) by hands," i. e. as in E. Y., "without 
hands." 

216. nrTO, and smote ; comp. of conj., and 3 f. sing. pret. Pehal of 
NrTO, to strike, smite. Nnft is a poetical form in Hebr. Compare with 
this the Gt. i^axv^ A t ax°/ aat - 

217. n|Tfrn, and brake in pieces ; 3 f. pret. Aphel of ppl, i. q. Hebr. 
ppl. Eegularly it would be pointed ri|Tjn: see Gr. (50), and Parad. D. 
The Pehal, of which the 3 m. plur. pret. ypl occurs in the following verse, 
is neuter, to be broken. The form *ipl is that corresponding to a verb pM. 

218. fiftH, them; pers. pron. 3 m. plur., i. q. Hebr. OH. It is also 
written without the Nun. 

219. — Yer. 35. mnD, together; comp. of D and 71111 fern, of in: 
see No. 46. The corresponding Hebr. word is "tnSS. 



120 ANALYSIS. [11.36,37. 

220. iirn, and became; comp. of conj., and 3 m. plur. of nin, No. 121. 

221. "TOD, like chaff; comp. of conj., and m. n. "1TO, which perhaps 
is derived from *TO, unus. in Kal, in Pihel to blind, on account of its 
blinding effect. Some have thought that the noun as well as the verb 
may come from "1S2, dust, the Pihel *1JI3J meaning properly to cast dust 
into the eyes. The E . V. here is — ' ' like the chaff of the summer threshing- 
floors:" theYulg., "aestivse areae." The prep. ?tt, like ^, was regarded 
as expressing the genitive. Jp, however, may be employed in its usual 
sense, — "as the chaff borne from the threshing-floors." 

222. *H/TN, threshing-floors ; constr. plur. ofm. n. "HN, a word of uncer- 
tain derivation. 

223. t2>J2, summer; m. n., i. q. Hebr. yp, which comes from y-p, to 
cut, reap, as the Lat. messis, from meto. 

224. NtM*l, and (the wind) carried away; comp. of conj. and 3 m. sing, 
pret. Pehal of verb, i. q. Hebr. Mtt?3. 

225. HnT"), the wind; emph. of m. n. n 5 !"), i. q. Hebr., (1) wind; (2) 
spirit; (3) mind. "With conj. and suff. of 3 m. sing. fcJTUn 1 ), v. 20. Plur. 
constr. VST"), vii. 20. 

226. nriW, place; m. n. *s| ITIN, the place where, Ezr. vi. 3. 

227. naPfflSn, was found; 3 m. sing. pret. Ithpehal of mw, No. 35. 

3 f. sing, nmiwn. 

228. pnb, /or them; comp. of prep, b, and suff. of 3 m. plur. 

229. Titab (became, i. e. ^m#) fo> $ mountain ; comp. of prep, b, and 
m. n. "TO, i. q. Hebr. ll^. N"TO£, comp. of the prep. )T2, and the emph. 
sing, of this noun, occurs ver. 45. 

230. riMbtfl, and filled; comp. of conj. and 3 f. sing. pret. Pehal of 
sbp, i. q. Hebr. sbfc, to fill. The W generally is dropped in the 3 f. sing.: 
see Gr. (92). 

231.— Ver. 36. npNa, we will tell; 1 plur. fut. Pehal of "ttMft No. 4. 
Some have explained the plural here to be a pluralis majestatis ; but the 
truth is, that Daniel speaks in the plural, as he attributes the interpreta- 
tion to his associates as well as himself. " In plurali loquitur quia et sibi 
et sociis interpretationem illam attribuit," &c. : Glass., Phil. Sacr., vol. i. 
p. 325. 

232. M3nM, the earth; emph. of f. n. 3HM, i. q. Hebr. ym Emph. 
with conj., and prep. 2 S3?nS2-1, vi. 27. 

233. — Yer. 37. WilObp, kingdom, or regal dignity ; emph. off. n. Obp; 



11.38.] ANALYSIS. 121 

constr. rVObfc; emph. plur. «nj3b». With suff. of 1 sing. VI-'DbB. 
With prep, n and suff. of 2 m. sing. tjrTObEa 

234. SJpn, poiver; emph. of m.n. of Class IV., )ptl, which is derived 
from )pn, to possess, i. q. Hebr. jOtl. With suff. of 1 sing. ^pn. 

235. MSpn), and strength; comp. of conj. and emph. of m. n. fjhft 
i. q. Hebr. Fjph, derived from *)J7H, to grow strong. The Hebr. fpft is 
transitive, to prevail against, conquer. 

236. — Yer. 38, WfipSSi, and wheresoever; similarly "IE7N22 in Hebr. 
signifies where. 

237. P1MJ, dwelling; plur. m. of 1 part. Pehal of *W, i.q. Hebr. 
The Keri gives ^T^U C" 1 wn i° n the second > is superfluous), another 
form of the part. : see Parad. F. The constr. of the same, *nN^T, occurs 
iv. 35 (32). 

238. Nt£)N, man; emph. of m. n. BfciM, No. 58. The emph. is also 
written SttfaH,' v. 21, and HHftiH, iv. 16 (13), Kethilh. 

239. nvn, &?«*&; constr. off. n. SVH, or nY>n, i.q. Hebr. n s Jl, the 
sing, being used collectively for the plur. SVn is for S»n, the doubled *» 
being represented by V. Emph. sing. SWn, iv. 14 (11). 

240. S~)S, the field, or plain ; emph. of m. n. 13, a plain, campus pu- 
rus, the plain free from trees or houses. The Hebr. *"H2 signifies to 
purify. 

241. *ff$X and the birds; comp. of conj. and m. n., i.q. Hebr. The 
noun properly signifies a wing, being contracted from Pp3. The sing, is 
here used collectively. 

242. 1JT2, into thine hand ; comp. of prep. 2, f. n. T, see No. 215, 
and suff. of 2 m. sing. 

243. IJtabttfrn, and hath made thee ruler ; comp. of conj., 3 m. sing, 
pret. Aphel of vhw, see No. 64, and suff. of 2 m. sing. 

244. ]in v02, over all of them ; comp. of prep. 2, adj. bb, No. 42, 
and suff. of 3 m. plur. The expressions here employed need not be under- 
stood to imply universal conquest and dominion, but merely complete and 
invariable success in war : see Havernick on the passage. 

245. nttfTo, the head; for NttJNH, emph. of tt?bO : see No. 175. Some 
copies give PTE7N*1, the H having Mappik, which would be its head, the suff. 
referring to Db^, but, as Db^f is masc, it should be nt£?N~) with m. suff. 
The words "thou art this head," &c, do not refer so much to Nebuchad- 
nezzar himself as to his dynasty, which we know did not terminate with 

S 



122 ANALYSIS. [II. 39, 40. 

him. So T|nn2l in the next ver. means not so much " succeeding thee," 
as " after thy kingdom." 

246. — Yer. 39. Tprp^, and after thee; comp. of conj., prep. "lilS, and 
suff. of 2 m. sing. "1JH22, is contracted for "iriNSl, lit. in the place of, succeed- 
ing: see Gr. (180). The vowels of *irfi are both changeable. 

247. tflpfi, shall arise; 3 f. sing. fut. Pehal of QS|p, No. 130. 

248. vnnN, another; f. adi. derived from IPIS: see No. 181. The 

• t : i.t — 

common opinion is that the H of the fern, termination n\_ is cast away, 
as in '•Bftn for mtffcO, &c; but see Gr. (123, c, note). This second 
kingdom is generally understood to be that of the Medes and Persians, 
represented by the breast and arms of silver. See Hengstenberg's Diss., 
pp. 161, et sea., and Havernick's Excurz ueber die vier Welt-Monarchien. 

249. N3HH, inferior ; an adv. connected with 2HW, No. 232. The 
root of both words, unus. in the Chald., in the Arabic signifies to he de- 
pressed. The Keri notices that the final S is superfluous, but M is a com- 
mon termination of adverbs in the Aramaic dialects : comp. "^p and N^D, 
h^Vht and sb^bp, jolaTand ll*^^ 

250. tyap, to thee; comp. of prep. }p, No. 39, and suff. of 2 m. sing. 
]D is commonly used after comparatives : see Gr. (199). 

251. nwrpbri, third; fern, of ord. adj. VtVr, derived from ilbri, 
i. q. Hebr. wbw. The third kingdom is generally understood to be that 
of Alexander the Great. 

252. vhwn, shall rule; 3 f. sing. fut. Pehal from fcbtt?, No. 243. 3 m. 
sing. fut. fcbtt^ ; 2 m. sing, fcbttfrl ; 3 m. sing. pret. Pehal *tttbK7. 

253.— Yer. 40. j^ynyij fourth; fern, of ord. adj. ^rn,' derived from 
V21 or 27^"]M, i. q. Hebr. The fourth kingdom is by some supposed to 
be the dynasties of the Seleucidee and Lagidse, the successors of Alexander, 
but the more probable opinion is that the Eoman Empire is designated. 
See Havernick's Zweiter Excur%, &c. 

254. «"inn, shall be; 3 f. sing. fut. Pehal from nVT, No. 121. 

255. ns^ftn, strong; fern, of adj. VffiF}, derived from ?]pJn, see No. 235. 

256. p'ljlft, breaketh in pieces ; 1 part. Aphel of pp"T, No. 217. p^H, 
3 f. sing. fut. Aphel of same verb. 

257. btETH, and crusheth; comp. of conj., and 1 part. Pehal of btt?H, 
to beat out, crush. The cogn. verbs in Hebr. bttJH and tt?bn, are of simi- 
lar signification. 

258. yyift, breaketh; 1 part. Pahel from 373H, to break, i. q. Hebr. 



11.41-43.] ANALYSIS. 123 

3J3H. 27Hni, comp. of conj., and 3 f. sing. flit. Pehal of same verb. 
13hn is of the same form of p*W, Parad. D., the long vowel compensating 
for the Daghesh, and the __ being inserted on account of the guttural. 

259. "pbs, these ; pi. pron. comm., i. q. Hebr. nbs. The LXX. here 
have u>s o <rt'8r/po9 irav hevhpov eKKoirTvov, evidently reading for "jv^S, "J b^M, 
a tree. 

260. — Yer. 41. snVS^Wl, and the toes; comp. of conj., and emph. 
plur. of c. n. 23SN, i. q. Hebr. Plur. abs. fSQ^S ; constr. TO^N. The 
derivation is VIS, to dip, and the noun signifies properly a finger. 

261. "ins, a potter ; m. n. derived from unus. inD, to boil as a pot. 
By potter's clay is meant here of course not the soft, but the burnt clay. 

262. rC^bs, divided; f. of 2 part. Pehal of abs, to divide, i.q. Hebr. 

- T 

263. WIS S3, strength; emph. of f. n. MSS1 The root is the Hebr. 
2^3, to set up, unus. in the Chald. 

264. 212E, mixed; 2 part. Pahel of 2iy, i. q. Hebr. 3TOJ to mix. 

265. fc^tO, clay; emph. of m. n. "pto. N^tD ?\on, earthenware. 

266. — Yer. 42. H^p, lit. the end, completion, or sum of; constr. of 
mp related to the Hebr. n|j3, to cut NTVP'pB H2p )7p, (apart) of the 
whole of the kingdom, i. e. a part of the Jcingdom. fiepo? tl t^? ftacnXeias, 
Theod. To fi2p ]ft corresponds nap, part of it, comp. of ]ft, No. 39, 
and suff. of 3 f. sing. 

267. iTVQn, broken, or fragile; f. of 2 part. Pehal of "OH, i. q. Hebr. 
nnttf, to break. 

- T 

268. — Yer. 43. vy , because; the vowels are those of the Keri, v*n. 

269. 'prron^, »m^; m. plur. of rnyflE, part. Ithpahal of rn3j£ 
No. 264. 

270. "jinb, they will be; see No. 121. 

271. 2?"}TS, imYA the seed; comp. of prep. 3, and m. n. 2HT, i. q. Hebr. 
3TJ. 

272. PjEl-f, e l eat} ing, adhering ; m. plur. of 1 part. Pehal of p^T, i. q. 
Hebr. p"D.1, to cleave. The Hebr. verb is not followed by the prep. UV, 
but by 3, b«, or b. 

273. HDTD^ rOT, ^s with this, i. e. to one another; Theod. literally, 

OVTOS /XeTCL TOVTOV. 

274. SH, ?o/ behold/ interj. both Hebr. and Chald., written WH, iii. 
25. Here it is in a maDner pleonastic ; >"p"Nn, just as. 



124 ANALYSIS. [11.44-46. 

275. — Yer. 44. firTOi^, and in their days; comp. of conj., prep. 3, 
plur. of m. n. DV, No. 173, and suff. of 3 m. plur. 

276. fSfiM, these; pron., i. q. Hebr. Gil; f. ^3M. It is comp. of the 
demonstr. ]M, and suff. ^71, as ^2S = ^2M is comp. of "jM and ]n. 

277. D^, shall raise up, set up; 3 m. sing. fat. Aphel from QJip, No. 130. 
2 m. sing. D N pH, vi. 8. The uncontracted form of the fut. Aphel, D^pTP, 
occurs v. 21. 

278. banrin, shall he destroyed; 3 f. sing. fut. Ithpahal from bin, fo 
spoil, destroy, i. q. Hebr. ban. The kingdom never to be destroyed is the 
kingdom of the Messiah. 

279. n/VObM, and that kingdom; some MSS. have H written with 
Mappik, which would then be the suff. The suff. could refer to nothing 
but obE, so that this word in the second place where it occurs should 
have the unusual sense of power or sway. 

280. D2?b, to a people; comp. of prep, b, and c. n. UV, i. q. Hebr. 

281. pnnttfn, shall be left; 3 f. sing. fat. Ithpehal of pnitf, to leave: 
see Gr. (47). 

282. £pm, and shall consume; 3 f. sing. fat. Aphel, from PfiD, to be 
finished, i. q. Hebr. 3 f. sing. pret. Pehal HDD, iv. 33 (30). Cogn. the 
Hebr. *]D«. 

283. — Yer. 45. S^^lj and certain; comp. of conj. and adj. i s S^, 
No. 35. 

284. I^rra, and sure, reliable; comp. of conj. and 2 part. Aphel of 
fEN in Aphel, to trust, i. q. Hebr. J»S : see Gr. (86, b). 

285. — Yer. 46. bS3, fell, prostrated himself; 3 m. sing. pret. of verb, 
i. q. Hebr. bS3. 

286. NTiQ3«, his face; comp. of m. plur. n. fS3W, and suff. of 3 m. 
sing. In the Targums the noun is commonly contracted, fBM. 

287. "TUD, worshipped ; 3 m. sing. pret. Pehal of verb, i. q. Hebr. *DD. 
It is followed by b prefixed to the name of the object worshipped. 

288. nrDEtt, and an oblation ; comp. of conj., and f. n., i. q. Hebr. 
nn3Z3, is a general word for an offering of any kind ; but in the Law the 
Hebr. word was generally confined to the bread, or flour offering. 

289. 'pnrPSI, and sweet odours ; comp. of conj. and m. n. plur. corre- 
sponding to the Hebr. Pl'lTO, and properly meaning satisfaction, acqui- 
escence, derived from rfiD. The Hebr. word is always found joined with 
FTH, nrP2 rTH» odor delectationis, a sweet savour. 



11.47,49.] ANALYSIS. 125 

290. rDB^b, to offer ; comp. of prep, b, and infin. Pahel of ^D3, i. q. 
Hebr. TJD2, fo pour out, make a libation. In strictness the word is appli- 
cable only by %eugma to nrpp ; but it is possible that it came to be a 
word of general signification, which might be applied to any kind of offer- 
ing- 

291. — Yer. 47. tattfp, truth; m. n., also written ftttfp. The idea im- 
plied in the unus. root may be hardness, that on which no impression can 
be produced ; and hence the noun would signify integrity, probity. 
tDtt?j7"]p, of truth, i. e. truly. eV a\r)6ei'as : Theod. Compare the ex- 
pression a^"ip, ver. 8. 

292. N"TO, and lord; comp. of conj. and m. n. Nnp, prop, a man, 
and also a lord, or prince, derived from Hnp, to be fat, or well nourished, 
and hence, to be strong or powerful. With suff. of 1 sing. "WE, iv. 19 
(16), Kethibh, for which the Keri is "Hp, with the S rejected. 

293. ttb^, thou wast able; 2 m. sing. pret. Pehal of ba">, No. 61. 

294. sb^pb, to reveal; comp. of prep, b, and infin. Pehal of sba, 
No. 119. 

295. — Yer. 48. *»an, made great, exalted; 3 m. sing. pret. Pahel of 
nil, to become great, i. q. Hebr. nan. 

296. f anan, many; f. plur. of adj. anan, formed by reduplication from 

an, No. 63. 

297. )W$fo, great; f. plur. of adj. WZW, No. 27. 

298. ntabt^ni, and made him ruler; comp. of conj., 3 m. sing. pret. 
Aphel of vbw, No. 64, and suff. of 3 m. sing. 

299. na*TE, province; constr. off. n. rT3*T)Q, derived from }"H, to judge, 
rule. With prep, a, rD'Hpa, iii. 1. Emph. plur. HiHJ'Hp, iii. 2. 

300. "p^D, governors ; plur. of m. n. ]3D, i. q. Hebr. }3D or ]3p, a 
word thought by some to be of Persic origin. }*02p"an, apyovia aa-rpa- 
7rwv, Theod. an is by some regarded as the nom., with the verb subst. 
understood, "and Daniel (was) the governor," &c. ; it may, however, be 
the accus., governed by tobtt?n, or placed in apposition with the suffixed 
pron. 

301. — Yer. 49. ^p^, and he set, appointed ; comp. of conj., and 3 m. 
sing. pret. Pahel of H2p, or Sjp, No. 152. 

302. NttTaSJ, the business ; emph. of f. n. HTa^, derived from "Q^, 
No. 19. The word is of general signification, and does not merely refer 
to agriculture, as Lud. de Dieu thinks. See Rosenm. on the passage. 

303. tpnttf, Shadrach; pr. name, the Chaldee (Assyrio-Babylonic) name 



126 ANALYSIS. [III. 1. 

given to Hananiah in the Court of Babylon, i. 7. The word is supposed 
by some to be of Persic origin, signifying " him that rejoiceth in the way." 

304. TJtt^D, Meshach ; pr. name, the Chaldee name given to Mishael. 
Some deduce it from the unus. TJE7\ to be swift, prompt; others regard it 
as Persic, signifying ''the king's guest." 

305. "*CI3 *D5> Abednego; pr. name, the Chaldee name given to Aza- 
riah, signifying the worshipper of the god Nego. JNego, Gesenius thinks, 
is the same as Nebo = Mercury. 

306. 3nriSi, in the gate ; comp. of prep. 2, and comm. n. V1F\, i. q. 
Hebr. "13712?. ' The gate of the king' means the king's court or palace, which 
was surrounded by a wall in which there was but one gate, at Ovpai is 
used by Xenophon to signify the Persian Court. Similarly, the Court of 
Constantinople is now called the Porte. The sense here is, that Daniel 
lived in the king's palace. See Havernick on the passage. 



CHAPTER III. 

307. — Yer. 1. PTEV), the height of it ; comp. of m. n. DV"), i. q. Hebr., 
and suff. of 3 m. sing. 

308. "pTSW, cubits; plur. off. n. JIES, i. q. Hebr. Theplur. is irregular. 

309. JVltt?, sixty; plur. of HW, or HW, six, i. q. Hebr. WW : see Gr. 
(202). 

310. PPnS, its breadth; comp. of m. n. NH5, derived from iinS, iq. 

Hebr. nriQ, to open, and suff. of 3 m. sing., taking the place of _ in 

the open syllable. The disproportion between the height and breadth of 
the statue may be explained on the supposition that in the height the 
elevation of the pedestal is included. It does not, however, appear certain 
that the colossus was intended to represent a human figure, and, even if it 
were, the disproportion can cause little difficulty, without the supposi- 
tion alluded to, as we know that in the gigantic statuary of Eastern 
nations, expression, and not proportion, was chiefly attended to. See 
Hengst. Diss., pp. 78, et seq., and Havernick on the passage. By SHT^ 
it is not implied that the statue was of solid gold, but only gilt, as the 
altar of acacia- wood is called the golden altar, Exod. xxxix. 38. 

311. PlEPpN, he set it up; comp. of 3 m. sing., pret. Aphel of D^p, 
No. 130, and suff. of 3 m. sing. In ver. 3, the pret. Aphel is D^pn, of 
which form the 2 m. sing. DD^pn occurs ver. 12, and the 1 sing, n&ptl, 
ver. 14. 3 m. pret. with the conj. t^prn, vi. 1. 



III. 2.] ANALYSIS. 127 

312. TOp22, in the plain of; comp. of prep. 3, and constr. of £ n. 
N2p3, i. q. Hebr. TOpS, a valley, derived from 3JJ23, to cleave, a valley 
being, as it were, the cleaving of the hills. 

313. WW, Dura ; pr. name, a plain in Babylonia, doubtless the same 
as the " plain in the land of Shinar," Gen. xi. 2. The word is derived from 
the Arabic, and properly denotes a circular plain. The name was applied 
to several places ; thus, there was a city Dura on the Tigris, and another of 
the same name on the Euphrates. Theod. has here eV 7ree>/u> Aeet/m, per- 
haps confounding the plain in Babylonia with that of Deira, or Deera, in 
Susiana, mentioned by Ptolemy. The LXX. regarded the word as an ap- 
pellative, their version being iv Trehlvo tov 7repij36\ov, "in the plain of the 
park." 

314. — Ver. 2. nb W, sent ; 3 m. sing. pret. Pehal of verb, i. q. Hebr. 

nbw. 

315. Kfapftb, to gather together ; comp. of prep, b, and infin. Pehal 
of tt?33, to gather together, collect. ^ttfaD/IB, plur. of part. Ithpahal 
occurs ver. 3. 

316. N s 35"l^nsb, the satraps, viceroys ; comp. of part, b, and emph. 
of plur. m. n. ^2Q~Htt7nN. According to Gesenius, this word in the sing, 
(with M prosthetic, and the termination ]_) expresses in Hebr. or Chald. the 
Persian word Kshatrap, whence comes the Greek <TaTpa7rr}<$. Other deriva- 
tions of the word will be found in Bosenmiiller's note on the passage. The 
wordKshatrap is itself compounded, denoting, probably, " The Baler of a 
Province." The satraps were the rulers cf the greater provinces, who re- 
presented the monarch, exercising civil and military powers. 

317. NrfinD 1 ), and the rulers ; comp. of conj. and emph. plur. (fern, 
form) of m. n. ins. The origin of the word is not certain. It denotes 
the governor of a minor province, or subdivision of the greater provinces, 
which were governed by the satraps. 

318. N*HT2"HW, the principal judges; emph. of plur. m. n. j^Tte'TTM, 
which is probably compounded of TTM, i. q. Hebr. ~HS, greatness, and 
"TT2, to decide: see "No. 167. The translations by the LXX. and Theod. 
of these different words are, it is plain, merely conjectural. 

319. N^^HS, the treasurers; emph. of plur. m. n. fHITTa, i. q. "PI 2 ;* 2 .' 
Ezr. vii. 21, 1 being substituted for the sibilant. ~)3T5 is comp. of T2. 
(contracted from W2), # treasure (comp. Lat. gaza) and the syllable bar, 
or war, employed in the Persic to denote possessives. The treasurers Were 
the collectors of the public revenue. 



128 ANALYSIS. [111.3,4. 

320. NJ'-nrn, the counsellors; emph. plur. of m. n. "OTTO, comp. of 
n^, law, Wo. 48, and the syllable *0. 

321. bWjSJn, the sheriffs; Syr. emph. form of plur. m. n. ?\Pl5n, from 
unus. sing, \F)D.n : see Gr. (148). The word has been connected with 
nriQ, and would thus mean expositors of the law. Berthold thinks it is 
derived from *HB, see Wo. 310, used to signify a level region, and that it 
means governors of districts. 

322. *ObbttJ, the magistrates; constr. plur. of m. n. fbbtP, prop, fitobtP, 
derived from tfibtt?, Wo. 64. The word, perhaps, is employed to designate 
the governors who ruled the external annexed provinces, as the satraps 
governed the provinces of Babylonia proper. 

323. Wn^b, to come; comp. of prep, b, and infin. Pehal of iinN, i.q. 
Hebr. nriN, to come. NHS is contracted for HilNE. 

324. nspnb, to the dedication of; comp. of prep, b, and constr. off. n. 
JlSpn, i. q. Hebr., derived from Tjan, to dedicate, properly, to imbue, give 
to taste, hence, to initiate, &c. 

325. — Yer. 3. 'pftHpl, and stood; comp. of conj. and plur. of 1 part. 
Pehal of Dp, Wo. 130. ' 

326. bnpb, before; comp. of prep, b and bap, Wo. 43. The b is 
pointed as if the first letter had _, which is another reading. 

327. — Yer, 4. MTi"01, and the herald; comp. of conj. and emph. of 
m. n. fP3, a herald, derived from n3, to proclaim. Comp. Hebr. N"p; 
Gr., Kvpvaaw ; Eng., cry. 

328. MT1JJ, cried; 1 part. Pehal, from Wnfl, i. q. Hebr. S"Jj7. 

329. b*jTO, aloud, lit., with might; comp. of prep. a, and m. n. bTT, 
strength, i. q. Hebrew. With prep, a and suff. of 3 m. sing. PlVna, 
ver. 20. In ver. 20, and iv. 35 (32), b^n signifies an army, or host. 

330. ]iab, to you; comp. of pret. b, and suff. of 2 m. plur. ^HEN 1 , 
the act. part. plur. is used impersonally for the passive. "To you 
they command," i. e. " it is commanded." v/iiv Xe^erai: Theod. 

331. NJEE2, O people; emph. plur. of c. n. D9, Wo. 280. Plur. 
abs. "pDDS : see Gr. (159). 

332. N*EH, nations; emph. plur. off. n. fTEM, irreg. ; or of m. n. DM. 
the root is DftH, unus., which seems to have had the sense of joining to- 
gether. This term is of less extent than the previous, having to it the re- 
lation of Lat. gens to populus. 

333. N^at^bl, and languages; comp. of conj., and emph. plur. of c. n. 



III. 5.] ANALYSIS. 129 

)$b, i. q. Hebr. pttfb. The term is used to designate a district as distin- 
guished by its language or dialect, and is less general than either of the 
preceding terms. 

334 Yer. 5. NITO2, at the time; comp. of prep. 2, and emph. of 

m. n. yiV, No. 39. 

335. ^9E& ; n, you shall hear; 2 m. plur. fut. Pehal of 2ptP, i. q. 
Hebr. VW. W^W, m. plur. 1 part. Pehal, ver. 7. 

336. bp, the sound; m. n., i. q. Hebr. bip, voice, sound. With prep. 
2, b|72, vi. 20. 

337. N^p, cornet, horn; emph. of f. n. ]np, i. q. Hebr. The dual 
^r]J2 is used for the plur., vii. 8, 20, 24. 

338. bWTp;ha?a, flute, pipe; emph. of f. n. ^p'htrfo, derived from 
\H0, to pipe. Comp. Gr. avpiaau), ovpi<y%. 

339. D'~)iTp, A^rp. The Keri is Dhflj?, the form in which the word 
appears in the Targums. It is the same as the Greek word KtOapis, the 
Greeks having probably derived from the East the name and use of this in- 
strument. See Strabo, quoted by Eosenm. It may be connected with 
the Hebr. verb DHp, to he bowed or bent, the n being merely formative. 
The argument for the Greek origin of the word, founded on the fact that 
tciOdpa meant the human breast, which the cyther originally resembled in 
shape, is of little weight. The application of the word to the breast, or 
hollow of the chest, was secondary, being probably founded on the resem- 
blance of the skeleton of the ribs, &c, to the musical instrument. 

340. N22D, sachbut; f. n., a kind of three-cornered stringed musical 
instrument. Gr. aajufivicr} ; Lat. sambuca, (the doubled letter being ex- 
pressed by m), the use and name of which came to Greece and Eome from 
the East at an early period. *J2D means to interweave; and the instru- 
ment probably had its name from the interweaving of the chords. 

341. pnEODS, psaltery; another reading is jniMDB. This is supposed 
by some to be the same as the Greek word -^-aXrypiov, the X of the first 
syllable being represented by 2. There are, however, many objections to 
this account of the origin of the word, for which see Havernick on the 
passage. Eegarding the word as Shemitic, he thinks it may be derived 
from DQ, the hand, and "iru, to spring, an etymology which is not impro- 
bable. It may properly have meant the chords struck by the hand ; and 
thus we may account for the plur. form of the word. 

342. n^QD^D, symphony, or dulcimer. This word is thought by some 
to be the Greek avficfyusvia ; but its derivation from the Greek is very 

T 



130 ANALYSIS. [IIL6. 

questionable. In ver. 10 it is written fcVOb^p, which makes it probable 

that it corresponded with the Syriac t-*-JQ.£) • , tibia, and that the Syriac 
word was derived from the Greek is very unlikely. It is indeed true that 
av^wvla was used by Greek writers to designate a particular musical in- 
strument, but the probability is, that when the foreign word was intro- 
duced, by a slight alteration, it was made to correspond to a Greek etymo- 
logy, as was the case with respect to many other foreign words. The 
derivation suggested by Havernick from PfiD, reed, is probable. From the 
statements of Rabbinical writers, the S'Obp-ID would seem to have been a 
kind of wind instrument like the bagpipes. 

343. \3T, kinds of; constr. plur. of m. n. }T, i. q. Hebr.: see Parad. III. 
of m. n. The root is 13T, unus., to form, fashion, species being distin- 
guished by form or appearance. 

344. bn»t, music; emph. of m. n. TEST. ThePihel of the Hebr. verb, 
T3DT, signifies to play on a musical instrument^ yJsdWeiv. 

345. ^bsfl, ye shall fall down; 2 m. plur. fut. Pehal, from b?3, 
35Fo. 46 : See Gr. (76). b&?, 3 m. sing., ver. 6. pb53, m. plur. 1 part. 
Pehal, ver. 7. 

346. JsnaprVj, and worship; 2 m. plur. fut. Pehal from T2D. *T30^, 
comp. of conj., and 3 m. sing., ver. 6. J^D, m. plur. 1 part. Pehal, ver. 
7. *73p3, 1 plur. fut Pehal, ver. 18. 

347 — Yer. 6. ^"jp-l, and whosoever. )1S\ is comp. of the conj., and 
the indecl. interrog. pron. ]X3. 'H'fft, whosoever: see Gr. (228). 

348. MTOE?"PTa, at the same moment, instantly; HIS is the prep. 2, 
with suff. of 3 m. sing., _ being shortened to — on account of Makkeph. 
NOTtP, in some copies HTOtt?, is emph. of f. n. TVSX&, a moment, the twink- 
ling of an eye, and also an hour, derived from TOtt?, to look See Gr. (231). 

349. HD*"lJT, shall be cast; 3 m. sing. fut. Ithpehal from NID'H, to cast, 
i. q. Hebr. HEn. pferinn, 2 m. plur. ver. 15. See Parad. G. 

350. Nfab, into the midst; comp. of prep, b, and Ni3, constr. of m. n. 
13, the midst of a thing. The unus. root m3 would seem to have had the 
sense of flowing together, and may have been the origin of the noun *»i3, a 
people, nation, lit. a conflux. 

351. I^M, a furnace; c. n., occurring only in this chapter, derived 
from }3tt, to smohe. The emph. form with b prefixed, N3VlNb, occurs 
ver. 19 ; and the abs. form with the prep, b, ^ttNb, ver. 20. 

352. N*"l!Q, fire; emph. off. n. "VD. The root -fi3, to give light, cogn. to 
Hebr. 1513, is unus. 



111.10,12.] ANALYSIS. 131 

353. NMTf?\ burning, or kindled; emph. fern, of 1 part. Pehal (form 
Vtp|7), see Gr. (391), from Tg?i to burn, i. q. Hebr. *Tj7\ The word may 
signify u now burning,'' implying that the furnace was actually kindled 
while the herald was making the proclamation. Jerem. xxix. 22, gives 
another instance of the use of this mode of punishment by burning in Chaldea. 
From II. Sam. xii. 31, we see that it was also practised by the Jews. 

354. S3pT HT22, at the very instant. HT3 comp. of prep. 22, and suff. of 
3 m. sing. HJET, emph. of JD|, Ho. 102. See No. 348. 

355. *HD, when; comp. of part. 3, and the reL *% i. q. Hebr. "1E?S3. 
With conj. ^\ 

356. ! Q"pp, drew near; 3 m. plur. pret. Pehal, from S*nf7> to draw near, 
i. q. Hebr. 3Tp. 

357. -ibpWI, and eat; comp. of conj. and 3 m. plur. pret. Pehal of bpS, 
i. q. Hebr. bDM. 

358. firP^Hp, their pieces; comp. of plur. of m. n. V*2l?> an( i suffix of 
3 m. plur. With suff. of 3 m. sing. 'SftSTpj vi. 24. The Hebr. verb 
¥~)p means to tear, to bite. The suffix is redundant according to the com- 
mon Chald. idiom. The singular expression *H ^~!P '2M, which, as the 
Targums show, unquestionably means to calumniate, to slander, has been 
explained in different ways. To eat one's pieces may mean, by a metaphor 
from birds or beasts of prey, to devour one, to destroy by slander, like 
mordere or rodere in Latin, see Hor. Sat. i. 4, 81 ; or the noun !£")p may 
mean laceration, and thus, calumny, and then *H ^Tj2 b^N would signify 
to feed on the calumny of any one. Another explanation of the phrase is 
proposed by Schultens, for which see Rosenmiiller's note on this passage. 
The same expression, 5 j • ;iQ \>h\, to calumniate one, is used in the Syriac, 
and there is the comp. noun U;ONh|, a calumniator, lit. a piece-eater. 

359.— -Ver. 10. npb, hast made; 2 m. sing. pret. Pehal of tRW, No. 
22. Jftatt?, 3 m. plur. of same, ver. 12. 

360. — Ver. 12. ^HjT, them; comp. of IT, the mark of the accus., 
i. q. Hebr. ilSt, and suff. of 3 m. plur. 

361. Tjbs, these; pi. demonstr. com. pron., i. q. )>h& and Jibs. 

362. D^tD JlttHTM 1 ?, have not regarded; more literally, as in margin of 
E. V., "have set no regard upon thee :" see No. 95. In ver. 10 the phrase 
DTO EPOd has a different sense, to promulgate an edict. 

363. TJTHNb, thy gods; comp. of prep, 7, plur. of Plbs, No. 74, and 
suff. of 2 m. sing. The marginal note > TiT signifies the Yod is rcdun- 



132 ANALYSIS. [III. 13-15. 

dant. Without the Yod the word would be Tfnbsb, thy God, the sing., 
which may be merely a correction suggested by the sing, ^nbsb in 
ver. 14. 

364. pnbp, serving ; plur. m. of 1 part. Pehal of ribs, to serve. The 
m. sing. nbG occurs vi. 16. 

365. — Yer. 13. tt~l22, in anger; comp. of the prep. 21 and the m. n. 
IXl, anger. The primary meaning of the root 121, i. q. Hebr. MT1, is to 
be moved, agitated. The Greek 0/377, an ^ our word rage, are cognate. 

366. N£rn, and fury ; comp. of conj. and f. n. Mftn, i. q. Hebr. HEll, 
/wry, excandescence, from Qftn or Dn\ £0 be warm. In ver. 19 it is 
pointed HEH. 

367. iTrpnb, £0 bring ; comp. of prep, b, and anomalous infin. Aphel 
of nriN, No. 323. The regular form would be n«n«n. 

368. ^/TH, were brought; 3 m. plur. pret. Hophal of nnN, formed 
irregularly after the analogy of the Hebr. Some regard it as Aphel, and 
used impersonally, they brought, but this form is passive in vi. 18. 

369. — Yer. 14. N1!£n, is it design, is it intentional; comp. of interrog. 
and f. n. Nl^, purpose, design. The Hebr. verb 711)£ means to fix the eyes, 
and also to fix the mind on anything. The marginal reading in the E. Y., 
is it of purpose, is better than the rendering in the text. Havernick, 
however, contends that this interpretation does not yield a suitable sense, 
as the king must have been aware that the refusal to worship the image 
was not accidental. He explains the expression to mean, "is it mockery," 
or, " is it contempt ;" and this he thinks agrees best with the meaning of 
Sl^, which signifies to mock or laugh at. The version of Theod., el aXy- 
0w? Tots 0eots fiov ov Xarpevere, agreeing with that in the text of the E.Y., 
is followed by Jerome. 

370. pDWW, ye are; comp. of VTH, No. 57, and suif. of 2 m. plur. 

371. n^pn, I have setup; see No. 311. The accent being irregu- 
larly thrown back to the penult., the vowel of the final syllable is __ in- 
stead of __. 

372 — Yer. 15. "pTTO, ready ; m. plur. of adj. TTO, ready , prepared, 
derived from TO, time. 

373. *>*T, that, so that ; conj. as the Hebr. "")tt?H. Something must be 
here supplied to complete the sense, as, it is well, as in Exod. xxxii. 32. 
" Subintell. bene est, quae vox in sequenti membro contrario latet, ubi poena 
non obtemperantibus denunciatur." Glass. Phil. Sacr., vol. i., p. 629, 



111,16-19.] ANALYSIS. 133 

374. m29, I Time made; 1 sing. pret. Pehal of T?2, No. 19. 

375. jiDaarttfy shall deliver you; comp. of ^Vfr, 3 m. sing. fat. Panel 
of 2ttt?, to set free, and suffix of 2 m. plur. : see Gr. 58. Pret. with conj. 
2>1W\ ver. 30. Inf. with prep. b, and suff. of 1 plur. Harpnrtrfb, ver. 

••• : > i_ .T_ TT T " : 

17. Inf. with prep. b, and suff. of 3 m. sing. nnspT^?, vi. 14. 3 m. 
sing. fut. with suif. of 2 m. sing. ?J22Ptt7>, vi. 16. Inf. with prep, b, and 
suff. of 2 m. sing. IfntaPflf?, vi. 20.' 1 part. rWttft?, vi. 27. 

376. — Yer. 16. ^ntt?n, deem it necessary ; m. plur. of 1 part. Pehal of 
TlWn, (1) to be needful, (2) to deem needful. The meaning of the words 
121 "pnttJrrsb seems to he, " we deem it not necessary to answer you, he- 
cause hoth your mind and ours is made up on the subject." Some connect 
the verb Tlpn, as used here, with ttfan or WWn, words applied to strong 
mental emotion. In accordance with this view the words are rendered in 
the E. V., " we are not careful to answer thee in this matter." The form 
of the part., with Pattach for Qametz in the first syllable, is anomalous. 

377. ffitJlQ, word, matter; m. n. of Persic origin. 

378. "SJfTOnnb, to answer thee; comp. of prep, b, infin. aph. of SVi, 
No. 93, and suff. of 2 m. sing. Some commentators, e.g.Eosenm. andMi- 
chaelis, think that the latter clause of this verse should not be rendered, "we 
deem it not necessary to answer thee concerning this matter," but, " we deem 
it not necessary to answer thee a word concerning this," regarding DSfiQ as 
the object of the verb. The latter, they hold, is shown to be the right con- 
struction by the position of the pronoun TT21 preceding the noun, and also 
by the distinctive accent with which it is marked. Havernick, however, 
adopts the former construction, and shows that the pronoun, being here 
emphatic, is properly placed before the noun, as Sftbn 7121, iv. 18(15). 

379. — Yer. 17. in, behold; an interj. : 121 WM )T1, behold (or surely) 
there exists our God; eari <yap Geos y/uivv, k. r.\., Theod. The allusion 
is to the words of the king, ver. 15, " who is that God," &c. The E. V. 
is, "If it be so, our God," &c. 

380. b?>, {is) able; m. sing, of 1 part. Pehal of bb> or b^, No. 61. 

381. — Yer. 18. sb ]n), and if not; i. e. if he will not deliver us. 

382. 3PT, known; 2 part. Pehal of 2T, No. 17. mrf? 3PT, let it 
be known : see No. 121. 

383. — Yer. 19. ^bttrin, was filled; 3 m. sing, pret. Ithpehal, from 
Hbtt No. 230. 

t : 

384. Db^l, and the form; comp. of conj. and m. n. Db!£ or Db^, No. 



134 ANALYSIS. [III. 20. 

190. The noun commonly signifies an image, simulacrum ; here the ap- 
pearance, or expression of the countenance : rj o\Jsi$ too irpoadmov aviov, 
Theod. The words refer to the change of countenance under the emotion 
of anger. 

385. 12jntt?S, was changed; 3 m. plur. pret. Ithpahal of SJE7, No. 54. 
If the Kethibh be the correct reading, the writer used the verb in the 
plural, so that it would agree in number, not with the noun in regimen, 
Db^, but with the governed noun *»ni52S, according to an idiom which 
is common in Hebrew. For an example, see Gen. iv. 10. There is a Keri, 
however, 'OfltDN, the sing., with the vowels of which the word in the text, 
as usual, is pointed. 

386. NTftb, to he heated, or to he kindled; comp. of prep, b, and the 
infin. Pehal of ntM, to be set on fire. "With suff. of 3 m. sing., PT^ttb, the 
N being changed to \ 

387. TOittTin, seven times; TVS2.W, seven, numeral n., i. q. Hebr. 
The expression in the text is literally one-seven. In Chald. and Syriac, 
multiplicity is denoted by the numeral for one being prefixed as here : see 
Gr. 206. 

388. rTrn, (was) seen; 2 part. Pehal of Htn, No. 44. The last clause 
of the verse may be rendered, " seven-fold more than it was ever seen to 
be heated." Rosenm. thinks that in accordance with a derived sense of 
the verb HTn, to judge, to see a thing as proper or usual, the words should 
be translated, " sevenfold more than it was necessary to heat it." In this 
sense the part, ^tn is frequently used in the Targums. See Buxtorf's 
Lexicon on the word. The rendering of the LXX., Trap' o i8ei avirjv 
tcaTJvai, agrees with this interpretation. 

389. — Ver. 20. f "oi^, an & to men; comp. of conj.,prep. b, and plur. 

of nna, No. 158. 

390. 'H23, mighty men ; constr. plur. of 133 m. n., i. q. Hebr. 
Ti22. b s # n"^2l2, mighty men of strength. avhpa<s lexvpovs lax^h Theod. 

391. nnQ^bj to bind; comp. of prep, b, and infin. Pahel of HDS, to 
tie, bind. There is no reason for the restriction implied in the word 
avfjLTrohloavra'i, the translation of the LXX. The verb is of general signi- 
fication, and here means, to bind hand and foot. -VI53, 3 m. plur. tense 
Pehil of the same verb, occurs in ver. 22. 

392. fc$B1Db, to cast (them) ; comp. of prep, b, and infin. Pehal of Nft*V 
No. 349. 



III. 21, 22.] ANALYSIS. 135 

393. — Yer. 21. prpbsnpSl, in their mantles; comp. of prep. Si, the 
in. plur. noun, ^bsnp, and suff. of 3 m. plur. The noun is derived from 
the quadriliteral verb, bsnp, to cover. What garment it denotes is uncer- 
tain. Many think it signifies loose trousers, such as are still worn in the 
East. Jerome's rendering is, cum braccis suis. 

394. "prPl^tpQ, their tunics, or, perhaps, their turlans; plur. of m. n. 
E?*»tp5, with suff. of 3 m. plur. The derivation is ttJtfiS, the same as tslEB, to 
extend, spread. According to Gesenius and Havernick, the word signifies 
a tunic, or iinder-garment. Others understand it to mean a species of cap, 
the Greek Trerao-o?, and Latin petasus, which words may have been intro- 
duced from the East. Theod. renders it ridpais. According to the Keri, 
the first "» should be omitted, and the word then would be "prPttfafiD, from 
the Segholate form ttftaS. 

395. jinribSHDI, and their cloaks; comp. of conj., plur. of f. n, 
nbsns, and suff. of 3 m. plur. The noun is derived from bsp3, to put 
on, the passive participle of which occurs I. Chron. xv. 27. There is the 
same uncertainty as to the meaning of this word as there is with respect 
to the two preceding words. Bosenmuller thinks this word, and that 
which follows, "pttftnb, denote respectively inner and outer garments. 

396. finttfanb, their garments; comp. of plur. of m. n. Ettnb, i. q. 
Hebr., arid suff. of 3 m. plur. HEJ-'ob, with suff. of 3 m. sing., vii. 9. 

397. VETO, and were cast; comp. of conj. and 3 m. plur. of tense 
Pehil of nXT) or Nftl, No. 349. 

t : t : 

398.— Yer. 22. rm bnp-bs, therefore; ^p, since. 

399. ntH (was) hot; 2 part. Pehal of TITS, No. 388. The _ under 
the first letter is anomalous, as regularly the word would be rUS. The 
form is analogous to the Syriac. 

400. iTTW, exceedingly ;. fem. of adj. "VJjVj No. 194, . used ad- 
verbially. 

401. ^p&TI, (who) took up ; 3 m. plur. pret. Aphel of pD3, i.q. Hebr. 
pp3. The verb is found only in the inf. and imp. Pehal, and in Aphel. 
The cogn. pbp is used in the Preter. Pehal, in Pahel, in Ithpehal, and 
Ithpahal. A question, indeed, may be raised, whether the ]9 form ever ex- 
isted, and whether the forms pD> pDS, &c, are not contracted from pbp% 

pbps, &c. 

402. bttp, slew; 3 m. sing. pret. Pahel of bfcp, No. 87, with (_) in 
place of (__). 



136 ANALYSIS. [III. 23-25. 

403. KMtft the flame ; emph. of m. n. Mttf, i. q. Hebr. MB?. 
Deriv. 22W, unus., £o kindle. 

404. — Yer. 23. finilbri, £A^ ^m?; comp. of ^rib-Pl, constr. of num. 
nbtt, £Ar^, i. q. Hebr. wbw, and suff. of 3 m. plur. Plur. abs. ^fibn, 
thirty, vi. 7. 

405. pnSDB, bound; plur. of 1 part. Panel of nD2>, No. 393. 

[After ver. 23, we find in tbe versions of tbe LXX. and of Theodotion, 
67 verses containing the prayer of Azariah, and the hymn of Hananiah, 
Michael, and Azariah. It is impossible to ascertain the source of this in- 
terpolation. That the passage did not exist in the Chaldee in the time of 
Jerome is plain from his words : — "Hucusque Hebraei legunt : media quae 
sequuntur usque ad finem Cantici trium puerorum in Hebraico non haben- 
tur." In the text, as we have it, there is some want of connexion be- 
tween verses 23 and 24.] 

406. — Yer. 24. FT VI, was amazed; 3 m. sing. pret. Pehal ofverbcogn. 
to n»R 

T T 

407. ^niniinb, to his ministers; comp. of prep. 7, m. n. plur. 
.irn^fj and suff. of 3 m. sing. With suff. of 1 sing. "HSjin, iv. 36 (33). 
Emph. plur. H'HS'^n, vi. 7. Gesenius thinks the noun is the Chald. 
^"OT, leaders, derived from '"OT, i. q. Hebr. 721, to lead, with the 
Hebr. article prefixed, as Hebr. words are sometimes compounded with 
the Arabic article al. Others assign to the word a Persic origin. 

408. Hjrn, did (not) we cast; 1 plur. pret. Pehal of SET], No. 349. 

409. «:r^ true; fern, of adj. rp^, No. 35, used adverbially. 
410 Yer. 25. STT, lo, behold; aninterj.: see No. 274. 

411. roSHN, four; i. q. Hebr. TOSTIN. The masc. form used with 

t : ;- ' * x t t : - 

fem. nouns is 3J2HN. 

412. fnttf, free, unbound; plur. of fcOttf, 2 part. Pehal of tfTW, No. 
141. 

413. yob/IE, .walking ; plur. of 1 part. Aphel of tjbn, i. q. Hebr. 
Tjbn. Michaelis regards it as the part. Pahel contracted for ]"Oy>rT?p, the 
Daghesh of middle radical being omitted. The sing, of the Pahel part, 
tjbnp occurs iv. 29 (26). 

414. bsrn, and hurt; comp. of conj., and m. n. b?n, pain, hurt, de- 
rived from bnn, to hurt, destroy. 

415. H^ycn, the fourth; emphat. of ordinal adj. >V2l. The Keri is 
nWO"), another form of the emphatic state of the adj. 



III. 26-28.] ANALYSIS. 137 

416. nm, (is) like; 1 part. Pehal of NEtt, i. q. Hebr. t\W } to be like. 

417. ~)dh, to a son; comp. of prep, b, and m. n. 121, i.q. Hebr., 
No. 159. *pnbs ~)db, to a son of the Gods, i. e. an angel, see ver 28. 

418. — Yer. 26. nip, drew near; 3 m. sing. pret. of verb, iq. Hebr. 
mp, No. 356. 

419. 3nnb, fo the door ; comp. of prep. 7, and c. n. 3H.P1, No. 306. 

420. ^ni"D2, his servants ; comp. of plur. of m. n. iyp or 1229, No. 
6, and suff. of 3 m. sing. The suff. is here pleonastic. 

421. why, most high; emph. of adj. ^hv. The Keri gives another 
form of the emph. state of the adj., nSv>27, which is the common form : 
see Gr. (124, h). With conj. and prep. V, H^b-I, iv. 34 (31). 

422. i)p-13, come forth ; 2 m. plur. imper. Pehal from pD2, No. 86. 
^pD3 is the plur. of 1 part. Pehal of same verb. For ^3, -IpQ is another 
reading. 

423. VWj and go; comp. of conj., and 2 m. plur. imper. Pehal of 
sris, or nri«, No. 367. 

424. — Yer. 27. *p.! n > (they) see; plur. of 1 part. Pehal of STH, No. 44. 

425. ]intttttt2, over their hody; comp. of prep. 22, the Segholate noun 
UWZ or Bttfel, cogn. to Hebr. Dia, and suff. of 3 m. plur. "With suff. of 
3 m. sing, HEtt?? iv. 33 (30), and with suff. of 3 f. sing. HEttfe, vii. 11. 

426. 1 W-l, and a hair ; comp. of conj., and m. n. 1VW, i. q. Hebr. 
~)Vb. With suff. of 3 m. sing. nTOb. 

427. TpTirin, was singed; 3 m. sing. pret. Ithpahal of Tfin, to burn, 



428. iatt?, were changed; 3 m. plur. pret. Pehal of N3EJ, No. 54. 

429. XT'")}, and the smell; comp. of conj. and f. n., i. q. Hebr. 

430. fTO, passed; 3 f. sing. pret. Pehal of PTO or HIS, No. 129. 
431._y er . 28. *pia, (be) blessed; 2 part. Pehal of "7^22, No. 120. 

432. linnb«, their God; comp. of nbN, No. 74, and suff. of 3 m. 

plur. With prep, b, linnbisb. 

433. PDNbp, /ws messenger; comp. of m. n. "TJNbtt, i. q. Hebr. TjsbB, 
and suff. of 3 m. sing. 

434. ^mnn, have trusted; 3 m. plur. pret. Ithpehal, from VCH- 

435. Y2W, have changed, i. e. have not performed; 3 m. plur. pret. 
Pahel, from «3tt7, No. 54. 

t : ' 

436. sorPI, and have yielded; 3 m. plur. pret. Pehal of 2PP, No. 131. 
}irPEttfa is plural, and should be pointed firPEtffa. The vowels are those 

U 



138 ANALYSIS. [III. 29, 30; IV. 1. 

of the sing. pnptttt, which the marginal note •* "liT indicates to be the 
right reading. " "Who have yielded their bodies (scil. to the fire)." nape- 
bwicav ra aiojuaTa avrwp el? 7rvp, Theod. 

437. ^nbp) they might serve; 3 m. plur. fut. Pehal of ribs, No. 364. 

438. l-YTStD^, they might worship ; 3 m. plur. fat. Pehal of *fcp, No. 346. 
439.— Ver. 29. &b, (is) established ; 2 part. Pehal of UWD, No. 22. 

440. nbtt?, error. The Keri is *hw, f. n. derived from nbtt?, which 

\T T T : 7 

in the Targums is equivalent to the Hebr. rDEJ, and 530). Hence the 
word would seem to signify what is criminal, sinful, iav dirt) (3\aa(j)'r}- 
fxlav, k. t. X., Theod. 

441. in^rP, shall be made; 3 m. sing. fut. Ithpehal of "D3J, No. 19. 

442. njiritt?'], shall be made; 3 m. sing. fut. Ithpahal, from PHE? or 
NIK?, i. q. Hebr. mtP, to place, set, and hence to make or render, like pono 
in Latin. 

443. nb&nb, to deliver; comp. of prep, b, and the infin. Aphel of 
b^, i. q. Hebr. b^2. Same with suff. of 3 m. sing, niTlb&nb, vi. 14. 

444. n2*D, in this manner, thus: see No. 65. As HDT is some- 

t i • t : 

times masculine, some would explain PO'lS here, like this (God). The 
usual signification of H^HS? however, is, thus, in this manner. 

445.— Yer. 30. nb^n, promoted; 3 m. sing. pret. Aphel of nb^, 
i. q. Hebr. nb^. The rendering in the margin of the E. Y., " made to 
prosper," expresses nearly the same meaning as that given in the text, and 
is more literal. Havernick thinks that no more is implied than that the 
friends of Daniel were restored to the oifices to which, as we read ii. 49, 
they had been previously appointed. 



CHAPTER IY. 

446. — Yer. 1 (III. 31*). jiDttbtt?, your peace, welfare; comp. of m. n. 
Ubw, i. q. Hebr. Dibtp, and suff. of 2 m. plur. 

447. HSlttP, be multiplied, increased; 3 m. sing. fut. Pehal from kOtP, 
i. q. Hebr. N5ip, No. 27. Another reading is N^p^, from the cogn. fcOD. 

* The three first verses of the fourth chapter are in many copies of the original a portion 
of the third chapter. As these verses have no connexion with the narrative in the third 
chapter, and plainly relate to what follows, the division of chapters adopted in the English 
Version is to be preferred to the other. To obviate any difficulty as to reference, the num- 
bers, according to both divisions of chapters, are prefixed to each verse. 



IV. 2-5.] ANALYSIS. 139 

448. — Ver. 2 (III. 32). N*riM, the signs, portents ; emph. plur. of c.n. 
JIN, i. q. Hebr. ni«. Plur. abs. \>HA. With suff. of 3 m. sing. VlifiR 
The root is FTIN, ft? w#r£, designate. 

449. N^nftfi), <wm? ^ wonders; emph. plur. of m. n. nft.Pl. Plur. 
abs. ^nan. With suff. of 3 m. plur., irTta. To the verb nan, £o 
wonder in Hebr., corresponds in Chald. PH-Pl, same sign., see No. 406, the 
labials ft and 1 being interchanged. 

450. 1Qtt?j # seemed good ; 3 m. sing. pret. Pehal of verb, i. q. Hebr. 
"lDttf . The primary notion of the verb is that of being polished, bright, 
and beautiful. 3 m. fut. Pehal, "lSttK 

451. — Yer. 3 (III. 33). Hft2, how (great) ; comp of 2, and interrog. 
Hft, wW ? 

452. prftTT, great; plur. of adj. 2n2*n : see No. 48. The signifi- 
cation is intensified in the reduplicated form. 

453. T&pn, mighty; plur. of adj. f\^P\, No. 255. 

454. PJptfibttft, and his dominion ; comp. of conj., m. n. ftDbtt?, derived 
from tebw, No. 243, and suff. of 3 m. sing. With suff. of 3 m. plur. 

p'rnftbtp.' 

455. 11, generation, age; m. n., i. q. Hebr. "lVr. 

456. — Yer. 4 (1). nbttf, (was) secure; 2 part. Pehal, from nbtP, i. q. 
Hebr. rhw, to be safe, secure. 

457. )22rT}t and flourishing; comp. of conj. and. adj. ]33H, i. q. Hebr. 
p3H, literally, green, putting forth leaves. Theod., evOakCbv Iwl toy Opovov 
fiov. 

458. ib^HS, in my palace ; comp. of prep. 2, m. n. b2^n, i. q. Hebr. 
b2^n, a palace, also a temple, and suff. of 1 sing. Emph. wb^n. b^tl, 
perhaps, is derived from bb\ to be powerful, and thence to be great, or 
capacious. 

459. Yer. 5 (2). I, 3s!brn v ), and it terrified me ; comp. of conj., 3 m. 
sing. fut. Pahel of bm, No. 198, and suff. of 1 sing. "0_. The fut. of 
the verb, bnT becomes before the suff. bnT, Gr. (67) ; and the syllable 
2^ is introduced between the verb and the suff., Gr. (69). The use of the 
fut. for the pret. here is to be remarked. This usage is very rare in the 
Chaldee. 

460. l^n-irp, and the thoughts ; comp. of conj., and plur. of m. n. 
"irnn, a thought. The deriv. is "in"in, to think, a Palpel form, from 
n^n, unus. in Pehal. The verb is generally regarded as cogn. to TMT\, 



140 ANALYSIS. [IV. 6-9. 

the sense being to conceive in the mind ; bnt Eiirst thinks that it means 
properly to perceive by the sense of hearing, and he regards the stem "in 
as cogn. to the Lat. aur-is, the Germ, hor-en, and the Eng. hear. 

461. ^aabro^, made me afraid ; comp. of 3 m. plur. fut. Pahel of b/72, 
No. 156, and suff. of 1 sing. With suff. of 3 m. sing. nabrQ\ With sniff, 
of 2 m. sing. TJ-lbnn\ It is doubtful whether J^fvin, as well as S 1TH, 
is to be regarded as the nominative to the verb. The great distinctive 
accent of the word ^3tt7D shows that the Masorets regarded this word 
as terminating a clause, and supposed the verb subst. to be understood, 
" And thoughts (were) upon my bed." " (I had) thoughts or reflections 
on my bed." This seems also to have been the view of Theod., whose 
rendering, however, is not literal. 

462. — Ver. 6 (3). nb^anb, to bring in; comp. of prep., and infin. 
Aphel of bbv : see No. 155. 

463.— Yer. 7 (4). ybbv, entered; m. plur. of 1 part. Pehal of bbv. 
It should be pointed "pbb37. The marginal note indicates that the second 
b should be omitted. The word would then be X^bv, a contracted form 
of the participle. The 3 m. sing. pret. Pehal bv occurs in the following 
verse. 

464. firraip , before them; comp. of prep. Wlf) _, No. 29, and suff. of 
3 m. plur. 

465 Yer. 8 (5). ^nnN, the last; adj., comp. of nn« and "JH. Some 

regard the word as a subst. with an old plur. termination. According to 
the marginal note, the ■» should be omitted. p'TjMrn?, ai ^ w ^ asi - Theod. 
has ews ov 6T6/JO?, having apparently read the word, not ]"TTN, but f^nN, 
another. 

466. Qtt?3, as the name; comp. of conj. 5, and m. n. DE7 : see No. 
122. 

467. T^P.> holy ; plur. of adj. ttfajg, i. q. Hebr. W'Tlty 

468. rnjQM, I told; 1 sing. pret. Pehal of "TBN, No. 4. 

469.— Yer. 9 (6). nVl>, I know; 1 sing. pret. Pehal, from 9T, No. 17. 

470. D3N, troubles, gives trouble; 1 part. Pehal of D3S, i. q. Hebr. 
D3W. In the only place where the verb occurs, Esth. i. 8, it means, to com- 
pel, from which sense that of trouble, annoyance, naturally flowed. Theod. 
renders more strongly than the original, ical irav fivaTrjpiov ovk ahwaiet aoi. 

471. )b^ a tree; m. n. The Hebr. ]ib« means specially the oak. 
The Chald. word is general. Emph. Nab^N. 



IV. 11, 12] ANALYSIS. 141 

472. — Yer. 11 (8). n2*l, grew, became great; 3 m. sing. pret. Pehal of 
verb, i. q. Hebr. nil 

' * T T 

473. ^(pri^ and ivas strong ; comp. of conj., and 3 m. sing. pret. Pehal 
of *10p|, or fpft: see No. 235. 

474. Ntoft^, extended to, reached to; 3 m. sing. fut. Pehal of NtDD. 
This verb represents in Chald. the Hebr. n^E, which is used in the same 
sense. 

475. nriitni, and the sight thereof; comp. of conj., the f. n. riiTn, de- 
rived from J"!Tn, No. 44, and snff. of 3 m. sing. 

476. FpDb, to the end; comp. of prep, b, and m. n., derived from 
^iD, to he finished. Emph. NDiD, vi. 26. 

477.— Yer. 12 (9). PPJDy, «"fo foliage; comp. of m. n. iSJ, i.q. Hebr. 
SD2, from which, according to analogy, the noun would be derived, is not 
in use. The cogn. PfiV means, to cover; and the primary meaning of the 
noun may be, that which covers, spreads a shade. 

478. T»BB$, beautiful; adj., derived from ID W, No. 450. 

479. PT23M1, and its fruit ; comp. of conj., m. n. 2H, and suif. of 3 m. 
sing. According to analogy, the word would be ffiSlM, but, as is usual in 
Chald., the Dagh. forte is resolved into 3. The theme is 22N, unus. in 
Hebr., but of which the Pahel in Chald. signifies to bear fruit. 

480. p^, and food; comp. of conj., and m. n. ]ta, i. q. Hebr. The 
derivation is ]J)T, to feed, unus. in Pehal, of which the 3 m. sing. fut. 
Ithpehal, 'pT.IT, occurs in this verse. 

481. ^Jlinhri, under it; comp. of prep, rhft, same as Hebr. HTIH, 
and suff. of 3 m. sing. 

482. bbteft, took shelter; 3 f. sing. fut. Aphel, from bbfc, i. q. Hebr. 
bbtO, to overshadow. 

483. l »niab5Ci ! l, an ^ in its branches ; comp. of conj., prep. 2, plur. of 
m. n. *)35, i. q. Hebr. ?p37, and suff. of 3 m. sing. The root, P\2V, is 
unus. in Hebr. or Chald., but is probably cogn. to PfiS, to cover, see No. 477. 

484. JYVft, dwelt. The marginal note, 1 "IVP, denotes that the 1 
should be omitted. The word would then be fTTfy 3 ** P^ ur * ^' l* ena ^ 
from 1*ft. The word in the text should be pointed, 'pPT^ the masc * 
The noun ^"lSX is common, so that either reading is admissible. 

485. , nB2,"Mr«fe; constr. plur. of c. n. 1V2, i.q. Hebr. ni32. Plur. 
abs. with conj. 3, V1?? 2 > Yer - 33 ( 30 > plur - em P n - with conj., HjnB2% 
ver. 14 (11). 



142 ANALYSIS. [IV. 13-15. 

486. — Ver. 13 (10). TV, a watcher ; m. n., derived from TiV, to be 
watchful. The plur. abs., )^TV } occurs ver. 17 (14). Such is the common 
interpretation of this word, by which one of the angelic host is plainly de- 
signated. In accordance with this view of the meaning of the word, the 
ancient Fathers of the Church designated angels e^p^opoi. Theod. does 
not translate the word, iBov elp Kal a^to<s, k. t. \. According to another 
view, the word is the same as T% a messenger, V and S being sometimes 
interchanged in Chald. TV then would be synonymous with TjsbD. 
From TV, perhaps, came the name of Iris, the messenger of the gods in 
Grecian theology. 

487. tt^fT), and an holy one, or, and (he too) holy ; comp. of conj., and 
adj. W^p_, No. 467. Some think there is here a hendyadis, tt^j?) TV, 
a holy sentinel, or a holy angel. 

488. .Tins, descended; 1 part. Pehal (see Gr. (39)), from TTft, i. q. 
Hebr. nm 

489. — Yer. 14 (11). itfk, cut ye down; 2 m. plur. imper. Pehal, from 
T&, i. q. Hebr. Tia, to cut. 

490. slS&g), an d l°P y e °ff> com P- of conj, and 2 m. plur. imper. Pahel, 
from V^ft, i i Hebr. V"2j7, to lop off. 

491. ^"IPIK, shake ye off; 2 m. plur. imper. Aphel, from 1J13, i. q. 
Hebr. "iru. The word is evidently onomatopoetic, like Tpdto and rpefiw. 

492. •T1'<D"% and scatter ye; comp. of conj. and 2 m. plur. imper. Pa- 
hel, from "IIS, i. q. Hebr. T73, to scatter. 

493. IpPl, let (the leasts) flee ; 3 f. sing. fut. Pehal, from *VO, i. q. 
Hebr. The fut. is used imperatively. 

494 Yer. 15 (12). IfiV, the stock, or trunk of; constr. of m. n. ^pV, 

i. q. Hebr. IpV. 

495. >nitthttf, his roots; comp. of plur. of m. n. fihtsf, i. q. Hebr. 

496. ^p2E?, leave ye; 2 m. plur. imper. Pehal, from p3tt?, to leave. 
Infin. Pehal with prep, b, pnt^pb. 

497. "lSlDMMj <w*^ m>#A a chain; comp. of conj., prep. 2, and m. n. 
^DN, i. q. Hebr. "fiDN, derived from "IDS, £o foVw?. A verb, as "lDNJT, 
let him he bound, may be here supplied. The sudden transition here from 
the figurative to the literal mode of expression is to be observed. The 
binding with iron and brass, together with all that follows, is applicable, 
not to the tree in the vision, but to the king. 

498. KNrnS, in the tender grass ; comp. of conj., and emph. of S/VT, 



IV. 16, 17.] ANALYSIS. 143 

i. q. Hebr. NttH, the tender herb, Gr. x^orj. In some copies the word is 
read f1Nm3. 

499. bto^l, and with the dew; comp. of conj., prep, 3, and m. n. btp, 
i. q. Hebr., derived from the unus. bbtD, fo moisten. 

500. 372^^, fe£ Aw fo wetted; 3 m. sing. fat. Ithpahal, derived from 
232, i. q. Hebr. 232, to dip, immerse. Cogn. Hebr. VDfc 

501. rrj^bn, his portion; comp. of m. n. pbn, i. q. Hebr. pbn, and 
suff. of 3 m. sing. 

502. 3TO3, in the grass; comp. of prep. 21, and m. n. 3OT, i. q. Hebr. 
nbV. Emph. form with conj. NSfeSft. 

' 503.— Yer. 16 (13). HfitoFjB, from (the heart of) man. 33b must 
be supplied from the previous H33b. The marginal note indicates that 
the 1 in MtttoH, which is the emph. of tt?3M, should be omitted. The 

t t-. - 1 - TV: 

Kethibh should be pointed NtpfaM. 

504. pSttfy £% sMJ change; 3 m. plur. fat. Panel, from HDttf, No. 
54. The plur. of the act. voice is used impersonally. Translate, "his 
heart shall be changed," or, ''let his heart be changed." 

505. 3nVT, shall he given; 3 m. sing. fat. Ithpehal, from 3iT, No. 
131. 

506. J'O'TO, times, i. e. years ; plur. of m. n. )^V, No. 39. Here, and 
in verses 20, 22, 29, and vii. 25, it is generally supposed that ]^1V means 
gears. Havernick, however, contends that the indefinite term yyy cannot 
signify a year, unless the context implies this. He thinks that the word 
is employed here by Nebuchadnezzar, as it naturally would be by a Chal- 
dean, in an astrological sense, denoting a certain period marked by the 
stars, as important in some way ; and he compares the use of tempus in 
Latin : — 

" ignorat quid sidus triste rninetur 
Saturni, quo lseta Venus se proferat astro, 
Qui mensis damnis, quae dentur tempora lucro." 

Juv., Sat. vi. 568-70. 

The number seven he regards merely as a round number, used on account 
of its mystic import. 

507. ^DbrP, shall pass; 3 m. plur. fat. Pehal, from *]bn, i. q. Hebr. 

508. — Yer. 17 (14). f"TO3, ly the decree of; comp. of prep. 3, and 
constr. of f. n. 7T)T2L The noun is derived from 1T2, to cut, and hence 



144 ANALYSIS. [IV. 18. 

to decide, decree: see No. 167. The decree of the watchers (angels, see 
"No. 483) signifies "the decree made by the Almighty surrounded by the 
heavenly host. Comp. Job, i. 6, I. Kings, xxii. 19. The idea of its being 
executed by the angels, His ministers, may also be implied. 

509. "lENft^, and (by) the edict; comp. of conj., and m. n. ^DNft, de- 
rived from "HON, No. 4. The prep. S may be understood. Another read- 
ing is 1BNEQSI. 

510. NPlbNtP, the matter, affair; emph. of f. n. nbsttf, properly a 
question, derived from vNttf, i. q. Hebr. vMttf, and thence any subject of 
inquiry, or matter. Some regard "iftKft as the predicate of the proposition 
of which this word is the subject: "And this decree, or this matter, is 
the sentence of the holy ones," ical prjfia aytivv to eTrepioTrj/jia, Theod. ; but 
the other rendering, according to which this clause is the exact parallel of 
the previous one, is to be preferred. Havernick, closely connecting the 
second of the parallel clauses with that which follows, thus explains the 
whole sentence : — " This matter is by the decree of the angels, and in the 
sentence of the holy ones is the demand (i. e. it is designed or required) 
that the living may know," &c. 

511. t^??i> ti&y ma V know ; 3 m. plur. fat. Pehal of 3?T : see Nos. 17 
and 55. 2 m. sing. fut. SH^PI. 

512. N!2^, he may wish; 3 m. fat. Pehal, from Kjl?, i. q. Hebr. PQ2, 
to will, wish. 1 part. Pehal, N2!£, v. 19. 

513. i?T3DJT, he will give it; comp. of 3 m. sing. fat. Pehal of ]ri3, 
and suff. of 3 f. sing., with the inserted 3—. 

514. bsttfa, and the mean one, or, the meanest, see Gr. (200); comp. 
of conj. and adj., b%W, mean, base. The root is b%W, i. q. Hebr. bstP, 
to be depressed. 

515. Why, over it. The Keri is nby. The Kethibh should be 
pointed Ppb$ ; but the pron. should be fern., agreeing with fTObft. 

Ver. 18 (15). [131 Nftbn TOT. This should be rendered, according 
to Rosenm. — " This I saw as a dream," or, "in a dream," and not as in 
the E. Y. — " This dream I have seen." The latter construction, he 
thinks, is forbidden by the position of the prou. rOT : see, however, No. 
378. The accentuation is in favour of Rosenmuller's view.] 

516. N*ntPQ, The interpretation thereof. The suff. of 3 m. sing, here 
occurs in an unusual form, N_, instead of FT_ : see Gr. (127). This is 
noticed by the Masorets, who also give another reading, N"ltt7Q, the emph. 
form of the noun. 



IV. 19-23.] ANALYSIS. 145 

517. — Yer. 19 (16). DBiflttfN, was astonished; 3 m. sing. pret. 
Ithpohal, from UftW, i. q. Hebr. DDE?, to be astonished. Theod. renders 
the word by anr/veiLer], was speechless, which agrees well with its pri- 
mary sense. Compare the cognate roots UT21 and D^. 

518. TV2W2, comp. of part. 3 3 and f. n. mm, No. 348. n"jn TOttfe, 
about an hour, or, for a short time. As the definite application of the word 
7T2W, to signify an hour, was, probably, of later origin, the second inter- 
pretation is to be preferred. Theod., however, has wael wpav filay. 

519. tjbrQ') {let it not) trouble thee ; comp. of 3 m. sing. fat. Pahel of 
bns, No. 156, and srff. of 2 m. sing. The fat. is used for the imper. 
after the neg. b« : see Gr. (233), 

520. 'WE, my lord; comp. of m. n. N^E, and suff. of 1 sing. It 
should be pointed, "WE. The vowels are those of the Keri, "HE, "IE 
being another form of the noun : see No. 292. 

521. TpSStpb, to thy haters, to them that hate thee; comp. of prep, b, 
the plur. of 1 part. Pehal of NDttt, i. q. Hebr. btttp, and suff. of 2 m. sing. 
There is another reading, TJNDbb, in which the pointing is anomalous. 
According to the Keri, the * of the suff. should be omitted. 

522. TJ"H3?b, to thy enemies ; comp. of prep., plur. of m. n. IV, i. q. 
Hebr., and suff. of 2 m. sing. The theme of "137 is "TO, to burn with 



523.— Yer. 21 (18). JJ3^, dwell; 3 f. plur. fat. Pehal, from )2p, 
i. q. Hebr. ]DE7. This word here is synonymous with flT, ver. 12, and 
"VnPl here is in place of bbtott in the same verse. 

524 — Yer. 22 (19). iTQ-l, thou art become great; 2 m. sing. pret. 
Pehal of Sn"|, No. 472 . The Keri anomalously rejects the \ The 
Kethibh should be pointed JTrn : see Gr. (92) and (93). 3 f. sing. jrOT}. 

525. Mf?/*^, an & thm art become strong ; comp. of conj., and 3 m. sing. 
Pehal of ipF\ } No. 235. 

526. TJJ1SD*"H, and thy greatness ; comp. of conj., f. n. !Q"1> derived 
from N2~), and suff. of 2 m. sing. The abs. form, with the conj., SDTft, 
occurs ver. 36 (33) ; and the emph. form, with the conj., WTO"^, 
v. 18. 

527. fitSE 5 !, and has extended; comp. of conj. and 3 f. sing, of HtDE, 
No. 474. 

528. — Yer. 23 (20). ^rwbaiTl, and destroy it; comp. of conj., 2 m. 
plur. imper. Pahel of bpjl, see No. 414, and suff. of 3 m. sing. 



146 ANALYSIS. [IV.25-27. 

529.— Ver. 25 (22). "H">fy *% *h*tt thrust; plur. of 1 part. Pehal of 
Y]tp, i. q. Hebr. "PIS, fo thrust. Comp. Latin £rw^o, which has the same 
radicals. This and the other active plurals in the verse are used imper- 
sonally. 2 part. TH&, ver. 30 (27). 

530. 'Sp t TP, thy dwelling; comp. of m. n. THlD, derived from *W, 
No. 484, and suff. of 2 m. sing. With suff. of 3 m. sing., Pn*Tp. 

531. jviinp, as oxen ; comp. of part, 2, and plur. of m. n. Tin, i. q. 
Hebr. "lift?. The Greek ravpos is plainly cognate. 

532. ]-1ft^T^, £Aey will make (thee) eat; 3 m. plur. fut. Pehal, from 
D2p: see No." 95. "With suff. of 3 m. sing., nyiBSTQ?, v. 21. 

533. l\M2p, they shall wet (thee) ; plur. of 1 part. Pahel of VD.% No. 
500. 

534. — Yer. 26 (23). Hft*p, secure; fern, of adj. d»p, derived from the 
Pahel of fflp: see No. 130. Masc. with conj., djpl, vi. 26. 

535. ft^bft?, (are) rulers, bear rule; plur. of adj. tfi^bttf, No. 64, writ- 
ten defectively for *pd>btt?. According to the form of expression here used, 
the heavens mean God who dwelleth in the heavens. Theodotion renders the 
last clause of this verse a0' t}s av cyvu)? tyjv e^ovalav 7Yjv ovpaviov. In his 
copy probably ^^tO^v 5 ^ was written defectively both in the final and in the 
penultimate syllable, and he understood it to be the sing. n. ftabfi?, domi- 
nion. 

536. — Yer. 27 (24). *>3bp, my counsel; comp. ofm. n. Tjbp, counsel, 
and suff. of 1 sing. The theme of Tfbp is Tjbp, i. q. Hebr. Tfb», to 
reign, and also to counsel. 

537. HStp^, let (my counsel) be pleasing ; 3 f. sing. fut. Pehal of "IBB?, 
No. 450. 

538. Spdni, and thy sins; comp. of conj., plur. of m. n. ^dPI, and 
suff. of 2 m. sing. The derivation of ^n is StDPf, i. q. Hebr. Hdn. 

° t-: t -:' u t t 

539. np*TS2, fo/ righteousness, or #y alms-giving ; comp. of prep. 2, 
and f. n. HpTS. This noun, i. q. Hebr. Hp^, is used to signify benefi- 
cence, alms-giving, in Chald. writers, and the Hebr. HiTT^ in the Old Test, 
is often rendered ekevfioavvrj by the LXX. However, the opposition be- 
tween r\pl)£ here and the general word, ^ton, is adverse to the restricted 
sense of the former word. 

540. p"lD, break off; 2 m. sing, imper. Pehal, from pnS, i. q. Hebr. 
p'lS. To break off, and thus to get deliverance from, is the proper sense of 
the verb, and from this sense comes that of getting redemption from, re- 



IV. 29.] ANALYSIS. 147 

deeming, which it commonly has in the Chald. paraphrases, being employed 
to explain the Hebr. verb m9, to redeem, of which, however, it is to be 
remarked, that the primary sense is the same, involving the idea of break- 
ing or cutting. Theodotion's rendering is ras aj&apTias gov ev iXerjjuo- 
avvai<$ \vrpwaai. As, however, p"lQ, in the sense of redeeming, has the 
accus. of the person followed by )72, it is better to understand the verb in 
the sense of breaking off, as in the E. Y., the meaning being, " break off 
from, abandon the practice of sin, and substitute for it righteousness." 
From this, the natural interpretation of the passage, we see that it gives 
no support to the inferences deduced from it by Jewish and Eoman Catho- 
lic writers as to the efficacy of works. 

541. Tjri^T., an & thine iniquities; comp. of conj., plur. off. n. JT}3?, 
i. q. Hebr. f\$, and suff. of 2 m. sing. The plur. )*Y2 only is found in 
the Biblical Chaldee. The sing, occurs in the Targums. 

542. ?nft2, by being merciful to ; comp. of prep. 2, and infin. Pehal of 
J3I1, i. q. Hebr. j3n. 

543. X^y.i the afflicted, oppressed; plur. of }"D2, 2 part. Pehal of H2V, 
i. q. Hebr. rra. 

- 1, TT 

544. N3"1N, a lengthening ; f. n. derived from "5J*nM, i. q. Hebr. TJHN, 
to extend. Some understand it to mean here long-suffering ; others, as in 
margin of E. Y., healing, regarding the word as synonymous with the 
Hebr. n^^nS, which means literally a long bandage. See under next 
word. 

545. Tjrnbt^b, to thy tranquillity; comp. of prep, b, f. n. HlbtZ?, 
tranquillity, security, i. q. Hebr. nibtt?, and suff. of 2 m. sing. Some un- 
derstand this word to mean iniquity, connecting it with nbt£? (see No. 
440), and assigning to SS'HH the second interpretation mentioned above, 
thus explain the whole clause, "if perchance long suffering be shown to 
thy transgression." Thus Theod., I'givs earai fiaicpoOv/bLOs Tots •7rapa7rTWfiaGc 
gov 6 06os-. Another interpretation is that in the margin of the E. Y., 
"if it may be a healing of thine error." The rendering in the text of the 
E. Y. is to be preferred to either of these : " if it may be a lengthening of 
thy tranquillity." rTlbttJ is, doubtless, the same as the Hebr. iTlbtt?, and 
H2PN in vii. 12, means a prolonged time. 

546. — Yer. 29 (26). iH^pb, at the end of; comp. of prep, b, and constr. 
off. n. nS,"?, No. 266. "With conj. flSpbl, ver. 34 (31). 

547. "prVV], months ; plur. of m. n. n"]\ i. q. Hebr. H^, a lunar 
month. 



148 ANALYSIS. [IV. 30-33. 



548. "ittft^'Vl, twelve, v-jfl is the constr. of m. form of num. n, ^"JD, 
i.q. Hebr. &$&{ see Gr. (163). See also Gr. (202). 

549. "nynp, walking ; 1 part. Panel, from ^jbn. b^rrb^ means, not 
" in the palace," as in the text of E. V., but, as in the margin, "upon," 
that is, " on the roof of the palace," the roof of the house being a common 
place of resort in the East. Comp. II. Sam. xi. 2. 

550.— Yer. 30 (27). kWYW, this; VH, demonstr. pron., i. q. Hebr. 
ilST. K^n~N*T is equivalent to this present, this before me, hoc ip- 



551. WI2TT, the great; emph. of fern, of adj. 2*1: see No. 63. 

552. Pintail, / have built it; 1 sing. pret. Pehal of N32, i. q. Hebr. 
n33, with suff. of 3 f. sing. Nebuchadnezzar was not, properly speaking, 
the builder of Babylon, which was founded by Nimrod ; but it is common 
to speak of those who enlarge and ornament cities as the builders of them. 
Abydenus, quoted by Eusebius, Prcepar. Evang., ix. 41, states, on the 
authority of Megasthenes, that Nebuchadnezzar surrounded Babylon with 
a triple wall, and otherwise improved the city. 

553. fVOv, for a house of; comp. of prep. b, and constr. of m. n. JT2, 
No. 20. 

554. HP^r*' % ™> e might; comp. of prep. 2, and m. n. ?]PH *• '<!• *)PJ?» 
No. 235. ^pnsi and ^prQ are various readings. 

555. "lf^b), and for the honour of; comp. of conj., prep, b, and constr. 
of m. n. n,T, No. 26. 

556. ^"Iin, my dignity; comp. of m. n. I'JfT, i. q. Hebr TTn, and 
suff. of 1 sing. Emph. with conj/NYtni. The theme is *Tin, i. q. Hebr. 
Tin, to honour. 

557.— Yer. 31 (28). iS2, yet; adv., i.q. Hebr. 

558. DD2, in the mouth; comp. of prep. 3, and m. n. DQ, the mouth, 
i. q. Hebr. HQ. D5 or trB may be contracted from D^lSS, from CS5, to 
swallow. In the radical letters of this verb we may discern those of the 
ultimate root of 7ri/ie\y's, opimus, pinguis, &c. 

559.— Yer. 33 (30). THto, driven; 2 part. Pehal of TTO, No. 529. 

560. Sp«1, he ate; 3 m. sing. fut. Pehal of b?M, No. 357. The fut. is 
used for the pret, as in ver. 5 (2). 

561. ^ntt?33, like eagles 1 (feathers); comp. of part. 3, and plur. of 
m. n. "")tt?3, an eagle, or a vulture. The derivation is 1273, to snatch, carry 
off. Before J'Httfo, "\ y S\p is to be understood, meaning, as applied to eagles, 



IV. 34, 35.] ANALYSIS. 149 

their plumage. Theod. has ws Xeovruv, as if he read ^"TMS, or he may 
have supposed that 1tt?3 meant any animal of prey. 

562. *»rTnBta% and his nails ; comp. of conj., and plur. of m. n. "lSto, 
i. q. Hebr. fl&k' 

563. — Yer. 34(31). *0\&, mine eyes; comp. of plur. of f. n, )^, i. q. 
Hebr., and suif. of 1 sing. Plur. abs. y&fP, constr. ^TV ; but see Gr. 
(141). 

564. nbttD, I lifted up; 1 sing. pret. Pehal of b&3, i. q. Hebr. bft3. 
Cogn. to bl33 are bbfl, nb.Fl, t\ow, fo?fo. 

565. nW?, returned; 3 m. tut. Pehal of nVl, No. 93. 

566. nrm, I Messed; 1 sing. pret. Pahel of tpjn, No. 120. 

567. ^nb^, and him that liveth ; comp. of conj., part, b, and adj. *»n, 
No. 182. 

568. nn2B?, I praised; 1 sing. pret. Pahel of TOE?, No. 145. 

569. JTWn, am*? I honoured; 1 sing. pret. Pahel of TTH: see No. 556. 
2 m. sing. pret. Pahel JT"Hn ; 1 part. Pahel with conj. "Hn^, with Pat- 
tach in place of Tsere in the last syllable, on account of the "1. 

570. — Yer. 35 (32). nb3, as nothing; comp. of prep. 2, and the neg. 
part, nb, i. q. wb. The Masoretic note indicates that n stands for S. The 
use of nb or sb as a subst, nothing, is quite anomalous, but is thought to 
be supported by the use of sb, Job, vi. 21. The reading in the latter pas- 
sage, however, is doubtful. Michaelis thinks that the word here should 
be pointed nbs or Kbs, and then the meaning would be : "and all the 
inhabitants of the whole earth are numbered by him." The ordinary 
reading and interpretation give a far more suitable sense. For a parallel 
sentiment see Isaiah, xl. 17. 

571. r^ETf> (are) estimated; plur. of 2 part. Pehal of nWT, i. q. 
Hebr. nttfn. 

- T 

572. HPSiSpiM, and according to his pleasure ; comp. of conj., particle 
3, infin. Pehal of N22, No. 512, and suff. of 3 m. sing. 

573. TXV, he doeth; 1 part. Pehal of "Q9, No. 19. 2 m. sing. pret. 
Pehal milV, in pause mgl?. 

574. Vns, in the army, or host; comp. of prep. 22, and constr. of 
m. n. Vn : see No. 329. 

575. STO^, will restrain; 3 m. sing. fut. Pahel of HTO, i. q. Hebr. 
Nnft, to strike: see No. 216. The signification of restraining, which the 
Pahel followed by the prep. 22 has, may come from the notion of fastening 



150 ANALYSIS. [IV. 36, 37. 

on, with force and violence, bonds or chains. The same form of expres- 
sion is found in the Targums, and in Syriac. 

Yer. 36 (33). [The clause "01 VVObfc 1|7»V) is thus rendered by 
Theod. : ical els ttjv TLfxrjv ttjs fiaciXeias fxov rjXOov. Kal y ^op<j)'q fiov erre- 
cTpeyJrev eV ijae. He either understands D^nS in the beginning of the 
clause from the previous IMiT, and does not render "H'tn at all, or for 
^VTn he read tXTtn, supposing it to mean, I succeeded. Various modes of 
explaining the sentence have been proposed. The E. Y., which requires 
nothing to be supplied, seems free from objection]. 

576. ">2rn^ni, and my nobles, magnates mei; comp. of conj., plur. m. n. 
]3>"£H, unus. in sing., and suff. of 1 sing. ]yQ*l * s derived from yi, 
great. With prep. 7 and suff. of 3 m. sing, '♦niairO'T 1 ?, v. 1 ; and with 
conj. and suff. of 3 m. sing. ■'TTDnTO'll, v. 2. 

577. ftypryn, I was established; 1 sing. pret. Hophal, from )\2F\, i. q. 
Hebr. JjVi. The Hebr. conjugation Hophal is used for the Chald. Itta- 
phal, see Gr. (29). The form here is anomalous, in having __ in place of _ 
in the final syllable. 

578. riDD^n, was added; 3 f. sing. pret. Hophal, from ^p^, i. q. Hebr. 
?)D\ The compound Sheva under a non-guttural after a long syllable is 
not uncommon in Chaldee. Another instance occurs, vi. 22, *")3D;1. The 
same happens in Hebr. : see Ges. Gr. § 10, 2, Rem. 

579 — Yer. 37 (34). DpYlE}, and extol; comp. of conj., and 1 part. 
Pahel of Dip, i. q. Hebr. 

580. ^niTOD, his works; plur. of m. n. T32E, i. q. Hebr. HOTD, 
and suff. of 3 m. sing. 

581. ffirirnrfl, and his ways ; comp. of conj., plur. of f.n. NrHN, i. q. 
Hebr. rn_K and suff. of 3 m. sing. To n"]M the root is cogn. the Greek 
epxofiat. Plur. with suff. of 2 m. sing. 'JjnmM v. 23. 

582. ]V^ [, justice; m. n., i. q. Hebr. 

583. HISS, in pride; comp. of prep. 3, and f. n. 7115, i. q. Hebr. 
rTO is contracted from H1S2, the root being HM2, to be raised, elated. 

T" T-!-' ° TT * 

584. nbQG?nb, to abase, cast down; comp. of prep, b, and infin. Aphel 
of bsttf: see No. 514. 



V. 1, 2.] ANALYSIS. 151 



CHAPTER V. 

585. — Yer. 1. *")&NE?b2, Belshazzar ; pr. n., which, differs only by one 
letter from the name, ISWttfai 1 ?^ given to Daniel, and probably had the 
same signification. From vers. 2, 11, 13, 18, 22, it would appear that 
Belshazzar was the son of Nebuchadnezzar ; but this agrees neither with 
profane history nor with the statements of the prophet Jeremiah, who 
speaks of Evilmerodach as the successor of Nebuchadnezzar, and who re- 
cords the prophecy (xxvii. 7) that the Jews and other nations should serve 
Nebuchadnezzar, and his son, and his son's son, whereas Belshazzar was 
the last King of Babylon. Nebuchadnezzar, being the grandfather of Bel- 
shazzar, may be here spoken of as his father, in the same way that Saul 
is spoken of as the father of Mephibosheth (II. Sam. ix. 7), though being 
his grandfather. If we rely on statements of Berosus, adopted by Josephus 
and Jerome, Belshazzar should be identified with Nabonnedus, a more re- 
mote descendant of Nebuchadnezzar ; but still there would be a difficulty 
in reconciling Scripture with profane history, as Berosus states that Na- 
bonnedus was spared by Cyrus. Col. Rawlinson states that he has dis- 
covered the true solution of the difficulty in a cuneiform inscription on 
a clay cylinder, found at Um-queer (the ancient Ur of the Chaldees). 
His communication will be seen in the "Athenaeum" of March 8, 
1854. 

586. Dnb, a feast; c. n., i. q. Hebr. Oflb. 

587. ?]bN, a thousand; also *)bN, num. n., i. q. Hebr. ^bw. Emph. 
S2b«. Plur. abs. ^thx, for which we have D s 5b«, vii. 10, with the 
Hebr. termination. 

588. K~ipn, wine ; emph. of m. n. *"")Dn, i. q. Hebr. "lOT, derived 
from "ian, to ferment. 

589. nnw, drank ; 1 part Pehal, from T\r\W, i. q. Hebr. nnw. 3 

■• t ' x ' t : ■*■ TT 

m. plur. fut. Pehal with conj. jifittfn Plur. of 1 part. ^HW. 

590. — Yer. 2. D3?tD2, in tasting, i.e. as he tasted, or drank; comp. of 
prep. 21, and m. n. D^tp, No. 95. Some Jewish commentators, giving. 
UVte its derived sense, maintain that the meaning here is, "he spoke in 
the counsel of wine," i. e. he spoke under the influence of his cups, or 
what the wine suggested ; but this is forced, and it is better to understand 
the word in its literal sense. eV ttj <yevaet -rod olvov, Theod. 

591. ^2Kftb, the vessels ; comp. of part, b, and S 2ND, constr. plur. of 



152 ANALYSIS. [V. 3-5. 

m. n. }NB, which is probably derived from J"T3N, to hold, retain. Emph. 
plur. with conj. H>2NEbl, yer. 23. 

592. t|S2n, orougM forth; 3 m. sing. pret. Aphel, from^CD, No. 86. 
3 m. plur. pret. Aphel sipBan. 

593. DbtP-YTS, in Jerusalem; comp. of prep. 2, and pr. n. Dbfifa"^, 
i.q. Hebr. D^bttfcnV 

x •- t : 

594. Firhsal), his wives ; comp. of plur. of f. n. bStiP, i. q. Hebr., and 
suff. of 3 m. sing. Another reading is PTribSEJ. "With suff. of 2 m. sing. 
"nnbStP. b^ltP is derived from b^KJ, concumbere. 

' t t : ■• t •• - t 7 

595. rTJnDnb^, and his concubines; comp. of conj., plur. off. n. H^llb, 
and suff. of 3 m. sing. With conj. and suff. of 2 m. plur. "jjnsnb-X The 
root of iisnb is ]nb, to be lustful. Comp. Gr. Xa^vos. 

596. — Yer. 3. VJTn, they brought forth; 3 m. plur. pret. Aphel of 
Sn«, No. 323. 

597. V£ltt?M1, and they drank; comp. of conj., and VPIE7N, 3 m. plur. 
pret. Pehal of TIHW, No. 588, with « prosthetic : see Gr. (11). 

598. — Yer. 4. !in2tth, and they praised; comp. of conj., and 3 m. plur. 
pret. Pehal of rptt?, No.' 145. 

599. TON, wood; emph. ofm. n. 2N, i.q. Hebr. fV, of which it is a 
softened form, V being changed into N, and 2 into V. 

600 Yer. 5. IpDD, came forth. The Keri is HpDD, 3 f . plur. Pehal 

of pD3, No. 86. The Kethibh is the masc, and should be pointed !)p£}3. 
]372l!£N is comm., which accounts for the different readings. 

601. pro"), and wrote; comp. of conj., andf. plur. of 1 part. Pehal of 

nns, i. q. Hebr. nns. 

602. KPlttnnjJ, the lamp, or the chandelier; emph. off. n. NttJ"lS3, de- 
rived from the quadriliteral unus. root fiHlU, to shine, comp. of "7*pj="l!0 

, ft f 

and E7N, fire. The verb .»;ni is used in the Syriac. Buxtorf notices 

the fanciful derivation of the word given by P. Saadias, quasi N/HtP 13 "0, 

lychnuchus filius anni, that is, a lamp burning for a year. 

603. NTS, the plaster; emph. of m. n. T>2, The root is the unus., 
1^, to burn, the plaster being composed of lime which is macerated by 
combustion. 

604. briS, the wall; m. n., i. q. Hebr. bi!3, from unus. root, brD, to 
compress, perhaps as being made of compressed clay. 

605. DQ, the part; m. n., i. q. Hebr., derived from the root DD5. 
DQ means literally the extremity, and N"P DQ probably means merely the 



V. 6, 7.] ANALYSIS. 153 

hand, tovs aa7pa^akovs t?/? x ei P°*> Theod. Emph. sing. SDQ, ver. 
24. 

606. — Ver. 6. ^nilT, lit. his splendours; comp. of plur. of m. n. Vt, No. 
193, and suff. of 3 m. sing. "With conj. and suff. of 2 m. sing. TpW, 
ver. 10. The word refers to the king's bright and cheerful countenance. 
y fiopcfrri, Theod. S2b)!3 is a nom. abs. 

607. ••n'fott?, were changed in him; comp. of 3 m. plur. pret. Pehal of 
S2E7, No. 54, and suff. of 3 m. sing. The use of the suffix with the 
neuter verb is to be remarked. The same idea is expressed differently, 
ver. 9, nib? ^Xti TTt*, where )^W is the plur. of 1 part. Pehal. 

608. 'Htop'), and the ligaments of; comp. of conj., and constr. plur. of 
m. n. Itep, a knot or ligament, and also figuratively, a knotty or per- 
plexing question-, see verses 12, 16. Plur. abs. J"Httj5< The root is *1tfip, 
i. q. Hebr. IWp, to bind, in which word are seen the two first radicals of 
the Latin catena. 

609. n^nn, his loins; comp. of m. n. V"!0> an ^ m ^- °f ** m * &ng. 
YHjl is i. q, as sing, of Hebr. D**sbn, b and *i being interchanged, and is 
used by Onkelos to render the Hebr. D^fiD. 

610. r/Vlttto, were loosed; m. plur. of part. Ithpahal of XHW, No. 
141. 

611. PTrQSnS"), and his knees; comp. of conj., plur. of f. n. rQ-ISHN, 
and suff. of 3 m. sing. rQ3"lH is written in the Targums msD"!, with-* 

t ... : - t : 

out the prosthetic S ; and n^D"1, by a transposition of letters, is formed 
from rDH2, i. q. Hebr. D*3"12L The suff. is that of the sing, form : see 
Gr. (131). 

612. ]tt?p3, struck; fern. plur. of 1 part. Pehal of tt?|2D, to knock or 
strike. The Hebr. tt?J?a signifies, to cast a noose over, ensnare. Sib SI, 
this against that, against one another, ra tyovwm avtov aweicpoTovvTo, 
Theod. 

613 Ver. 7. mfP, shall read; 3 m. fut. Pehal. from WJ?, No. 328. 

1 sing. rnpM. 3 m. plur. Thp\ Infin - Pehal with prep, b, fcnpfilb. 
The sense of reading, reciting, which this verb has, is secondary, the pri- 
mary sense being, to cry, or speak aloud. 

614. rQHS, writing ; f. n., derived from SPD, i. q. Hebr. 2fi3, to 
write. "With conj. bQrp*!, ver. 24. 

615. "OaSHT, will show me ; 3 m. sing. fut. Pahel of mn, No. 8, 
with suff. of 1 sing. 

616. S212nS, purple raiment ; emph. of m. n. }*CnS, i. q. Hebr. JttSnH, 

Y 



154 ANALYSIS. [V. 9, 10. 

for which the Chald. form is used, II. Chron. ii. 6. The origin of the 
word is uncertain. 

617. EJsV, shall put on; 3 m. fut. Pehal, from tthb, i.q. Hebr. ttfob. 
2 m. sing. fut. ttfibfi. The vowel of the final syllable is __, which is 
common in intransitive verbs. 

618. fcOiaEn'l, and a collar ; comp. ofconj., andemph. ofm. n. TfOOT, 
a collar or necklace. Gr. /xaviaK^, The vowels are those of the Keri 
fcO^ftn. Another reading is fcODTOnX The word is the same as the 

t * : ~^q=i=p- t - : - : 

Syriac pi V)CTl, by which YQ*l is rendered, Gen. xli. 42. The 71 is 
prosthetic, and the final syllable Tp__ marks the diminutive. The root 
fft is probably connected with the Greek [irjv, indicating the crescent-like 
shape of the ornament. The radical letters are found in the Latin monile, 
as well as in the Greek /naviaK-rfs. 

619. PPM?, his neck; comp. ofm. n. ">M2, i. q. Hebr. TWS, and suff. 
of 3 m. sing. With suff. of 2 m. sing. tfTW)?. 

620. i£lbrn, and (as) third '; comp. of conj., andord. adj. \Flbpl, derived 
from nbfi, i.q. Hebr. ttJbttfr. As the common form of the ord. is wbn, 

t : x t - • : 

and as in the Targums Sttbri, the emph. of ^bri, which in verses 16, 29, 
stands for ^l^lb^l here, means the third part, Michaelis thinks the correct 
interpretation here may be, " and he shall rule over the third part in my 
kingdom." The principal objection to this is, that u?W is always fol- 
lowed by either 7V or 3. t/o/tos iv irj (3 a <n\eia juov aptjei, Theod. The 
king's son was second to him in rank and power, and next to the son, or 
third, was the chief satrap. Havernick thinks that the form of the ordi- 
nal here used is to be distinguished from the common form, and has a pe- 
culiar and definite sense, referring to descent, or employment (here, of course, 
to the latter). The use by the writer of the common form of the ordinal, 
^irbn, ii. 39, is some confirmation of Havernick' s opinion. 

621. — Yer. 9. brpHtt, (was) troubled; part. Ithpahal, from bil22, 
No. 156. 

622. "ptt?2.ntt?jp, (were) astonished; plur. of part. Ithpahal, from 
W*2W, unus. in Pehal, properly, to interweave ; and hence, in Pahel, to 
perplex. 

623.— Yer. 10. Hrobft, the queen; emph. of f. n. mb». i.q. Hebr. 
The queen here means the queen-mother. The wives of Belshazzar were 
present at the feast, ver. 2. 

624. n^tt?^, drinking, banqueting; emph. off. n. nntPB, i. q. Hebr., 
derived from 71 HW, No. 589. 



V. 11-13.] ANALYSIS. 155 

625. rhhv, entered; 3 f. pret. Pehal of \hv, No. 101. The second 
v is superfluous, as is indicated in the marg. note. 

626. — Yer. 11. -TTTO, light, illumination; f. n., derived from nna, 
to shine. 

627. ^nbDtp"), and wisdom; comp. of conj., and f.n. ^nb^b, derived 
from s2W, to behold, consider. 

[The nominatives '"ftl H2b^, are to be taken absolutely, " and as to 
the king thy ancestor Nebuchadnezzar." This, on account of the accentu- 
ation, is better than to suppose an iwavavak'rj^ri's, as in the Yulgate 
and E. V. Theod. does not appear to have noticed the repetition of the 
nominatives.] 

628. — Yer. 12. IttfSft, an interpreter; 1 part. Pahelof 1E75: see No. 7. 
Infin. Pehal with prep. S, ItttDBb. 

629. iTinSI, and showing of, discovery of; comp. of conj., and constr. 
off. n. n^inH, which is properly the infin. Aphel of (Tin, No. 8. 

630. ]TnM, enigmas, difficult questions ; plur. of f. n. nTPTS, i. q. 
Hebr. 51Tn, the S being prosthetic. The Hebr. verb "T^in signifies, to 
propose an enigma or parable. The noun may be derived from this verb, 
or the verb is perhaps a denom., and the noun may be written HTn for 
iTin, from the root 71J1, to he sharp; signifying literally, an acute or 
ingenious saying. Others regard the noun as properly the 2 part. Pehal, 
from ins, to hold, and hence, to keep secret. This was the view of Theod., 
who renders the word Kpa-rovjxeva. 

631. fcTitfc), and of one who solves; comp. of conj., and 1 part. Pahel 
of VTW, or H1K7, No. 141. Infin. Pehal with prep, b, Nnttfeb. The 
noun •isrtab must be understood before N"1tt7D. The whole sentence 

t : : t "t : 

may be rendered, " Because that an excellent spirit, and knowledge, and 
the wisdom of an interpreter of dreams, and a showing of enigmatical 
sayings, and (the wisdom) of one who solves perplexing questions, have 
been found in him, in Daniel," &c. The verb is feminine, though one of 
the nominatives, 3^3B, is masc. Michaelis thinks that TVH is the only 
nominative in the sentence, and would render it, " because an excellent 
spirit, and (a spirit) of knowledge, and of wisdom," &c. 

632. WnpiT, let {Daniel) be called; 3 m. fut. Ithpehal, from Nip, 
No. 328. 

633. rTinn\ he will slioiv ; 3 m. sing. fut. Aphel of Hin, No. 8. 
634. — Yer. 13. hV71, was brought ; 3 m. pret. Hophal, from T?Sf, No. 

101. 3 m. plur. fen." 



156 ANALYSIS. [V. 14-20. 

[The relative ^ after TliT may have for its antecedent either bfcWH, 
or MH-lba. Theod. makes it the latter, tms alxp*b>u><ria9 rj? rj^a^ev 

T T 

K. T. A-.]. 

635. V"PH, brought away: 3 m. sing. pret. Aphel of nfiN, No. 323. 

[The marginal note directs attention to the anomaly of *ON being 
Milhel. The word is otherwise irregular, in having __ in place of _ in 
the first syllable.] 

636 Yer. 14. TOfctth, and I have heard ; comp. of conj., audi sing. 

pret. Pahel of VfcW, i. q. Hebr. VftW. The Ithpehal is used in the sense 
of being obedient, vii. 27. 

637.— Yer. 16. bain, thou art able. The Keri is ban, 2 m. sing. fut. 
Pehal of by. The Kethibh is the Hebr. Hophal form, and would be 
pointed regularly b^n : see No. 61. 

638. — Yer. 17. nn, give; 2 m. sing, imper. Pehal of nTT, No. 131. 

639. na^ninW, I will make known to him; 1 sing. fut. Aphel of 37T, 
No. 17, with suff. of 3 m. sing. 

640. — Yer. 19. "p3?NT, trembling; m. plur. of 1 part. Pehel, from 3ftT, 
i. q. Hebr. Cogn. to this verb are oWw, aevw. The Keri is YVy : see 
Parad. P. 

641. "pbnTE and fearing; comp. of conj., and m. plur. of 1 part. Pe- 
hal of brtt, No. 198. 

642. bttjj killing; 1 part. Pehal of bfcp, No. 87. 

643. NTO, preserving alive ; 1 part. Aphel, from S^n, contracted for 
fcWTO. ^n^ is another reading. Theodotion's version, kcu ov ipovXe-ro 
avibv ervTrrev, shows that he regarded SHE as the part, of Mnp, to strike. 
Similarly the Yulg., " et quos volebat, percutiebat." The opposition be- 
tween D'HD and bSEJE in the third and fourth clauses of the sentence, 
requiring a similar opposition between bftp and NTO in the first and se- 
cond, seems decisive against the rendering of Theod. and the Yulg. 

644. D'HID, raising up; 1 part. Aphel of OV), No, 579. 

645. bSttfo, depressing; 1 part. Aphel of bstp, No. 586. 2 m. sing, 
pret. Aphel, flbsttfn, ver. 22. 

646.— Yer. 20. t^H, was lifted up; 2 part. Pehal of On, No. 579. 

647. nrPPfl, and his spirit; comp. of conj., m. n. TVD, No. 35, and 
suff. of 3 m. sing. 

648. n%pF), was hardened; 3 f. sing. pret. Pehal of *]pM. No. 235. 

649. mtnb, to be proud, to pride; comp. of prep, b, and infin. Aphel 



V. 21-25.] ANALYSIS. 157 

of "fit, to act with pride or wantonness, i. q. Hebr. The primary sense of 
the verb is to ferment, to boil as water. Comp. Gr. £eV 

650. nnsn, he was cast down, deposed; 3 m. pret. Hophal, from nn3, 
No. 488. 

651. NtH3, the throne; m. n., i. q. Hebr. S&3, D being changed into 
D"l. Plnr. abs. ^D~i3 ; sing, with sun°. of 3 m. sing. FPtHS, vii. 9. 

652. mpj and the glory ; comp. of conj., and emph. of m. n. 1p>, No. 
26. -Mnp^ is another reading. The reading in the text shonld be 
pointed pnj^V and his glory. 

653. "P^H, they caused to pass away, they took away ; 3 m. plur. pret. 
Aphel, from HIV, No. 129. The 3 m. plnr. active is nsed impersonally. 

654. — Yer. 21. ^W, he made, or he gave; 3 m. sing. pret. Pahel, from 
WW, No. 442. The verb followed by UV signifies to make like to, or equal 
to, so the translation may be, as in margin of E. Y., "he made his heart 
eqnal with the beasts." As it is not likely that this would be attributed 
to Nebuchadnezzar, it may be better to regard ^tt? as used impersonally. 
Wlp, the 3 m. plnr., the more usual way of expressing the impersonal 
sense, is another reading, ij xapBia avrov /iera -rCbv Orjpiivv kdoOrj, Theod. 

655. M*TTO> the wild asses ; emph. plur. of m. n. TTO, i q. Hebr. 

Tra. 

T 

Yer. 22. [ysf b!2j7"b3 is here rendered by some, though, as in E. Y. It 
is better, however, to retain the usual signification of the phrase, because, 
and the verse may be thus explained : — "Thou hast not humbled thine heart, 
(which thou shouldst have done) because thou knowest all this."] 

656. n2?T, thou knowest; 2 m. sing. pret. Pehal, from 27T : see Gr. 
(40). 

657— Yer. 23. nppi"inn, thou hast lifted thyself up ; 2 m. sing. pret. 
Ithpolal, from D 1 )""), No. 579 ; both the conjugation and manner of inflexion 
are Hebr. 

658. TjTOEb, thy breath, or, life ; comp. of f. n. HDfifa, i. q. Hebr. 
nttfi?3, and suff. of 2 m. sing. 

[It is to be observed that the relative ^ is understood before "TjnmS^bs, 
" and whose are all thy ways," i. e. on whom depend all thy under- 
takings.] 

659 Yer. 24. JTbttf, (was) sent; 2 part. Pehal of rhw, No. 314. 

660. D^tth, (was) written; 2 part. Pehal of Dtth, i.q. Hebr. OHh, to 
write. 

661.— Yer. 25. sap, numbered; 2 part. Pehal of N3£ or P!3E>, No. 152. 



158 ANALYSIS. [V. 26-29. 

662. bpri, weighed; 2 part. Pehal of b^tt, i. q. Hebr. bj?tP, to weigh. 
Regularly the part, would be b^ftR 

663. i , '01E>!|, and divided; comp. of conj., and m. plur. of 1 part. Pe- 
hal of D*nQ, i. q. Hebr. D~l5, to divide. The plur. masc. of the active part, 
is used impersonally for the sing, of the passive, according to the common 
idiom. The pass. sing. DHQ is used in ver. 28 as identical in meaning. 
Theod., doubtless lest perplexity should arise from the different forms of 
the word, represented each in Greek characters by the same word, 0a/>e?. 
The word ^DHQ also signifies Persians, and some think that it refers both 
to the division of the kingdom, and to the Persians, who subverted it. 
"In voce l^pnQ v7raivigi<s occurrit, non enim dividendi solum significatum 
obtinet, sed et ad Persas, excidii Babylonici auctores alluditur." — Glass., 
Phil. Sacr., vol. i. p. 1321. 

664. — Yer. 26. nrabEPrn and hath finished it ; comp. of conj., 3 m. 
sing. pret. Aphel, from DbttJ, to finish, and suif. of 3 f. sing. The Hebr. 
Dbttf" is neuter in signification, meaning to be complete, secure. 

665 Yer. 27. Snb^n, thou art weighed; 2 m. sing. (Hebr. inn.) of 

tense Pehil of bjTFl, No. 662. 

666. S^T^DS, in the balance, or, scales ; comp. of prep. 2, and emph. 
of dual n. igtrfo, i. q. Hebr. Mttte. The Hebr. root is }t«, to weigh. 
For a similar figure to that in the text, comp. Job, xxxi. 6. 

667. .FirDPtprn, and thou art found; comp. of conj., and 2 m. sing. 
Ithpehal of mxp, No. 157. 

668. TDn, deficient, wanting in weight ; adj. of which the correspond- 
ing verb does not occur in Biblical Chaldee. The Hebr. verb "ion signi- 
nies to be deficient. 

669.— Yer. 28. none, is divided; 3 f. sing, of tense Pehil of Dn_Q, 
No. 663. 

670. rQ^rP*), and is given ; comp. of conj., and 3 f. sing, of tense Pe- 
hil of nrn, No. 131. 

671. *Hftb, to the Mede; comp. of prep, b, and gent. adj. "HD. The 
same word is the name of the country Media. By the Mede is designated 
Darius, or the n. may be collective. 

672. DHS^, and the Persian; comp. of conj., and gent. adj. D^Q, 
in pause D"1Q. The name of the country is the same. By the Per- 
sian is designated Cyrus, the uncle of Darius, if the noun be not col- 
lective. 

673. — Yer. 29. ^tPSbni, and they arrayed, or that they should array ; 



V. 30-31; VI. 1-3.] ANALYSIS. 159 

comp. of conj., and 3 m. plur. pret. Aphel of ttnb, No. 617. The plural 
is used impersonally for the sing, passive. 

674.— Yer. 30. V*ipp, (was) slain; 2 part. Pehil of bttp, No. 87. 

675. !)t"prn, and (that) they should make proclamation; comp. of 
conj., 3 m. plur. pret. Aphel of THS* see No. 327. The plural is used im- 
personally. 

676. — Yer. 31 (YI. 1). tth'nTl, and Darius; comp. of conj., and prop, 
n. tt^YHT Gesenius thinks the name .to be of Persic origin. This Darius 
was the same as Cyaxares II., of profane history, the son and successor of 
Astyages, who was the same as Ahasuerus : see ch. ix. 1 . 

677. N^E, the Mede; emph. of *HE, No. 671. The Keri is nNTO. 

ttt' x -t ttt 

678. bS|7, tool; 3 m. sing. pret. Pehal of bnp, No. 28. 

['VH *H3, literally, "as the son of sixty-two years," i. e. according to 
a well-known idiom which is found also in the Hebr., "being sixty-two 
years old."] 

679. 'pptt?, years; irreg. plur. off. n. nattf, i.q. Hebr. rntp. 

680. ?\FnrVl, and two; comp. of conj., and fern, num., i.q. Hebr. 
h)yti. The masc. is ^HR 

CHAPTER VI. 

681. — Ver. 1.* riMft, an hundred; num. n., i.q. Hebr. HMZ3. The 

t : x t •• 

dual fVIHE occurs Ezr. vi. 17. 

682. "pnbS?*), and twenty ; comp. of conj., and plur. of num. n. 1WV, 
ten. 

683. — Yer. 2. sb^l, and over; comp. of conj., and prep. sb^, in 
the Targums vh^, which, followed by ]D, has the same sign, as b^. 

684. "p^HD, presidents; plur. of m. n. ty^D. The word does not occur 
inBibl. Chald., except in this chapter. It may be connected with the Hebr. 
~)W, the D being formative. Plur. emph. NO'lD, ver. 13. Plur. constr. 
"OHD, ver. 7. 

685. Ntp3Jg, account; emph. of m. n. D37tp, No. 95. 

686. pTp, injured, wronged; 1 part. Pehal of pT3, to suffer injury, or 

loss. 07rtvs 6 fiaaiXeus fiTj euo , )(\^Tai, Theod. 

687 Yer. 3. n&3fiE, preferred, E. Y., or rather pre-eminent ; part. 

Ithpahal, from TO2, i. q. Hebr. TO3, to conquer, surpass. 

* In some editions the sixth chapter commences with what in the E. V. is ver. 31 of 
the fifth chapter. The verses are numhered here as in the E. V. 



160 ANALYSTS. [VI. 4-7. 

688. JTttfr, thought, purposed ; 3 m. sing. pret. Pehal(see Gr. (44)) of 
verb, i. q. Hebr. HOT. 

689. PTJTWEpnb, to appoint him ; comp. of prep, b, infin. Aphel of 
D^p, No. 130, and suff. of 3 m. sing. 

,690. — Ver. 4. rib's, a pretext, ot grounds of accusation ; f. n., i. q. Syr. 

691. *TSp, Mi reference to, in connexion with; comp. of prep. ]ft, and 
m. n. *7^, i. q. Hebr., a side qy part. 

692. nfTPTttfa, and fault, wrong -dealing ; f. n., derived from nflB?: 
see No. 50. 

693. ft^np, faithful; see No. 284. 

694. — Yer. 5. n"T3, mj £Ae ?#w, or in the religion; comp. of prep. 3, 
and f. n. /TT, No. 48. 

695. Ver. 6. sjttfsnn, came tumultuously ; 3 m. plur. pret. Aphel, from 
ttfo-l, i. q. Hebr. 1272"), to he tumultuous. 

696. — Ver. 7. Jlta^fiN, AdW0 consulted together; 3 m. plur. pret. Ith- 
pahel, from tap 1 ), i. q. Hebr. Y^N ^ consult. 

697. n£*pb, fo establish; comp. of prep, b, and infin. Panel of D*p, 
No. 130. 

698. D*p, # statute; m. n., derived from C*)p. "With conj. U*\)\ 
ver. 15. The clause '121 nD*pb is commonly explained as in the E. Y., 
to establish a royal statute : HSbft being regarded as the gen. But the fact 
that D^p has the distinctive accent Pashta shows that the Masorets took a 

t': 

different view of the connexion of the words. The correct rendering 
probably is, that the Icing may establish a statute. This, too, accords better 
with the following verse. 

699. rtDprib^, and to ratify ; comp. of conj., prep, b, and infin. Pahel 
of ?)pn, No. 235. 

700. 1DN, an interdict; m. n., properly signifying a chain or bond, 
from ")pM, i. q. Hebr. "IDS, to bind. "1DN, to bind, signifies to forbid in 
the Rabbinical writings, as *Win, to loose, signifies to allow, or permit. 
Emph. fcnDM, ver. 8 ; with conj. HTDHV, ver. 9. 

701. TO3, a petition; f. n., derived from N23, No. 88. With suff. 
of 3 m. sing. PTfWa, ver. 13. 

702. 3hb, into the pit or den ; comp. of prep, b, and m. n. 32 appa- 
rently i. q. Hebr. 32, a pit. The Hebr. verb 35)2 means to cut, dig. 
Emph. with prep, b, N32b, ver. 16. 



VI. 8-10.] ANALYSIS. 161 

703. Wnrns, lions; emph. plur. of c. n. n*n», i. q. Hebr. Plur. abs. 

V}T^> as ^ from sin £' ^1^' Sin S- ^^ ?* n !H^3, ^i- 4 - 

704 — Yer. 8. DETirn, <ww? ^n'^, i. e. or^r £o be written ; comp. of 
conj., and 2 m. sing. fat. Pehal of Dtth, No. 660. 2|m. sing. pret. 
Pehal TOET), yer. 12. 

t : - : 

705. Tl^Wnb, (ivhich is not) to be changed, lit. to change; comp. of 
prep, b, and iniin. Aphel of SJttf, No. 54. Ahasuerus says, Esth., 
viii. 8, that "the writing which is written in the king's name, and sealed 
with the king's ring, may no man reverse." See also Esth. i. 19. 

706. iTTS, according to the law ; comp. of 5, and constr. of f. n. HI, 
No. 48. 

707. fcWri, shall pass away, i. e. be abrogated; 3 f. sing. fut. Pehal, 
from N"72, No. 129. 

708. — Yer. 10. ) >r O\ and the windows; comp. of conj., and plur. of 
m. n. 13. The root VD, which is unus., had probably the signification of 
cutting out, excavating. Comp. the Latin emus, and the cogn. verbs in 

Hebr. nnjj, npj, nj2\ 

709. frpriQ, {were) open,; f. plur. of 2 part. Pehal of nilS, to open, 
i. q. Hebr. nHS. The 3 m. plur. JtfTriQ of the tense Pehil occurs vii. 10. 

710. nTiTpySl, in his upper chamber ; comp. of prep. 22, f. n. iTy^, 
and suff. of 3 m. sing. H^pV i. q. Hebr. PP 1 ?^ means the upper part of 
a house, Gr. vTrepwov. 

711. TO, towards; prep., i. q. Hebr. In Solomon's prayer, I. Kings, 
viii. 48, it is prescribed to the Jews, when in strange lands, to pray to- 
wards their land, that is, with the face turned towards Jerusalem. 

712. Spa, (was) kneeling; 1 part. Pehal of *p_3, No. 120. The 
pret. Pahel has the same form, but would signify he blessed : see iv. 34 
(31). 

713. '•rTtonS, his knees; comp. of plur. of m. n. TpS, i-q. Hebr., and 
suff. of 3 m. sing. 

714. n\?^J), and making supplication; comp. of conj., and 1 part. Pahel, 
from sb^, unus. in Pehal. 

715. riD^, former time; constr. off. n. 71727p_, i. q. Hebr. nttlj? ]D 
Tiyi, from the time before this, i.e. as in E.Y., aforetime. *>^ b2|Tbb, 
perhaps, signifies here, as well as inii. 40, as, in the same icay as, but some 
give the expression here its causal sense: "he prayed because he was 
wont to do so," &c. 

z 



162 ANALYSIS. [VI. 11-17. 

716. — Ver. 11. janfiftJt, and making supplication ; comp. of conj., and 
part. Ithpahal of }2n, No. 5 ^. 

717. — Yer. 12. TinVpi, thirty ; plur. of num. nbpl, three, i. q. Hebr. 

T 

718. — Ver. 14. E7N2, it was displeasing; 3 m. sing. pret. Pehal of 
verb, i. q. Hebr. W&2l, which means literally, to smell ill. Cogn. to this 
word is the Germ, hose, whence comes onr base. The rendering of Theod. 
here is 6 /3a<rtAei»s e\virri9if) ; but ttfN2 is impers., and NSbft is a nom. 
abs. 

719. b2, (his) heart ; m. n., signifying the heart, mind, from Jibs, 
to he troubled, moved by cares. The expression \>V bs D-ltt? corresponds to 
the Hebr. bH db U^W, and signifies to turn the mind to, be anxious about 
anything. 

720. *b£E, the setting; constr. plur. ofm. n. b37D, which is derived 
from bbi?, No. 155, and signifies literally, the coming in. The sun set- 
ting is regarded as a traveller coming into his place of rest. Buxtorf 
(Lex., p. 1613) considers ^b^E to be the infin. Pehal of bb^, with t pa- 
ragogic. • 

721. NE7EE7, the sun; emph. of c. n. WftW, i. q. Hebr. 

722. n^rritpD, (was) exerting himself; part. Ithpahal, from ""HE?. The 
word occurs only here, and corresponds to b"7E7 in the Rabbinical writings, 
with the ") softened into b. 

723. — Yer. 15. VI, Mow thou; 2 m. sing, imper. Pehal, from ET, 
No. 19. 

724. — Yer. 16. NT^/lS, continually, literally, in perpetuity; comp. 
of prep. 22, and f. n. Wl^T/H, which is derived from "W, to dwell, remain, 
No. 484. ' 

725. — Yer. 17. JTJTni, and {a stone) was brought; comp. of conj., 
and 3 f. sing. pret. Hophal, from nnw : see No. 368. 

726. npb 1 }, and was placed ; comp. of conj., and 3 f. sing, of tense 
formed from the Hebr. Pahul part, of UW, No. 22. 

727. nftiirn, and sealed it; comp. of conj., 3 m. sing. pret. Pehal of 
DHn, i. q. Hebr. orin, to seal, and suff. of 3 f. sing. 

728. nri)OT2, with his seal; comp. of prep. 3, f. n. Npt^, a signet 
ring, and suff. of 3 m. sing. Por the word which follows, fi|7T 3711*1, comp. 
of conj., and the constr. form of the sing., there is a various reading, 
fipTOIM, according to which the noun is plur. If the sing, be the correct 
reading, it is used distributively, with the seal of each of the nobles. 



VI. 18-20.] ANALYSIS. 163 

729. sins, the purpose ; f. n., derived from N32, No. 512. The noun 
signifies properly, inclination, desire, and hence, what one desires or pur- 
poses to do. Gesenius regards it as simply meaning, the thing or matter, 
as the Syr. r>*-^. oVws /mrj akXoiuoOrj 7rpa^/xa iv tw AaviijX, Theod. The 
stone was sealed with the seal of the king, lest the nobles might put 
Daniel to death, and with the seals of the nobles, lest the king, who had 
given his consent reluctantly, should release him. 

730. — Yer. 18. nrb^nb, to his palace; comp. of prep, b, m. n. b^H, 
No. 458, and suff. of 3 m. sing. 

731. nn 1 ), and passed the night; comp. of conj., and 3 m. sing. pret. 
Pehal of fiifi, to tarry, pass the night. JT3, a house, is by some derived 
from this verb. 

732. ITip, {in) fasting; f. n., derived from Mltfi, i. q. Hebr. nils, to 
fast. The prep. 3 may be understood, or the noun may be used ad- 
verbially. 

733. ]irn% and musical instruments, E. Y.; comp. of conj., and plur. 
of f. n. mrn. The meaning of the noun is not certain. The rendering 
of the E. Y., instruments of music, agrees with the view of the Jewish 
commentators. Rosenmuller notices, in opposition to this interpretation, 
that the verb T\Vr\, from which the noun is derived, signifies, not simply 
to strike, but rather to push, or impel to ruin. The rendering of Theod., 
eheafiara, agreeing with that of the Peschito, |A_^ClI}jSo, seems to be 
quite arbitrary. Gesenius, Fiirst, and Havernick, interpret the word, 
concubines. This agrees best with the use of the verb bb27, which is al- 
ways applied to the introduction of persons. 

734. nTPDttft, and his sleep; comp. of conj., and f. n., N3E7, or rottf, 
i. q. Hebr. T12W, with suff. of 3 m. sing. 

735. fTO, fled; 3 f. sing. pret. Pehal of 113, i. q. Hebr. "m 

736. — Yer. 19. H")£nSE?3, at the dawn; comp. of prep. 3, and m. n. 
"I51QB7, a reduplicated form, derived from "lBtt?, No. 450. 

737. MJ1333, in the morning, literally, in the light; comp. of prep. 3, 
and emph. of m. n. PT33, light, derived from HT33, to shine. 

738. nbnsrirQ^, and in haste; comp. of conj., prep. 3, and infin. 
Ithpehal of bn3 : see No. 156. 

739. — Yer. 20. PT3~]|7E31, and as he drew near; comp. of conj., part. 
3, infin. Pehal of 3HJ7, No. 356, and suff. of 3 m. sing. 

740. 3^2, distressed, sad ; 2 part. Pehal of 3^2, i. q. Hebr. 3Sy, 
to labour, be distressed. 



164 ANALYSIS. [VI. 21-24. 

741. p^HT, he cried; 3 m. sing. pret. Pehal (see Gr. 26) of verb, i. q. 
Hebr. pHT. 

742. bp^H, is he able; comp. of interrog. H (pointed PT before _), 
and 3 m. sing. pret. of b^ 1 , No. 61. 

743.— Ver. 21. by>», said; 3 m. sing. pret. Panel of bb»: see No. 12. 

744 — Yer. 22. ~)2DH, and has shut ; comp. of conj., and 3 m. sing, 
pret. Pehal of "tip, i. q. Hebr. "tiD. With respect to the Chateph under 
the first letter of the verb, see No. 578. 

745. ^^b^n, they destroyed me; comp. of 3 m. plur. pret. Pahel of 
bnil (see No. 414), and sufF. of 1 sing. From this verb is derived the 
f. n. nbinn, hurt, injury, which occurs in this verse. 

746. *DJ, purity, innocence ; f. n., derived from the Hebr. PDT, i. q. TfDT, 
to he pure. 

747. ?]&), and also; comp. of conj., and partic. ^M, i. q. Hebr. 

748. Ver. 23. DMtD, was glad, E. Y. ; 3 m. sing. pret. Pehal of verb, 
cogn. to Hits. The clause is rendered by Theod., tore 6 fiaaikevs 7ro\v 
rjya6vv0rj eV avrw, and similarly in the E. Y. : " Then was the king ex- 
ceeding glad for him," NSbtt being regarded as the nom. to the verb, and 
•»nib^ being referred to Daniel. As NSbtt has the distinctive Eebhia, it 
may be better, with Rosenm., to regard it as a nom. abs., and to construe 
the verb impersonally, referring Tfib^ to the king. " Then as to the 
king, it was very joyous with him." This view is strongly confirmed 
by the form of expression in ver. 15, to which that in this verse is appa- 
rently similar. 

749. npD2nb, to cause to ascend, take up; comp. of conj., and infin. 
Aphel of ppD, No. 401. pDTTl, and he was brought up, is 3 m. sing. pret. 
Hophal of the same verb, with the conj. 

750. f^n, he trusted; 3 m. sing. pret. Aphel of }fcN, No. 284. 
751. — Yer. 24. "prTOia, their sons; comp. of plur. of *")2 (see No. 159), 

and suff. of 3 m. plur. 

752. firTK^, and their wives; comp. of conj., plur. of f. n. NtfS, 
i. q. Hebr. nttfH, and suff. of 3 m. plur. The abs. plur. of SttN is ^ttfo ; 
the constr. plur. ^ttfo. To illustrate the severity of Darius, Rosenm. refers 
to Ammianus Marcellinus, lib. xxiii. 6, § 81, who, speaking of the rigour 
of the laws of the Persians, says that it was in accordance with them that 
"ob noxam unius, omnis propinquitas perit." See also the references in 
E. V., and the narrative in Herodotus, iii. 119. 

753. to, they reached; 3 m. plur. pret. Pehal of NtDD, No. 474. 



TI. 27, 28 ; VII. 1-4.] ANALYSIS. 165 

754. iT^TlSlb, to the bottom ; comp. of prep, b, and f. n. fWlM, the 
bottom, lowest part, derived from 3HM, ^ e earth. 

755. "jin^^S, their bones; eomp. of plur. of m. n. D~)3, i. q. Hebr., 
and suff. of 3 m. plur. 

756. -"lp^n, they brake in pieces ; 3 m. plur. pret. Aphel, from ppl, 
No. 217. 

757. — Yer. 27. b^ft-l, and rescues; comp. of conj., and 1 part. Aphel, 
from bS3, No. 443. 

758. — -Yer. 28. KTHS, Cyrus ; pr. n. The word is Persic, the first 
syllable signifying the sun. The tt7__ is a termination, as in tPYH^. 

759. N^D"lQ, the Persian ; emph. of gent. n. ^CHS, derived from D*i S, 
No. 672. 



CHAPTEK VII. 

760. — Yer. 1. riDtt72, in the year ; comp. of prep. S, and constr. of 
f. n. niW, JSTo. 679: see Gr. (205). 

761. — Yer. 2. ^"ISfi, and behold; comp. of conj., and interj. -US, which 
is, perhaps, formed by transposition from the 2 m. plur. imper. Kal of the 
Hebr. verb PIS"!. In ii. 31, and elsewhere, it has the form ^b^, the ") 
being softened into b : see No. 189. 

762. }rP^2, bursting forth ; f. plur. of 1 part. Aphel of XT'!, i. q. 

Hebr. 

763. SE^b, on the sea; comp. of prep, b, and emph. of m. n. D\ i. q. 

Hebr. 

764. SS"], great; emph. of adj. 5T): see No. 63. 
765.— Yer. 3. 'jyn, beasts; plur. off. n. NVn, No. 239. 

766. 1>2W, diverse, different; f. plur. of 1 part. Pehal of N2E7, No. 54. 
rTOtP, f. sing, of same, ver. 19. «2tpn, 3 f. sing. fut. Pehal, ver. 23. 
N3tEfy 3 m. sing. fut. Pehal, ver. 24. In the sense of being different, the 
verb is followed by ?ft. 

767. — Ver. 4. NrPE*TJ2, the first ; emph. off. sing, of ^lp, used for 
the first ord. adj., derived from hip: see No. 29. NiTftlj?, emph. of f. 
plur., ver. 8. S^"T|1, emph. of m. plur., ver. 24. - 

768. Ypy), and wings ; comp. of conj., and plur. of m. n. ?)3. F|3 in 
Hebr. means the back, and from this it comes to mean any surface, and 
thence the side. From the latter sense is derived that of wing. HPQ}, 



166 ANALYSIS. [VII. 5. 

which occurs in this verse, should either be pointed 7TQ2, being the 
emph. plur. N*5S, with the suif. of 3 f. sing., which displaces the W fol- 
lowing >, or HPS}, the plur., with the Syriac form of suif. of 3 f. sing. 
PT\_. The Keri is PTSS, the sing, with the common form of suif. of 3 f. 
sing. "With this reading the sing, noun is joined with a plur. verb. 

769. sjto'Htt, were plucked; 3 m. plur. of tense Pehil, from tO^E), i. q. 
Hebr. tffTp. The plucking of the wings of the first beast refers to the 
conquest of the Chaldeans by the Medes and Persians, whereby their power 
and cruelty were repressed. 

770. nb^tp^, and was lifted up; comp. of conj., and 3 f. sing, of tense 
Pehil of bfca, ko. 564. 

771. nfi^ipn, and was made to stand; 3 f. sing. pret. of an anomalous 
conjugation, the form of which is partly analogous to that of the Chald. 
Aphel, and partly to that of the Hebr. Hophal. By the beast's being made 
to walk as a man, and having a man's heart given to it, it is implied that 
the Chaldeans are compelled to act with humanity and reason. 

772. — Ver. 5. Hajari, second; fern, of ord. adj. ^IT), derived from 
mn : see No. 32. 
T "773. TTOT, like; fern, of 1 part, of MM, No. 416. 

t: If x t : 

774. nV?, to a bear ; comp. of prep, b, and m. n. :£?, a bear, i. q. 
Hebr., derived from "Dtt, to walk slowly. 

775. "ltatpbl, and to (one) side; comp. of conj., prep, b, and m. n. 
IftW, a side. "ltDB? is the reading of many MSS. Many also have "ltSD, 
which is the form of the word in the Targums. If the Kethibh nK^pn 
be the correct reading, b must be the mark of the accus. 

776. Hp^pTl, it raised; 3 f. sing. pret. Aphel of Mp ; but another, 
and probably the correct reading, is rwpn, as in the last verse. By 
the beast's being raised up on one side, some suppose that nothing more is 
implied than that the second kingdom (that of the Medes and Persians) 
was situated on one side of the first, the Babylonians. Havernick thinks 
the meaning to be that the bear raised itself on one side higher than on 
the other, in an attitude of assault, els fxepoa eV iffrdOr/ is the version of 
Theod., for the exposition of which by {Theodoret see Eosenmiiller's note 
on the passage. 

777. rySy, ribs ; plur. of f. n. ybv, i.q. Hebr. sb2. This is the 
common explanation of the word, and the three ribs are supposed to desig- 
nate the three kingdoms, the Median, Persian, and Babylonian, united 



VII. 6, 7.] ANALYSIS. 1G7 

under the sway of Cyrus. Havernick, however, contends that the render- 
ing, ribs, is neither suitable to the present passage, nor in accordance with 
the proper signification of x?y, which is not rib, but side. Sides in the 
mouth, he thinks, mean jaw- teeth, and by the three jaw-teeth he supposes 
the three subject kingdoms are symbolized, if three be not used for a round 
number. rpe?s 7r\evpat ev riv GTOfxaii avTrjs, Theod. 

778. naD2, in its mouth; comp. of prep. 2, m. n. QQ, No. 558, and 
suff. of 3 f. sing. 

779. "p2, between ; prep., i. q. Hebr. 

780. 7T2E7, its teeth; comp. of dual of c. n. )W, i. q. Hebr., and suff. 
of 3 f. sing. The Keri is H2E7. See No. 768. 

781. lEAp, arise thou ; 2 f. sing, imper. Pehal of Mp. 

782. ^bSK, eat thou; 2 f. sing, imper. Pehal of b^N, No. 357. 

783. — Yer. 6. 11Q33, as a leopard ; comp. of part. 2, and m. n. "lES, 
i. q. Hebr. IIM. The animal is so called from its spots. Compare the 
Syriac verb ;,V? 1, to variegate. By the leopard is symbolized Alexander 
the Great. 

784. PP22, its bach; comp. of plur. of m. 22, i. q. Hebr. and Syriac 
form of suff. of 3 f. sing.: see No. 768. 

785. Snvnb, to the beast; comp. of prep, b, and emph. sing, of MVn, 
No. 239. By the four heads of the beast some think that Alexander's four 
generals, Ptolemy, Seleucus, Philip, and Antigonus, who afterwards were 
his successors, are symbolized. Havernick, however, supposes that the 
reference is to the four divisions of his empire. 

786.— Yer. 7. nV»rR, terrible; f. of VTH, 2 part. Pehal of blTT : see 
No. 198. 

787. grips'), and strong ; comp. of conj., and f. adj., which is derived 
from ?nft, unus. in Hebr., but in the Arab, signifying to be strong. The 
rendering of Theod., eKQa/xfiov, which agrees with that in the E. Y., ter- 
rible, is inaccurate. 

788. np'TO.*), and breaking in pieces; comp. of conj., and f. sing, of 
1 part. Aphei of p\F\, No. 217. 

789. fcriNttfa, and the residue; comp. of conj., and emph. of m. n. "lStt?, 
i. q. Hebr. 

790. nrbrn2, with its feet; comp. of prep. 2, plur. of b^n, No. 210, 
and suff. of 3 f. sing.: see No. 768. 

791. HDD"), trampling ; f. sing, of 1 part. Pehal of DC""), i. q. Hebr. 
DQi or btn. 



168 ANALYSIS. [VII. 8, 9. 

792. rP3tf», diverse; f. of 1 part. Pahel of Natf, No. 768. 

793. PPplfJ, before it; comp. of plur. of Dip, see No. 29, and suff. of 
3 f. sing, PPIDlf? is another reading. 

794. 1^112)? ma * horns ; comp. of conj., and dual of f. n. "pp, No. 
337. Njyip2, emph, plur., with prep, a, ver. 8. The fourth beast, diverse 
from the others, with ten horns, is, according to most Christian inter- 
preters, the Eoman Empire. Many, however, regard it as symbolizing 
the kingdom of the successors of Alexander : see No. 253. 

795. — Ver. 8. bsJTlbft, considering; part. Ithpahal, from hottf, i. q. 
Hebr. bstp : see No. 627. It is followed by the prep. St. 

796. HTOT, little; f. of adj. TOT, i. q. Hebr. 

797. JirTO»a, in the midst of them. The Keri is fTO 1 ?, comp. of 
prep, pa, No. 779, and plur. suff. of 3 f. plur. The suff. in the Kethibh 
should be pointed }irT»— , the 3 m. plur. As pp is coram., either reading 
might be admitted. 

798. Vji^riS, were plucked up. The Keri is SIp^HW, 3 f. plur. pret. 
Ithpehal, from n$V, i. q. Hebr. -)p£. The last syllable of the Kethibh 
should be pointed sp, as the termination of 3 m. plur. Either reading 
might be allowed. 

799. bbfcE, speaking ; 1 part. Pahel of bbp, No. 743, written bbtttt, 
ver. 20. The fern. sbbftD occurs ver. 11, and the 3 m. sing. fut. Pahel 
bb^>, ver. 25. 

800. — Yer. 9. VlSl, they set, or placed; 3 m. plur. pret. Pehal of NH1, 
No. 349. The active is used impersonally for the passive. The E. Y. 
here is, " until the thrones were cast down," which seems at first most in 
accordance with the use of the verb Sft~> : see iii. 6, 15, 20, 21, 24; 
vi. 17. According to this explanation of the word, the meaning would be, 
" until the kingdoms represented by the four animals were destroyed ;" but 
this, as Eosenm. observes, would be an anticipation of the interpretation 
of the dream. Nft"l, like the Hebr. m\ signifies to place, settle, as well 
as to cast, and the meaning here most probably is, " until the thrones, 
or seats, were placed," that is, those for the attendant ministers of the 
Ancient of Days. 

801. p\P137), and the Ancient (of Bays) ; comp. of conj., and adj., i. q. 
Hebr., derived from pHV, to be removed, and thence, to be ancient. The 
Ancient of Days is, of course, a designation of God, like Dip iH$\ 
Ps. lv. 19. 

802. S/T, sat; 3 m. sing. Pret. Pehal of verb, i. q. Hebr. SttK 



VII. 10, 11.] ANALYSIS. 169 

803. ibn3, as snow ; comp. of conj. 3, and m. n, nbfi, i. q. Hebr. 

aba?. 

804. iyn f white; adj., derived from "fin, to be white. The adj. 
agrees with ab.Fl, as is shown by the accent Munach: " and his garment 
was like white snow;" so that the rendering of Theod., to esBvfia avrov 
wael x i ^ v ^evicbv, with which the E. Y. agrees, is not accurate, at least if 
the accentuation be regarded as authoritative. 

805. "IBM, as wool; comp. of conj. 3, before __ 3, and m. n. "12337, 
i. q. Hebr. IK'S. 

806. Spa, pure ; adj., derived from Mp3, i. q. Hebr. Hp3, fo fo j^wr?. 
The adj. agrees with "lM. 

807. r^?^ flames; plur. of m. n. Mttf, No. 403. 

808. ^nibaba, its wheels; comp. of plur. of m. n. baba, i. q. Hebr., 
and suff. of 3 m. sing. Plur. abs. of baba, ^baba. 

809. pbl, burning ; 1 part. Pehal of pb^, i. q. Hebr. pb^, to bum. 
810. — Ver. 10. "ina, a river ; m. n. i. q. Hebr. "ina. The emph. form 

in Ezra designates the Euphrates, kut* e^o^v. 

811. "raa, flowed; 1 part. Pehal of TO, to flow. etXicev, the render- 
ing of Theod., arose from the fact that the verb in the Targums translates 
the Hebr. verb ?Jtt?a, to draw. 

812. pSD"), and went forth; comp. of conj., and 1 part. Pehal of T[D3, 
No. 86. 

813. TO/lttJat^, minister to him; 3 m. plur. fat. Panel, from tPbttf, 
with suff. of 3 m. sing. The Daghesh in second radical is omitted. 

814. i3"fi, and a myriad; comp. of conj., and f. n. i3"1, i. q. Hebr. 
The plur. abs. is J12H, but the Keri is }3l2n, as if from $££21. 

815. ^^p">, stand; 3 m. plur. fut. Pehal of D-p. 

816. Na^, the judgment, or tribunal; emph. of m. n. "p^, No. 582. 
817 f'HBpl, and the boohs ; comp. of conj., and plur. of m. n. "IBD, 

i. q. Hebr. IBD. The books are in order to record the proceedings of the 
tribunal. 

818.— Ver. 11. smnm_, great; emph. f. plur. of adj. 3"]pn, No. 296. 

819. fiVpp, w^s sto; 3 f. sing, of tense Pehil of btop, No. 87. 

820. I^nl, and {the body) was destroyed; comp. of conj., and 3 m. 
sing, pret, Hophal of "DM, No. 82. 

821. npKfo, its body; m. n. DE72, No. 425, with suff. of 3 f. sing. 

822. rnjyb, to the burning of; comp. of prep, b, and constr. of f. n. 
Nlp\ derived from 1,7), No. 353. 

2a 



1 70 ANALYSIS. [VII. 12-18. 

823. Nt#M, /n?,- emph. of c. n. K7H, i. q. Hebr. 

824. — Ver. 12. "p*rD, in their lives ; comp. of prep. S, and plur. of 
>n, which is here a subst. : see No. 182. 

825. )1V), and a season; comp. of conj., and m. n. )1V, No. 39. 
826. Yer. 13. ^OT, clouds; constr. plur. of m. n. p2, i. q. Hebr. 

827. "D3, as the Son ; comp. of conj. 3, andm.n. 12. " The Son of 
Man'" is a designation of the Messiah, which, as we know, He often applied 
to Himself. 

828. 7in&, came; 1 part. Pehal of T\T\A, No. 323. 

829. ^n^DIp 1 ), and before him; comp. of conj., prep. Wlp, No. 29, and 
suff. of 3 m. sing. 

. . 830. ^rfJn^pn, they brought him near ; 3 m. plnr. pret. Aphel of D")j7, 
No. 418, with snff. of 3 m. sing. The active may be used impersonally 
for, the pass, sing., or the ministers spoken of in ver. 10 maybe understood 
as a nominative. 

831 Yer. 14. H^, shall pass away ; 3 m. sing. fut. Pehal of HIV, 

No. 129. 

832. — Yer. 15. n^nSriM, was troubled ; 3 f. sing. pret. Ithpehal, from 
bT>3, to be grieved, troubled. It is to be noticed that bsOT H2S is put 
in apposition with the suffix of **Tyn, the nom. to this verb: "the spirit 
of me, of me Daniel, was troubled." See Gr. (215). 

833. np"p, body ; m. n., properly denoting the sheath of a sword, and 
perhaps derived from "jT), unus., to be flexible. It is applied figuratively 
to the body as the sheath of the soul. Comp. Pliny, H. N. vii. 52 : — " Do- 
nee eo (scil. corpore) cremato inimici — remeanti animae velut vaginam 
ademerint." A similar figurative expression is found in the use of the 
Hebr. verb tlhw, Job, xxvii. 8. 

T T 

834. — Yer. 16. HSnp, I drew near ; 1 sing. pret. Pehal of ^np, No. 
418. 

835. S ft ftMp, them standing by; emph. plur. of 1 part. Pehal of O^p, 
No. 130. 

836. bO^S^j and the certainty, or truth; comp. of conj., and emph. of 
!2 ,, ^ ,, , No. 35, here used as a noun. 

837. H?2M, lashed; 1 sing. fut. Pehal of N22, No. 88. 

838. — Yer. 18. pbSjT'l, and shall receive; comp. of conj., and 3 m. 
plur. fut. Pahel of bop, No. 28. 



VII. 19-24] ANALYSIS. 171 

839. ^ji^Vj, the Most High; plur. of m. n. fi^by, one that is supreme, 
i. q. Hebr. It is only found in the plural (plur. excellentiae). 

840. fSDprPI, and they shall possess ; 3 m. plur. fat. Aphel, from }pn: 
see No. 234. Wjlp, 3 m. plur. pret. Aphel (Hiphil), ver. 22. 

841. — Yer. 19. JTQ2, I desired, or wished; 1 sing. pret. Pehal of to2 
No. 512. 

842. Ny&^b, for the truth; comp. of prep, b, and emph. of y»5£, No. 
35. Another reading is S^&y?, to he informed certainly, which is comp. 
of b, and the infin. Pahel of the verb n^ : see No. 35. 

843. fywrn, the fourth; emph. fern, of ord. adj. ^W, No. 253. 

844. PT*HSp1, and its nails; comp. of conj., plur. of m. n. "lQtp, JNo. 
562, and suff. of .3 f. sing. 

845.— Yer. 20. lbs;fi, and fell down. The Keri is nb^tt, comp. of 
conj., and 3 f. plur. pret. Pehal of b£?2. The Kethibh is 3 m. plur., and 
should be pointed -lbD3. 

846. nitn*), and its aspect; comp. of conj., m. n, Itn, No. 117, and 
suff. of 3. f. sing. Elsewhere, ITn always means vision : here it signifies 
look, aspect. '131 |2n N3")p1, " and as for this horn, it had eyes," &c. 

847. nmnn, its companions ; comp. of plur. of f. n. rVQn, and 
suff. of 3 f. sing. n"On is derived from the verb "Ipn : see ^°- 90* 

848.— Yer. 21. NTO, made; f. of 1 part. Pehal of'*T2», No. 19. 

849. yip, «w ; m. n. i. q. Hebr. The Hebr. verb y p, fo approach, 
has also the signification of advancing with hostile intention, like the Latin 
aggred/ior. 

850. nbp^l, #w^ prevailed; comp. of conj., and f. of 1 part. Pehal of 
by, No. 61. T 

851. — Yer. 23. bpNJT), and shall eat up; comp. of conj., and 3 f. sing, 
fut. Pehal of b^S, No. 357. 

852. F72E7?nrfl, and shall tread it down; comp. of conj., 3 f. sing. fut. 
Pehal of ttfsffi, i. q. Hebr., and suff. of 3 f. sing, with inserted syllable 2_, 
Gr. (69). 

853. nap^ni, and shall break it in pieces; comp. of conj., 3 f. sing, 
fut. Aphel of fipl, No. 217, and suff. of 3 f. sing., with inserted 3__. 

854. — Yer. 24. nn^bp nap, from this Icing dom. There is a pleonasm 
in the use of the suff. with the prep. : compare NOTETHS, iii. 6 ; 
H3ttT PD, iii. 7: see Gr. (231). 



172 ANALYSIS. [VII. 25-28. 

855. ??THnS, after them; comp. of nn«, No. 181, and suff. of 3 m. 
sing. 

856. b5E?n\ he shall cast down ; 3 m. sing. fut. Aphel of bstt?, No. 
684. 

857. — Yer. 25. "T^b, against, lit., to the side; comp. of prep, b, and 
m. n. "72, No. 691. 

858. sbn^, he shall afflict; 3 m. sing. fut. Panel of sb^l, i. q. Hebr. 
nb2, which in Pihel has the same signification, to afflict. .It is followed 
by the prep. b. 

859. iSp^l, and shall think, or hope; comp. of conj., and 3 m. sing, 
fut. Pehal of ""Qp, to hope, confide, trust, vwovoyaei rod aWotuxrai, Theod. 

860. ItonyV"), and they shall he given; comp. of conj., and 3 m. plur. 
fut. Ithpehal of 'nrn, JSTo. 131. 

861. ibb-l, and a half; comp. of conj., and constr. of m. n. }bs, de- 
rived from }bs, i. q. Hebr. ibG, to divide. 

862. — Yer. 26. rnftEJnb, to consume; comp. of prep, b, and infin. 
Aphel of TEE?, i. q. Hebr. IftW, to consume, destroy. 

863.— Yer. 27. TOW, is given; 3 f. sing, of tense Pehil of nn% 
No. 131. 

864. H^tobtt?, dominions; emph. plur. of m. n. ftobtt?, No. 454. 

865. ^Btttt^l, and shall oley ; comp. of conj., and 3 m. plur. fut. 
Ithpahal of VftW, No. 636. 

866. — Yer. 28. i"T3, an adv. of time, now, i. q. Hebr. nb. TTD'IV, 
hitherto, or thus far. 

867. ^SH, my thoughts; plur. of m. n. fpSH, No. 179, with suff. 
of 1 sing. 

868. S VT1, and my countenance, or, the colour of my countenance; comp. 
of conj., and plur. of m. n. Y»T, No. 193, and suff. of 1 sing. 

869. I^nt^, is changed; 3 m. plur. fut. Ithpahal of N3tP, No. 54. 

870. ^b3, in my heart; comp. of prep. 2, m. n. nb, i. q. Hebr., 
and suff. of 1 sing. 

871. rntpD, I kept, treasured up; 1 sing. pret. Pehal of n^3, i. q. 
Hebr. "1^3,. iv rrj Kapbla fiov BieTrjprjaa, Theod : comp. Luke, ii. 19, 51. 



INDEX. 



TON 



143 . 

143 . 

143 . 

214 . 

837 . 

92 . 

318 . 

222 . 

639 . 

14 . 

399 . 

107 . 

8 . 

630 . 

181 . 

248 . 

465 . 

855 . 

71 . 

316 . 

471 . 

259 . 

471 . 

57 . 

57 . 

57 . 
57, 370 

357 . 



V-ITOS I 782 

• t t ~: i 



TJIOM 



74 
•OH I 74 

15*? 74 

N2?n«|432 

ri« 74 

Hn?rnN| 74 
nw 74 
rasninNi 74 

mTS'361 

t: - 

HTN'259 
btN 36 

^™ 

nrra 



' -t:It 

1^1™ 

' tt: t 

s^s-ito*™ 

t— : t _ : - -; 

• 1?M 

sab^s 

T T • 

NarvH 

T T • 

• VT 1 *? 

. ^b^N 



587 
587 
587 
308 
308 
332 

10 
4 
4 
4 

10 
468 

37 

37 
276 
238 







• ^?$ 


i 

470 . . 


HE7P 






• W7« 


286 . . 








. snbs 


58 . 








■ WO 1 ?)!? 


238 . . 








. ]innb« 
• "*0^S 


58 . 

58 . . 








ro>« 


58 . 
178 . . 








Nanba 


40 . . 
700 . . 








• • T^M 


700 . . 








■ . ftH 


599 . 








. . *)ba 


260 . 








• ^bs. 


311 . 








D^sbs 


613 , 








, . hew 

T — 


411 . 








• r»w 


616 . 








• • **J£M 


581 , 








• • "^ 


96 . 








• • ^ 


703 . 








. -0$ 


544 . . 








. . "IBM 


232 . . 










249 . 
823 . 








• • was 


68 . 








. . nas 


517 . . 








. pas 


597 . 








Ma?iaM 

t tt: 


385 . . 





• • &aM 
. ttfa« 

t t-: 

. SE?3N 

T TV! 

. ipaH 

. a^aN 

• t— : 

nnas 
. pnaa 

. . nos 

t •.•: 

tt •••: 

. . N27N 

T T 

■ WD^'pS 

• n ?51*5 

. saia-is 

tt ; 4 - 

. tTnms 

' T T : T 

. sfynw 

. NTIVHH 

t tt : - 
t : - 
t : - 

. H3nN 

T V 

. iantc?s 



nns 



174 



itt 



323 . . 


■ • • nnw 


574 . . 


• • ^na 


88 . 






. . r^a 


828 . . 


• • • nn« 


329 . . 


• • ^ni 


150 . 




• • «?» 


448 . . 


. \-ririN 

• T 


329 . . 


. . nVna 


502 . 




. . araa 


351 . . 


. . . fVlN 


124 . . 


. nzaina 

t : t : 


558 . 




• • D ?^ 


448 . . 


• • N*riN 


138 . . 


KjiaJna 


778 . 




• ™?? 


448 . . 


• • , • 1VM 


590 . . 


• B^ba 


710 . 




nrrbya 


832 . . 


. rvnsriH 


215 . . 


• • r.T? 


539 . 




. njnsi 

't : • : 


696 . . 


. . !|&?VW 


242 . . 


. ifj* 


794 . 




. mn\m 


798 . . 


. . VjT&nN 


173 . ., 


. sfci^a 

t : 


240 . 




. . «-ia 

T T 


226 . . 


• • • ^h$ 


779 . . 


. • r? 


365 . 




' ' *51? 


491 . . 


. stvim 


134 . . 


. . na^a 

T • 


790 . 




. nrbrna 






797 . . 


. . ftrwa 


159 . 




. . mi 




2 


593 . . 


. nb^-r^a 


431 , 




. tfni 




20 . . 


* nfi^a 


712 . 




• • rn* 


92 . . 


. • P1M? 


42, 244 . . 


• llrftia 


120 . 




• -T* 


172 . . 


rvnn&a 


719 . . 


. . . 'ba 


713 . 




. •'FfDna 


74 . . 


. nnbsa 

•• T 


186 . . 


. *vi 


566 . 




• n?na 


232 . . 


. M5nM3 

t : — : 


163 . . 


nsNfifoba 


169 . 




. . ana 


718 . . 


. . E7K2 


118 . . 


. «jb>ba 


760 . 




• rt^i 


84 . . 


. . baa 

V T 


585 .. . 


n&witfba 


113 . 




. M^at^a 

t - : • 


312 . . 


' ™P^ 


666 .. . 


M*attea 

t - : i ; 


736 . 




tt : - : • 


350 . . 


. . . wins 


299 . . 


. ttrnoa 


77 . . 




t : • 


583 .. . 


. . maa 


542 . . 


• • jnba 


724 . 




N-rnna 

t • : ■ 


508 . . 


• • nnttsi 


233 . . 


. ^rvobpa 


554 . 




• ni?n? 


425 . . 


tfnipttfaa 


737 . . 


. . snaaa 


306 . - 




. snna 


89 . . . 


. bwria 
... T . 


159 . . 


. . . ^a 




694 .. . 


. . ma 

t : 


751 . . 


. . tfrroa 


a 


498 .. . 


t : • : 


552 . . 


. . nwraa 


702 .... . aaa 


498 . . 


. nwma 

t : • : 


79 . . 


. * . baa 


784 . 






maa 


348 . . 


. . nra 


393 . . 


lirnbrnpa 


158 . . 






• . -laa 


354 . . 


• • n ? 


88 . . 


. . wra 


390 . 






. nai 


458 . . 


• ^IV* 


88 . . 


. • N22 


158 . 






. p-iaa 


*56 . . . 


nbna'nna 

t t ; : • : 


334 . . 


• w^a 


158 . 






«naa 


271 . . 


S1V? 


88 . . 


. . nsa 


319 . 






' ^T^^ 


117 . . 


. Mima 

t: v : 


701 . . 


. . . si*i 


489 . 






. ink 


117 . . 


. •ntna 


701 .. . 


. nrwa 


350 . 






. sia 


824 .. . 


• r?ni 


728 . . 


nW&z 


167 . 






• ITU 



-Ttt 



175 



nsi 



603 .. . 


. . N^a 


48 . . 


. . . «m 


379 . ... 


• • . TO 


135 .. . 


. . sba 


320 . . 


. . «pnm 


15 . . 


. ... TO 


808 .. . 


. >nibsba 


48 .. . 


• • Yoip-i 


650 . . 


• • rinan 


160 . . . 


. «mbs 






155 . . 


.. . bsin 


119 . . . 


. . T >bl 




rf 


592 . . 


• • P&TO 


183 . . _ 


• - *» 




592 . .. 


. . sipspn 


768 .. . 


. . 7TQ;i 


274, 410 . 


. . . «n 

T 


401 . . 


. . -ippn 


755 . . . 


. linens 


274 . . 


...'.. an 


653 . . 


• • "H?TO 


425 .. . 


• ^fcafe 


57 . . 


• • tl^MTI 


634 . .. 


. . .. byn 


425 .. . 


.. irotb's 


628 . . 


. . . nn 


634 . ., 


. . sjb^n 






407 . , 


• • "^JP 


155 . . 


• • "^n 


T 




407 , . 


t - : It - 


369 .. .. 


■• • NTCP? 






18 . . 


' ■ T - 


445 . . 


. . nbin 


550 .. . 


T 


756 , .. 


• • .^n 


311 . . 


• • &hn 


237 . , . 


••: It 


556 . . 


. . . 'nin 


771 . • 


~ * t: 


237 . . . 


• rm 


569 . . 


• • ^n^v 


776 . . 


. nwftii 


272 . . . 


• r»7?;; 


188 . . 


. . . sin 

t - : 


311, 371 . 


. rip^pn 


185 .. . 


mjn 


126 . . 


. . . s-in 


311 . .-. , 


., n^pnr 


200 . . . 


• ^n^ 


100 . . 


.. . yiin 


830 .. . 


OTcnpri 


200 . . . . 


*9lH 


149 . . 


t t : - 


695 .. . 


... !ja?irin 


313 ... . 


T 


149 . . ; 


. NJTOTin 


157 .. . 


Man3fi?n 


198 . . . 


b>m 


188 . . 


. . mn 


157 .. . 


nns^n 


786 ... . 


t • : 


188 . . 


• • 0?in 


645 .. . 


nbattfn 


38, 373 . . . 


•• ^ 


578 .. . 


. nap-in 


157, 227 . . 


ronton 


582 .. . 


•~ H 


51 ... . 


l-vra^m 


227 .. . 


nronttfn 


816 ... . 


T 


23 . . 


. . >2inn 


213 .. . 


rnrann 


192 ... . 


• W. 


840 .. . 


• ^pnn 


427 .. . 


tnnnn 


809 ...... 


-.1*? 


47 . . . 


. . *on 


93 . . . 


. ynn 


416 . . . . 


.. T 


458 .. . 


• ^n 


383 .. . 


. ^bann 


773 . . . . 


mm 

t : it 


458 .. . 


. sba>n 

t : 


577 .. . 


. n^pnrr 


65, 78 . . . 


t : 


742 .. . 


. b^n 


657 .. . 


npainhn 


89 ... . 


bs^ 
... T 


750 .. . 


• r^n 


434 .. . 


t . - ; • 


723 ... . 


. sn 


635 .. . 


. . yrn 






217 ... . 


• V? 


596 .. . 


. vn>n 


1 




455 ... . 


' ^ 


368 . 


. ^rvn 




676 ... . 


vt:It 


16 . . . 


. . sbn 


214 . . . 


n??W 


48 ... . 


. m 


218 .. . 


?isn 


248 .. . 


. "nnsi 

• t: t: 



nw 



176 



T1 



' T T;It: 

T '• ^ap 

• • ^«1 

~ t : 
• t : v : 

. . naNi 

t - : - 

. . ttfabjn 
. nna«i 

• • *iw 

- : - : 

T T ; ; v : 

t : : - : 

•• t : I ; 

• *i^i 

■ ^W 
. Manri«i 

nbnsnnn-i 

t t ; : • ; 

. btorn 

• nryik* 

t : 



88 . . . 


. Kprrt 


675 . . 




483 . . 


••nis^ii 


673 . 




88 . . . 


. . TOZtf 


618 . . 




728 .. . 
731 .. . 


. . nisi 


618 . . 
15 . . 




20 . . 
246 . . 
125 . . 


r : : 


749 . . 
311 . . 
460 . 




158 .. . 


• N^a?1 


298 . . 




167 . . 


t ~:It: 


243 . 




508 . . 
135 .. . 
135 . . 


. . sbm 

■• t: 

. . nbm 

•• t : 


157 . 
664 . 
667 . 




768 . . 
237 . . 


•• : It : 


193 . 
606 . 




200 . . 


• • w?niil 


868 . 




582 


. . «jWi 


606 . 




733 . . 
641 .. . 


• )JUH\ 
. rbnri 

' ~: t : 


128 . 
102 . 




65 . . 

89 . . . 


mipi 

•• • t : 


414 . 
528 . 




455 .. . 


. . -Til 


90 . . 




676 .. . 


vt : I t : 


846 . . 




203 . . 


t : 


117 . . 




48 .. . 


♦ • fTf) 


475 . . 




85 . . 


• S 0T 


538 . . 




407 .. . 


. risjrti 


124 . 




217 .. . 
556 . . 




5 . 

366 . . 




569 . . 


• n^im 


212 . 




126 . . 


wvrj 


257 . . 




820 . . 


• TOirii 


727 . 




100 . . 


. . snim 


95 . 




220 . . 


• • ^U) 


562 . 




47 ". . 


. . feW") 


844 . 




725 . . 


. jrrpm 

• T " ! 


33 . 




596 .. . 


• VOW) 


459 . 





. nafaSrrj 

• T - ' irrj 

. aprn 
j'nirnni 
n&btpVn 

nnittfm 

t : : - : 

nroririrn 
. 'nrvn 
. Nivn 
. . •wi 

• vwj 

• r??yj 

• bnm 
>rnbarn 

• n i!n? 

. nrriTrn 

I T -; - 
T S V S 

. warn 
. btfrn 

•• T S 

t : ~ J 

•oabnTi 



rm 



177 



•»3tt 



. ttV') 


567 .. . 


• • vf?*! 


301 .. . 


• • *$& 


. nnv^ 


108 .. . 


n^snbi 


288 .. . 


• n C T ?P :i 


• WTO 


595 .. . 


ffirianSsj 


137 .. . 


wrnnozM 


• n /9iV? 


595 .. . 


Tnjnb 11 


757 .. . 


. Ssw 


• "^P'i 


555 .. . 


. T np*»bi 


714 .. . 


• «b^ 


• t?p^. 


142 .. . 


. • i»Vj 


579 . . . 


DDilEfi 


. i-Sbain 


591 .. . 


«J3Spbi| 


292 .. . 


•npsi 


• «??-! 


421 .. . 


. why^ 


145 .. . 


• natfci 


. a^i 


326 .. . 


. bapbi 

••'t It: 


631 . . 


• WTBftp-i 


. • iri 


546 .. . 


• nsjpbi. 


716 . . 


janrttM 


• *yr. 


775 . . 


. "itott?b") 


315 .. • 


rttfesna*) 


- n T1 


333 . , . 


• .r*yi 


24 . . . 


• lanw 


. nn:rn 


333 .. . 


. «J3B?b'i 


25 . . . 


. Nanjn 


. jinaH 


699 .. . 


ns^nb-i 

t 't - : 


25 . . 


Tri-pata^ 

' tt : '.• ; 


jTOi&naH 


509 .. . 


. -ibndsi 


171 .. . 


nxyitt^ 


^nrrrn 


788 . . 


• nfrm 


139 . . . 


t • : 


• • '1^ 


569 . . 


• "^™ 


621 .. . 


• ^HDI 


• • rwi 


284 . . 


• l^npsi 


207 . • 


. a?™ 


npaspasi 


130 .. . 


. D^np-i 


289 .. . 


. rn'TOi 


na-iftaa-i 


144 . . 


. sito 


770 . . 


. nVta>i 


. /jyrn 


£80 ... . 


. . rto 


845 . . 


. ibsi^ 

t - : 


. HQDil 


216 . . 


. nrra 

t : 


812 . . 


' ' Vty] 


pnnba-pi 


527 . . 


. n&asi 


224 . . 


. . bto 


Mbnapsi 


230 . . 


. n«b^ 


752 . . 


. . fyriwn 


• M J'^?1 


12 . . . 


. nbai 


744 . . 


• • • "fcD!) 


• ^?1 


12; . . . 


• rV^ 


342 . . - 


• ■ N^b^i 


• «?o^ 


1 .. . 


• • «?Wi 


342 . . 


• NjaiBlMDI 


• .1W?! 


233 . . 


. sobto-i 


817 


• "n??i 


• • "hVi 


233 . . 


. Mn-^Sbsi 


393 . . 


. jin^banpi 


• wnbNb 1 ) 


12 . . 


. . Nrfei 


573 . . 


"■ T .! 


• raaa l ? , i 


347 . . 


. . ^-psi 


305 . . 


• to TOJ 


fin^Btab^ 


13 . . 


■ - . VP 


825 . . 


• • • 11V. 


. . aib-i 


132 . . 


• • Siatt) 


39 . . 


• T " 


. . jnaabi 


132 . . 


• • w^a-i 


241 . . 


. . . *yi3n 


. .'nbn 


132 


• • "^P-i 


541 . . 


' T T-~. 1 - 


, . .. nbi 


152 . . 


. . . "iti-l 


110 . . 


. . TTjTjgj 


. mninVi 


211 . . 


• • rnsftM 


563 . . 


• • r??i 



2b 



b*i 



178 



vn 





; . . by*) 


L79 . . 
L79 . . 




T 

540 ... . 






t •• : 


r*# 


. 


. . H3tt?3n 


157 . . 


• • w.y. 


41 ... . 




. . 


. . ynjwn 


627 . . 


aanbrsttn 


741 ... . 


. •. 


. . pv-isn 


726 . . 


• • rnafch 


606 .. . 


Tiitt 




Nmna*t 

TT-I" 

. . . nbsj) 


426 . . 

789 . . 


. . nyw*\ 

. . -INttfo 

t : 


746 ... . 
102 .. . 


• 1» 








. . . ffiJ!) 


789 . . 


t t : 


102, 354 . 


H2ttt 


• • 


. . . Dna-i 

TT 


598 . . 

387 . . 


T i • : 


102 .. . 
344 .. . 






T : ■ 


50, 692 . 


t • : 


343 .. . 


. . ^ - 


• •' 


. . mate 1 ! 

t : • 

• • PHP?? 8 ! 


454 . . 

454 . . 

64 . . 




796 .. . 
741 .. . 


t •• : 




. . S>-IBS1 


636 . . 


• • rwkah 






• • 


. . r»wi? T i 


780 . . 


. • • T!&F) 


n 






• • Hfrrj?! 


734 . . 


, . nnw 


414 .. . 


• .ban 


• • 


. '♦nimp!) 


514 . . 

851 . . 




745 .. . 
745 . . . 




. 


. . i^iapl 


853 . . 


. . r^iDp^nn 


90 . . . 


. Won 




. . . D^pl 


852 . . 


naafcnJn 


817 . . . 


nmnn 


. 


t 1 - : 


404 . . 


. . T rb'rb 


46 . . . 


t t : - 

. . in 


. 


. . S|BS|31 


404 . . 


. . nnbn* 


191 .. . 


. . sin 


, 


• • w-?m 


620 . . 


• • **??h) 


46 . . . 


. . mn 


. 


• • w?b? 


449 . . 


. ^ninpni 


202 .. . 


• V'^U 




. . . mi 


449 . . 
449 . . 
346 . . 




804 .. . 
187 .. . 
187 . . . 


. . n^n 




. . . ism 


T ' 

. . rrtn 




. . . *ny\ 


. . nm 




t : 


282 . . 


• • n&rn 


388 .. . 


• • ntn 




. . ijrwrfi 


473 . . 


. . ni?rn 


117. . * - 


■ • *$n 




. *rrwn-Q-n 


453 . . 


. . HD>prn 


424 . . . 


• • rin 


• • 


" t : : - : 


235 . . 


. . tfzpn^ 


44 . . . 


• l^ntQ 




• • • wini 


525 . . 


. . nsprvi 


239 .. . 


. . w*n 




. . nmr] 


258 . . 


. . y'nn-^ 


239 . . . 


. . «T»n 


. . 


• • P?rni 


704 . . 


. . D^nni 


239 .. . 


. . nvn 




. . . jtt 


680 . . 


. . V^10 % 


765 . . 






. . . vm. 


1 


239 . . . 



Y»rr 



179 



nrc> 



. . 


. . snvn 

t : 1" 


529 . 


. 




• rr$ 


856 . 






. Vsttfm 




. . . ^n 


529 THE) 


61 . 










. . . s^n 




173 . 








. . . Vn 


> 


173 . 






. .. )mfr 




• T 


. 


• • ^?n 




72 . 






• P13TP 


. 


• • rp^n 


560 hON? 


615 . 






• ^sw 


. 


. . snnDn 


33 . 






n P s .i 


507 . 






. ^sbrp 


. 


• • ni>^n 


858 . 






• • s !?^ 


532 . 






. l-MMF 


. . 


• • • d ^6 


519 . 






. ^bm) 


61 . 






. . »W 


. . 


. N^Sn 


461 . 






sibrrni 


380 . 






. . ia$ 


. 


• • ^n 


411 . 






. nabrb? 


168 . 






. rb2> 


. 


• • rp^D 


461 . 






^abny 


293 . 






' • : (t 




• ^C 1 


88 . 






• • h?V" 


617 . 






• Bfefc"! 




. . «Dn 


88 . 






t : v - 


763 . 






• NI2* 1 


. . 


t : - 


60 . 






575 . 






T " 




• • ^©n 


215 . 






• ' T - 


474 . 






. NttE> 


. 


t : • 


215 . 






. . NT 

t : 


799 . 






• ^ 


. . . 


• • "Wl 


215 . 






. . "»T 


511 . 






. ]WW 




. . non 


382 . 






• • TT. 


103 . 






• • V??. 




1^-! 




. . *pn 


215 . 






• • *rjj 


438 . 






• 1™9? 






. . 


t ; — 


36 . 






. . 2T 

-T 


831 . . 






rr»* 


. . 


• • ™?!3 


17 . 






. . arc 


345 . 






• ■ & 


. . . 


. tienn 


36 . 






. WT 

■ . : i T 


437 . 






• i^nfefi^ 


. . . 


. Nja&-in 


469 . 






™"P 


512 . 






. «ss> 


. . , 


. raplD 


656 . 






tot 

T ; - : 


500 . 






• saw 


. . . 


• r™"o 


484 . . 






p?£ 


35 . . 






• ^»3g 


. 


• v^ipn 


131 . 
131 . . 






. air 

"T 


409 . . 
353 . . 








1 


a 


146 . 
131 . . 






FOtV 

farr 

1 • :»t 


815 . . 
353 . . 










. . ^wtD 


863 . 






n ^V^. 


277 . . 






t : • t 






. D> iT 






115 . . 






FTDfrn 


70 . . 












n ?i?! 


. . . 


. sprats 

T~ T - 


161 . 






. tit 


613 . . 






• n !R 




. . mto 


162 . 






snirrj 


613 . . 






• »*TC 




t : 




. . S^tO 


633 






nwn 


593 . . 






bbfil-YV 




T * 


. . . 


. . nvp 


129 . . 




• 


flTOU? 


547 . . 






rcni 




T -;|- 


277 . . 




• 


'•• t : 


447 • . 






. NJBP 



<^> 



180 



inb 



375 . . 
375 . . 




165 

758 


523' . . 
813 , . 


•t! J ' 


219 
124 


766 . . 


• • • &$) 


124 


504 . . 
450, 537 


. . . )h& 
. . . nsa?> 


42 
42 


442 . . 


. . nw^ 


42 


54 . . 


. . ian^i 


570 


869 . . 


. . ^2ttt^ 


42 


54 . . 


• • ^™\ 


43 


802 . . 


. -. -. arv; 


451 


360 . . 
360 . .. 




153 

783 


565 . . - 


. . . rtfir 


561 


480 . . 


• • T1JP. 


204 


505 . . 


. nTjyv 


204 


194 . . 


. . . TjJp 


221 


400 . . 


T • ~ 


148 


513 . . 


. . nnn> 


805 


441 . . 


- ^S^l 


209 


622 .. . 
349 . . 




391 

485 


22 . . . 


. j-i&tto 


651 
651 




3 


651 
11 


58 . . 


• ^3 


11 


703 . . 


• n .V?N3 


11 


827 . . 


• • "i?3 


466 


49, 444 . . 


n ?7? 


518 


355 . . . 


• • "H? 


601 


65 . . 


. . mis 


614 


706 . . 


. . . rra 


531 


866 . . 


. . rra 


604 


165 . . 


. . bna 


803 



pbns 

' • -: It 
- : t : 

. bb 
. -bs 
. sbb 
. nbs 



bsjrbs 

t ; 
• ?? 

t ; - 

• »? 

wbn&s 
vis? 

•• ; t 

•tt It 

t t : - 
t; - 

t t : 

nnns 

t t : 

. bn? 
abns 



16 

71 
316 

74 
363 
432 
363 

96 
754 

68 
351 
351 
186 
186 
396 
396 
553 
106 
585 
417 
702 
702 
158 
350 
550 
774 

89 

16 
104 
407 

82 
121 
166 
166 
121 



. . Mb 

T 

. prwb 

' tt; t : 

H'oa-nttfnHb 
p'nnbwb 

• n»3n«b 

. ]vi«b 

t - : 

. nrnb 
. PTbnnb 

• ^ s ?b 

• ^r>??b 

-iBBfabnb 

. nnb 

. . nhb 

sanb 

T ••. i 

• wjnnab 
. . Hiib 
. . «ib 
. . tfft 

• V^A 
. . nb 

. . nb 

^ninn^nb 

rnbinb 

• M 3D^ 
nyjirib 

^n-^iinb 



inb 



181 



ar>fc 







pinb 


52 . . . 


• "iftNttb 


375 .. . 


sanorttfb 




• • l^nb 


591 .. . 


. V2Nfcb 

t : 


545 .. . 


?inibtt?b 




" • • tfn!? 


88,112 . . 


. «3npb 


113 .. . 


• N*fttt?b 




. n 7 T nV 


294 . . 


• k 1 ?^ 1 ? 


419 . . . 


■ snrtS 




n^nnb 


671 .. . 


• • ^i^h 








Pi^n*? 


386 . . 


• • Wftt*? 








nvrortb 


386 .. • 


• ^^? 


t 


) 




. "$> 


315 .. . 


. tth^ttb 


681 .. . 


. . n«D 




npoartb 

'tt i - : 


1 . . 


. . ^bsb 


591 .. . 


T 




nbsanb 

t t : - : 


1 . . 


• N3%S 


120 . . 


• T«) 




. nbsnb 

t t ~ : 


613 .. . 


. Nnppb 


762 . . 


• IP?? 




nrvibfrp 


392 . . 


• wsjnb 


671 . . 


• • H? 




nrfiapnb 
i T _. _ 


496 . . 


• P?^V? 


677 .. . 


T T T 




. nnDE?nb 


631 . . 


. HnHfrA 


299 . . 


. . nana 




• n^dnb 


323 . . 


• n™ 1 ? 


299 . . 


KHptt 




nbsttfnb 


171 . . 


isaiMiA 


217 . . 


• • nj?» 




. mamnb 

t t : _ : 


290 . . 


t t - : 


75 . . 


lirrrra 




. Tynsinnnb 

t t -.- : 


476 . . 


• • *)fob 


530 . . 


• T?*? 




. nbftpnnb 

t t ': : • : 


34 . . 


. *m>»b 


98 . . 


. . . n& 

T 




. wnvnb 


2 . . 


' • : 1 r : 


256 . . 


• • yiP-P 




• • ^sn 1 ? 


6 . . 


• *H??> 


144 . . 


. . NTfriE 




Vp*2lj*? 


280 . . 


• • • B?V 


284 . . 


• • X&V& 




- • • D r6 


522 . . 


• • Tlf? 


413 . . 


• • trWrea 






Msanb 


857 . . 


. . . *mh 


413 . . 


r?V™ 






. -fltob 


190 . . 


■ ■ D ^ 


99 . . 


nD^nnp 






. wb 


190 . . 


. . saSsS 


129 . . 


• rnirna 






. " % 


326 . . 


. . bnph 

" t:t 


127 . . 


. Naa?n» 






• ^ 


326 . . 


. . bapb 


144 . . 


. site 






s^b 


196 . . 


• *>=$ 


643 . . 


. . sra 






t • - : 


91 . . 


. . nb&pb 

t t'~ : 


99 . . 


T : : - 






rnp^b 


697 . . 


. . na*pb 

tt'-: 


216 . . 


. .nn» 

t : 






• *> 


546 . . 


• • MS? 1 ? 


474 . . 


• • N &D 






. tfA 


576 . . 


^niarnanb 


474 . . 


• • n ^ 






. . br>b 


521 


t • 1 r • 


753 . . 


. . . Jjtaa 






• *?^ 


303 . . 


. . tTTTtrfS 


229 . . 


T 1 






"C 1 ?? 1 ? 


375 . . 


. nraapa^ 


527 . . 


. ' . nteft 






H^anb 


375 . . 

2 


' t It ■• : 

c 


109 . . 


. bsa^D 

•' T 



BWB 



182 



SttD 





. tjbp? 


628 . . 


. iwzp 


735 . 






. . ma 




. jyispp 


533 .. , 


r???p 


23 . 






ninna 




. PDnS» 


691 .. . 


. . TBEJ 


626 . 


* 




ri^na 




. r$* 


292 .. . 


• • *T!? 


810 . 






, nna 




• MJ%? 


520 . . 


. . WZp 


157 . 






rottfna 




. . "pbD 


769 .. . 


. flta'HJB 


21 . 






• t; 




• -^a 


644 . . 


. nnE 


352 . 






. ina 




. «3bp 


258 .. . 


. yy-p 


352 . . 






. sn-ia 




• ow 


145 . . 


• • nsra 


686 . . 






• pg 




. ntobp 


375 . . 


• -pr#? 


8 . . 






• KID? 




MTTdSb 


176 . . 


TjrDttfp 


207 . . 






. tfna 

t : 




. ^JTO 


792 . . 


• ^ittfn 


207 . 






stpna 




tyn^bp 


645 . . 


• bQttfo 


488 . . 






. nna 

• T 




t t : : - 


338 . . 


HJTjyhtjte 


564 . . 






nb&a 




. WB 


622 . . , 


pttfaritfa 


869 . 






J"™? 




• MJ? 1 ^ 


722 .. . 


. iwite 


346 . 






. 1203 




• r?W 


610 . . 


. pnnnfr? 


285 . 






' ^« 




. NroSa 


624 . . 


. H T fittfp 


845 . 






!)bD3 




. /bba 


795 .. . 


. bsnipn 


345 . 






7^53 

* • ;It 




. . wnbp 


621 . . 


bnariE 

~ t : • 


86 . 






• . pp? 




. . nnb£ 


315 . . 


. vttfasna 


600 . 






. . <?psa 

'tt : 




• M»a 


24 . . 


• ■ 7?™ 


422 .. . 






ri?? 1T 




. sbbpp 


24 . . 


• ^0?™ 


86 . 






jib?? 




. /' ?p 


687 . . 


. raanp 


263 . 






Nnasa 

t : : • 




. i^a 


269 . . 




806 . 






• •MR? 




. . M3B 


269 . . 


. r^™™ 


612 ... . jp|g 




. . njfc 


87 . . 


. pbai2na 


658 ... . tTnEttn 

t : : • 




• • ?inaa 






561 nsfo 




. ^nao 




3 






. . ^p 






H 




• • '?P 


33, 231 . . 


§&«a 


D 




. . . jt3& 

T * ~ 


171 . . 


nsrpsoa 


339 ... . *03D 

x • — 




■ . . u» 


602 . . 


s$$roa 


287 . 




. . . -DO 




. "•nfrnsB 


711 . . 


• • - T '- - n 33 


346 . 




* • Mt 




. . tni^p 


811 . . 


. . . nriri 

"T 


300 . 




• ♦ V^o 




•• tI" 


305 . . 


. . . iaa 


342 . 








. . m_2B 


833 . . 


. . nana 


476 . 






HB!)D 



"bo 



183 



tnp 



180 
180 
180 
282 
684 



19 . 

573 . 

305 . 

848 . 

374 . 

420 . 

573 . 

302 . 

302 . 

39 . 

39 . 

39 . 

39 . 
39, 506 

430 . 

241 . 

94 . 

563 . 

563 . 

486 . 

486 . 

59 . 

101 . 

690 . 

59 . 

421 . 

515 . 

839 . 

59 . 



vVp 


101 


npbo 

t : • 


101 
463 


• ^P? 


625 


1 • : It 


2 




123 




2 




777 


• *™ 


280 


•• T 


76 


iar-ny 

■• T 


140 


may 

t : It 


136 


*™? 


331 


"•rrrro 


9 


may 

'• : ~ t: 


31 


riTny 


9 


sriTny 

t : • " 


543 


• ^ 


826 


• 1*? 


483 


T T • 


477 


T~ T • 


740 


r?t? 


494 


• rn? 


655 


. *)!$ 


502 


T T 


688 


' ^1? 


682 


ry.? 


372 


. -j^ 


801 


r^^ 




. by 




• *» 




. nby 


422 


• ** 


261 


. sKby 


394 


rrby 


364 


rat^s 


364 


tpb* 

' T-! 


262 



Thy 


605 . . 


. : . D9 


f&* 


605 . . 


. . . NDB 


rbby 

nbby 


341 . . 
209 . . 


T - 


. cby 


209 . . 


. . «bns> 


Nttby 

t : It 


669 . . 


T v : - 


r*??g 


663 . . 


. . . ons 


r? 1 ^? 


759 . . 


. . fcwna 


. cy 


540 . . 


• • • Pis 


. Dy 


7 . . 


. . . n&& 


• TO? 


7 . . 


. «nti?Q 


stipw 


516 . . 


. • *™fe 


T~ ; - 


7 . . , 


• n l^s 


■• T 


377 .. . 


. mns 


. SD3J 


310 . . 


. rpiis 


• W? 


709 . . 


. . -mns 


••T I- 


709 . . 


. jnvis 


" : t 


2 




-"*?? 


512 .. . 


• • N ?? 


• T2? 


729 .. . 


. . !DS 


T T t~: 


841 .. . 


. H02 


SStpy 

t : • 


619 .. . 


. rnwj's 


rp&y 


619 .. . 


• Twj? 


• n ^y 


190 . . 


• • c ^ 


rTTO 


190 . . . 


. Httbs 


pvro 


485 .. . 


. -nay 



. . S|p!|B 

• rnba 



195 D ^ 

835 ... . s^Sp 

43 bap 

6 ™ bap 

467 ... . f.Btap 

29 Dip 

t't: 



mp 



184 



tobttf 



29 . . 






t t't: 


175 .. . 


. PTtEW 


704 . . 


. . nfttth 


29 . . 
767 . . 
793 . . 






Wp 
- t't: 

N^1P_ 

npzrrp 


175 .. . 

175 .. . 

63 . . . 






to 


464 . . 

767 . . 
767 . . 
715 . . 






SJTIOTp 
t-it :'- 

«n^-rp 

t ;It :'- 

np7f7 


764 .. . 

472 . . . 
814 . . . 
526 .. . 


T - 


27 . . 
297 . . 
359 . . 
439 . . 


. . wato 
• • )w*to 
. . . n*\b 
. . . &b 


781 . . 






• ^p 


253, 415 . 


N^m 


359 . . 


. . . mw 


674 . . 






b^p 


843 .. . 


Nrrya-i 


359 . . 


. . rnsto 


819 . . 






rh>pp 


524 .. . 


. nan 


426 . . 


. . mvto 


402 . 
642 . 
608 . 
223 . 
698 . 






• ^P 

•■ 't 

• V1PP 

• ^P 


295 . . . 
452 .. . 

296 .. . 
576 . . 
818 . . 


••nian-n-i 

t : : - 


66 . . 
510 . . 


w 
• • • ^p 


534 . 






. «z^p 


524 .. . 


. . nm 


116 . . 


. . . n&w 


339 . 






thrvp 


551 . , 


. sn:m 


568 . 


. . nmw 


336 . 






■ ■ \ 


210 . . 


: vrfen 


145 . 


. . nnatf 


266 . 






. . mp 


210 . . 


. N»b:h 


403 . 


. . NMtt; 


328 . 






. . «-ip 


210 . . 


• V&l 


807 . . 


. . vMa? 


849 . 






. . yip 


225 . . 


. . im 


387 . 


. . mnw 


356, 418 
356 . 






*onp 


225 . . 
225 . . 




496 . 
594 . 


. . nnbati? 


834 . 






• n T}P. 


307 . . 


. . man 


303 . 


. . . ipr^ 


337 . 






• • rca 


114 . . 


. . . n 


654 . 


• • • ^ 


337 . 






• .*?12 


114 . . 


. . . «n 


375 . 


. . . . yiw 


794 . 






• «r^p 


114 . . 


. . . Km 


456 . . 


. . . nbttf 


358 . 
358 . 






114 . . 
646 . . 


• • • xn 

. . . n-i 


440 . 
440 . 


. . . . Tibw 
. . . . s^bcJ 


291 . 




. . fcittfp 


800 . . 


. . . Y»an 


314 . 


. . . .rhw 


47 . 


. . . . fcttfft 


408 . . 

867 . . 


t •• : 


454 . 

252 . 


. . . . ttbtp 
. . . si&Sitf 


175 . 
245 . 




-i 


. PTtftn 


179 . . 

791 . . 
660 . . 
660 . . 


. . rrDsn 

t ; It 

. . Dtth 


322 . 
454 . 
454 . 
454 . 


. . . \ahbtt7 
. . . )vhu$ 
. . . rmzhw 

•• t : t 



tabs? 



185 



-inn 



864 . . 






Njafcbttf 


495 .. . 


. >nitthtp 


659 . . 






Ynbtf 


309 . . 


. . nw 


64 . 






s^W 


589 .. . 


. . nnw 

" T 


535 . . 






^to>btt? 


309 . . 


• • VR& 


446 . 






ftottbtp 


589 .. . 


• -Vnw 


122 . . 






. ' nw 






122 . 






• nvp 






113 . 






t- : 


n 


335 . 






. Etttt? 






335 . 






I . . it 


267 .. . 


. m>:an 

t • : 


636 . 






nynw 


523 .. . 


. . inn 


721 . 






t : • 


256 . . 


• • P>?w 


428 . 






. faltf 


154 .. . 


• T?inr> 


607 . 






. *71*tiW 


17 . . . 


•aansninn 


780 . 






. wati 


17 . . 


^asrfinn 


766 . 






t: it 


254 . . 


• M .inf) 


435 . 






• V?& 


23 . . 


• • I'lnnri 


766 . 






l?f? 


56 . . 


^p)r\tin 


607 . 






• • V2& 


406 . . 


. . . nin 


679 . 






• Vpti 


637 . . 


. . bpm 


348 . 






t : i — 


481 . . 


. ninn 


348 . 






xnvw 


481 . . 


. ^nirnrw 


478 . 






. . T»Qtt? 


482 . . 


• V?^? 


450 . 






. . npt27 


617 . . 


. wshn 


208 . 






>nipa? 


251 . . 


. nsrpbn 


141 . 






. . vntf 


404 . . 


. . . nbn 


412 . 






• - VIP 


620 . . 


. . anbn 

t : - 



404 . 

404 . 

717 . 

493 . 

511 . 

772 . 

32 . 

346 . 

707 . 

345 . 

321 . 

28 . 
130, 247 

665 . 

277 . 
453 . 
255 . 
453 . 
648 . 
662 . 
548 . 
335 . 
766 . 
281 . 

278 . 
19 . 

349 . 



nnbn 



. rnbn 

' • t : 

• • TO? 

sto? 

nran 

TT; • 

. niran 

t: • 

. ynzon 

• ffjifi 
. jsibsn 

. i^bspn 

snb^pn 

• c> i? n 
. SD^pn 
. ns^pn 

. nzpn 

• • ^i?J? 

• ^tt?n 
. ppntrn 
. bannn 

t - : • 

f-rasnn 
. i^-inn 



THE END. 



2 D 



